SSS - Volume 1 of 2 (Part 2 of 3)

Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School (017)

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

Page

VOLUME 1 of 2

(017a)

ANTI - TERMITE TREATMENT

Page 1 – Page 3

(017b)

ACOTEC WALL

Page 4 – Page 7

(017c)

BRICKWORK / BLOCKWORK AND PARTITION

Page 8 – Page 14

(017d)

CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY

Page 15 – Page 26

(017e)

CEILING

Page 27 – Page 36

(017f)

DOOR

Page 37 – Page 39

(017g)

DRYWALL PARTITION

Page 40 – Page 43

(017h)

EXTERNAL WORKS AND SERVICES (ANNEX 2)

Page 44 – Page 46

(017i)

EXTERNAL WORKS AND SERVICES (ANNEX 3)

Page 47 – Page 48

(017j)

EXTERNAL WORKS AND SERVICES (ANNEX 4)

Page 49 – Page 51

(017k)

FIRE PROTECTION

Page 52 – Page 54

(017l)

FIXED FURNITURE

Page 55 – Page 57

(017m)

FLOOR AND WALL

Page 58 – Page 77

(017n)

GLASS

Page 78 – Page 82

(017o)

IRONMONGERIES

Page 83 – Page 93

(017p)

LAN & SERVER ROOMS

Page 94 – Page 96

(017q)

LANDSCAPING WORKS

Page 97 – Page 118

(017r)

LOCKERS

Page 119 – Page 121

(017s)

METAL ROOF

Page 122 – Page129

(017t)

METALWORK

Page 130 – Page 141

(017u)

OFFICE SYSTEM FURNITURE & CHAIRS

Page 142 – Page 153

(017v)

OPERABLE WALLS

Page 154 – Page 158

(017w)

OUTDOOR FITNESS EQUIPMENT

Page 159 – Page 163

(017x)

PAINTING

Page 164 – Page 169

(017y)

SAFETY SURFACE MATERIAL (FOR OUTDOOR FITNESS AREA)

Page 170 – Page 172

(017z)

SANITARYWARE FITTINGS, PLUMBING,DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE WORKS

Page 173 – Page 175

(017za)

SIGNAGE

Page 176 – Page 187

(017zb)

LOUVRE

Page 188 – Page 192

Page 1 of 2 P:\Projects\Current Projects\SD2515 - MOE Package 4A1\C - Pre-Contract\C2 Tender Doc\01A. FINAL TENDER DOCS - SSS Updated\017a_Architectural Specs Contents (refer PDF for Specs).doc

Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School (017)

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

Page

VOLUME 1 of 2 (Cont’d)

(017zc)

TIMBER FLOOR STRIP

Page 193 – Page 195

(017zd)

TOILET PARTITIONS

Page 196 – Page 199

(017ze)

WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS

Page 200 – Page 213

(017zf)

WINDOW

Page 214 – Page 229

Page 2 of 2 P:\Projects\Current Projects\SD2515 - MOE Package 4A1\C - Pre-Contract\C2 Tender Doc\01A. FINAL TENDER DOCS - SSS Updated\017a_Architectural Specs Contents (refer PDF for Specs).doc

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT 1.0

2.0

3.0

GENERAL a)

All termite control measures will not cause or permit any substance or hazardous substances to be discharged into any Inland Waters, so as to be likely to cause pollution of the environment.

b)

All termite control measure will last a minimum of 10 years and will not require any future post re-treatment and/or spot treatment that may require the pumping of toxic chemicals into the ground around the vicinity of the Inland Waters, where it is liable to fall, or descend or be washed or percolate into the inland water.

c)

The Termite Control Specialist to confirm that there will not be any possibility of leaching of any toxic chemicals into any Inland Waters.

d)

The Termite Control Specialist to propose and submit the emergency plan, if required, to deal with any accidental spillage or leaching activities of any toxic chemicals, the minimum measures that will be taken to ensure and/or prevent any leaching of toxic chemicals into the Inland Waters the minimum measures to take when leaching of toxic chemical is discovered and the procedure to stop the leach as well as to recover the toxic chemicals from the Inland Waters to the satisfaction of the Pollution Control Department of NEA, Singapore.

e)

The Termite Control Specialist to fully comply with The Environmental Pollution Control Act, Chapter 94A, Section 17, (1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6), 18 (1)(2), 19 (1)(2).

TERMITE CONTROL TREATMENT a)

All new works and existing works, if any, shall be protected from subterranean termite attack.

b)

Supply and install, non-chemical, no poison, stainless steel mesh termite control system.

c)

Comply with all manufacturer’s or proprietary system published typical and/or standard details included in the specifications at the appropriate slab, slab edges and slab penetrations.

STAINLESS STEEL MESH Provide the appropriate proprietary stainless steel mesh protection at the following locations: a)

At all conduit pipes and other service penetrations, including clusters of pipes, through floor and wall slabs, and insulated services pipes. (Outside of pipe.)

b)

At all construction joints between walls or floor slabs, between non-continuous pours of wall and floor slabs, diaphragm walls, and CBP.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

4.0

c)

At all the buildings’ perimeter, ensuring that the paving level is at sufficient distance below the barrier to allow for a visual inspection zone (minimum 75mm). Detail of the mesh perimeter to vary according to the type of external wall and floor finishes.

d)

At all external services entering the building through conduits or casings etc, including insulated services pipes. (Inside of pipes)

e)

At all substantial landscaped roof and substantial plant boxes, adjacent to living spaces.

SLAB PROTECTION The concrete slab shall be considered a termite barrier and the following precautions shall be observed:

5.0

a)

The slab shall be constructed, supervised and endorsed by a registered professional structural engineer and it fully complies with the current Building Control Authority’s requirements and Code of Practice.

b)

Subsequent rendering and/or repair shall be coordinated with the System Installer.

c)

No conduits, penetrations or pipes shall be installed in the slab after pouring without prior notification to the System Installer. Where such penetrations are unavoidable, they shall be protected by retrofitted stainless steel mesh collars.

d)

For areas incorporating exposed slab edges, with no plastering and where the concrete paving is more than 75mm below the rebate level finish, the slab edge shall be finished straight and true.

SURFACE PREPARATION The Main Contractor to provide an even and clean concrete surface. Protection of the installed system by plastering, screeding or other finishes shall be by others.

6.0

DIAPHRAGM WALL or CBP CONSTRUCTION De-silt (by others) a minimum of 500mm wide, to expose base bare concrete surface, prepare and clean to receive the system.

7.0

INSTALLATION a) All installations are to be executed by the system’s Accredited Installers who have undergone extensive training in both how to install the system as well as understanding the habits of termites and are trained in the design, placement and installation of the non-chemical, no poison, stainless steel mesh termite control system. b) The non-chemical, no poison, stainless steel mesh termite control system shall be installed in accordance with the system’s manufacturer’s published

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

installation instructions and are to be protected by plastering, screed or other finishes. c)

8.0

PROPRIETARY ITEMS The following proprietary items are to be used in the installation of the non-chemical, no poison, stainless steel mesh termite control system: a) b) c)

9.0

The System will keep out termites if it is complete and not damaged. If any of the trades on the site damages or moves the mesh, clamps or parging mix, then a termite entry point could occur. The Site Supervisor should immediately contact the installer if there is damage to the System or if modifications to the design of the project are made. If any of the trades are uncertain if their work could damage any part of the barrier, then they should contact the Installer.

Mesh: Clamps: Parging:

TMA 725 Ultra-Marine grade stainless steel mesh. 300 series stainless steel. A proprietary specialised bonding, termite resistant adhesive cement, which bonds the mesh to concrete, masonry or other termite resistant substrates. Supplied as a dry and wet parge mix package.

SUBMISSION TEST REPORTS Stainless Steel Mesh The stainless steel mesh will keep out all species of termites in Malaysia, Brunei and Singapore. Parging (Portland cement/silica sand) a) Termite resistance: Field Trial minimum 6 months b) Adhesion of Render to Parging c) Evaluation of Parging joint used in the stainless steel termite barrier system

10.0

RATES For the purpose of rate schedules the system will be calculated as follows: a) b) c) d) e)

11.0

For perimeter installations: For service penetrations installations: external For service penetrations installations: internal For construction joints For full mesh application per square meters

per meter run per item (number) per item (number) per meter run

WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide warranty for anti-termite works for a period of five (5) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality of material, prevention of ingress of termites and termite activities into substrate, integrity of joints, and any damage to material, not due to fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATIONS ON ACOTEC OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT WALL SYSTEM 1.

Scope

This specification describes the performance requirements for the physical material properties, testing standards and drawings illustrate general dimension, appearance and order of size. An approved installer shall carry out the work with previous experience in other projects of this type. Such installer shall submit references and full details of their experience and supervise training in the erection and installation of Acotec or approved equivalent walls panel. 2.

Work Program

Prior to work commencement; the installer shall liaise with the Main Contractor and arrange his work to suit the Main Contractor’s entire work program. 3.

Documents / Drawings / Dimensions

This specification is to be read in conjunction with all relevant Architecture and Engineering drawings, Acotec or approved equivalent shop drawings and all documents issued for the project. The dimensions in the Architecture drawings shall take precedence over all other documents. All dimensions shall be checked during setting out and any discrepancies highlighted shall be resolved before work commences. 4.

Standards The following Standards are referenced in this Specifications :-

BS 476 : Part 22 : 1987 Methods for Determination of the Fire Resistance of Non-Load Bearing Wall Panel. Elements of Construction “Determination of The Fire Resistance of Partition” ASTM E90-90 Standards Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss (Sound Transmission Class; STC) of Building Partitions. ISO 8990 : 1994 Thermal Insulation – Determination of Steady State Thermal Transmission Properties

ASTM E72- 80 Methods for Determination of Bending Strength of Non-Load Bearing Wall Panel. BS 5234 : Part 2 : 1992 Specification for Performance Strength and Robustness Including Methods of Test.

Requirements

Annex A

Determination of Partitions Stiffness

Annex B

Determination of Surface Damage by Small Hard Body Impact

for

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Annex C Body

Determination of Resistance to Damage by Impact From a Large Soft

Annex D

Determination of Resistance to Perforation by Small Hard Body Impact

Annex E Determination of Resistance to Structural Damage by Multiple Impacts From a Large Soft Body Annex F

Determination of The Effects of Door Slamming

Annex G

Determination of Resistance to Crowd Pressure

Annex H

Lightweight Anchorage Pull-Out Test

Annex J

Lightweight Anchorage Pull-Down Test

Annex K Test

Heavyweight Anchorage (Wash Basin) Eccentric Downward Loading

Annex L Heavyweight Anchorage (High Level Wall Cupboard) Eccentric Downward Loading Test MS 26 : Part 2 : 1991 Section 9 Method for Determination of Water Absorption 5.

Approvals

The complete installation shall comply with all applicable requirements of the building regulations of Malaysia.

All Acotec or approved equivalent walls panel shall be quality checked in the factory complete with sufficient natural curing before deliver to the site. Upon arrival at site, the Main Contractor shall inspect the said panels before installation is allowed. 6.

Mock-up Unit

As and when directed by the Main Contractor, prepare the actual mock-up show unit for approval. Upon approved for surface finish and all tolerance, commence construction for the entire project. All units constructed to the site shall match the approved prototype. 7.

Quality Assurance

All Acotec or approved equivalent walls panel shall be manufactured in compliance with quality system in accordance to MS ISO 9001 : 2000 Quality Management Systems requirements. 8.

Material Properties

The Acotec or approved equivalent walls panel shall be dry mix hollow core concrete panel consisting of chipping, sand, cement and water.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

The lightweight panel shall have the following performance criteria:Descriptions

75mm Thick

100mm Thick

Weight (kg/m2)

110

140

Dimensional accuracy (mm)

±5.0

±5.0

Hollow Core Diameter (mm)

44

68

Compressive Strength (N/mm2) (based on cube test)

25

25

Compressive Strength (N/mm2) (based on section test)

15

15

Fire Rating (Hours)

1

Sound Insulation (STC) Descriptions Horizontal Load Test (N/mm2)

37 75mm Thick

46 100mm Thick

3.5

8.5

2

2

Thermal Conductivity (W/mK)

0.25

0.25

Thermal Resistance (m2K/W)

0.3

0.4

5

5

Bending Strength (N/mm2)

Water absorption (%) 9.

Workmanship

Acotec or approved equivalent walls panel shall be installed in accordance to the manufacturer’s written instructions. For new installers, the on-site training would be provided. 10.

Handling, Transport and Storage

All Acotec or approved equivalent walls panel shall be sufficiently cured for 14 days prior to delivery to site. Such panels shall be palletized in five (5) pieces per pallet. Upon arrival at site, the Main Contractor shall provide hoisting to unload and deliver the Acotec or approved equivalent walls panel to the floor and general area of the work as required. All labour and equipment required for the distribution of Acotec or approved equivalent walls panel, once delivered to the floor level of installation, shall be the responsibility of the installers. 11.

Cleaning

Take care of all times to keep the walls clean. Remove excess adhesive progressively. Clean strictly in accordance to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

12.

Completion

On completion clean cut all blocks, adhesive droppings, debris, etc and remove all scaffolding, make good all blemishes and leave all work in good condition and protect until handover.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK 1.0

BRICKWORK

1.1

Clay Bricks All bricks shall be hard, well burnt bricks and shall be of a standard size of 215 x 102.5 x 65 inches thick, or modular metric size of 190 x 90 x 90 mm thick or 290 x 90 x 90 mm thick, and comply with SS 103. They shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer. Facing bricks shall have an approved texture and colour and shall have sharp, welldefined arises. The Contractor shall allow for, when directed by the Superintending Officer (SO), to take additional samples of bricks of each type from each consignment free of charge for testing. Bricks for fair-faced work shall be individually selected from consignments delivered to the site, with particular regard to uniformity of size and approved colour, with perfect arises, true faces where exposed and absence of minor defects. Facing bricks, unless otherwise described, shall be the specified type obtained from an approved manufacturer. The Engineering bricks shall comply with B.S. 3921 Class A or the relevant S.S. Code and be obtained from an approved manufacturer. Solid Bricks without holes to be used for all walls. All bricks shall be carefully stacked on arrival. Chipped bricks/blocks shall not be used for fair face work

1.2

Mortar a)

Cement The cement shall be Portland Cement or other approved equivalent subject to approval of the Consultant Engineer.

b)

Water All water used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout, for cleaning out formwork and for curing to be clean and free from harmful matter in solution or suspension.

c)

Sand Sand for brickwork shall comply with B.S. 1200 or the relevant S.S. code, and shall be clean, sharp, fresh water river sand, free from clay and other impurities and shall be washed and/or screened if required by the Superintendent Officer

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

1.3

Mortar Mix The mortar shall be a 1:3 mix, well mixed with an approved mortar plasticizer. The mortar shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 4887 or the relevant S.S. code and used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The exact amount of sand required, where not fixed by the above, is to be varied between the limits stated according to the nature of the sand, so as to obtain adequate workability. Mixing of all mortar is to be done either by means of a mechanical batch mixer of an approved type or by hand on a clean water-tight platform of adequate size, the materials being turned over twice in a dry state and twice while water is added. The materials for mortar are to be measured in accurate gauge boxes, which are to be completely filled with the top leveled off. No mortar containing cement is to be used later than 30 minutes after the addition of water to the cement or after it has commenced to set, and no mortar which has commenced to set is to be knocked up for re-use.

1.4

Brick Laying All bricks shall be soaked in water for at least half an hour immediately before being laid and all constructed brickwork must be cured with water for five days and protected from the sun's rays for two days after laying. All bricks are to be well buttered with mortar before being laid and all joints are to be completely filled with mortar as the work proceeds. Single-frogged bricks are to be laid frog uppermost. Brickwork is to be laid to rise four courses to not more than 300mm. Brickwork is to be carried out uniformly, no portion under construction being raised more than 900mm above another at any time. All perpend, quoins etc., are to be kept strictly perpendicular true and square, and every course is to be kept truly level. Brickwork to all walls must be constructed of solid bricks. No perforated bricks are allowed unless otherwise permitted by the SO. Tops of walls where work is left off shall be well wetted before work on them is resumed. Cracked, broken or damaged bricks will not be allowed for use in the work. Overhand laying must not be used without the approval of the SO Predetermine setting out so that full bricks occur under lintel bearings. The Contractor shall provide proper setting out rods and set out the same all work showing opening heights, cills and lintols and shall build the various walls and piers to the thickness, widths and heights shown on the drawings.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

1.5

Restrictions on Brick Laying No brickwork is to be built off or supported on reinforced concrete beams, slabs, or concrete encased structural beams until a minimum of 7 days after formwork and props supporting the concrete have been removed. Care should be taken to avoid the stacking of bricks which may induce excessive concentrated load on the structure.

1.6

Bond All brickwork except half brick walls shall be in English bond. Half brick walls shall be in stretcher bond. All shall be built in level courses. No four courses shall rise more than 25mm above the same laid dry. All perpend, reveals, quoins and other angles of the walls, etc. shall be built strictly true plumb and square. No broken bricks or bats shall be used except where closers are required at quoins, joints, etc. to make bond. Bats are to be used only where required for bond. No portion to exceed 900mm above adjoining parts whilst being built and all working junctions to be racked back and not toothed up.

1.7

Bonding Ties Provide bonding ties consisting of 6mm diameter mild steel rods 450mm long, hooked both ends, one cast into concrete columns and the other built into brickwork. Tie 450mm x 50mm strips of Exmet to top of bars to form adequate brickwork bond.

1.8

Brick Reinforcement Brick reinforcement shall be bitumen coated "Exmet" 22 gauge or other approved mesh reinforcement at every fourth course and shall be 64mm wide for 75mm and 115mm walls and 180mm wide for 200mm walls. No. 24 gauge "Hyrib" metal lathing 200mm wide or other equal and approved shall be laid vertically over joints between concrete columns and brick wall. All half brick thick walls shall be reinforced with a layer of approve brickwork reinforcement at every fourth course .All 100 mm thick hollow block walls shall be reinforced with a layer of approved reinforcement at every course. Mesh reinforcement shall be 62 mm wide expanded mild steel strip of 0.711 mm (22 SWG), the bottom most reinforcement being 150 mm above floor of foundation level. The reinforcement shall be lapped 150 mm at all joints and carried, through the full thickness of the end wall at comers and junctions. Where the wall bonds with thicker walls, the reinforcement shall be carried through the thicker wall.

1.9

Damp-Proof Course All damp-proof courses shall consist of one layer of three-ply purpose made bituminous sheeting or other equal and approved products, complying with the requirements of B.S. 743 or the relevant S.S. code, laid with 150mm overlap at joints and angles on a 19mm bed of 1:3 cement mortar. A full coat of hot bitumen shall be applied over the mortar and again over the bitumen sheeting.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

1.10

Damp Proof Membrane This shall be approved heavy grade polythene sheet or other approved specified products, with all joints twice 50mm folded and taped together and laid on top of lean concrete blinding. Take all necessary precautions to ensure that the polythene sheets or other specified products are not torn or punctured, particularly during construction stage.

1.11

Fair-Faced Brickwork All facing bricks and fair-faced brickwork shall be constructed with a uniform face internally or externally as shown in the drawings, carefully set in cement mortar, raked out joints and pointed with a neat weathered joint as work proceeds. Coloured cement pointing will be used if so specified All areas of fair faced brickwork or facing brick shall be protected by gunny sacks, or other suitable materials from mortar droppings, rubbing, staining or other surface adhesions until such time as work is handed over as complete. No rubbing down of brickwork shall be permitted. No faced work shall be painted or shall be given any form of surface treatment without the approval of the S.O.

1.12

Cavity Walls The air space of cavity walls is to be kept clear of mortar droppings and other debris and all wall ties are to be wiped clean. Openings are to be left at the base of the cavity and over lintols etc. for clearing out on completion and are subsequently to be bricked up.

1.13

Openings in Walls Opening for doors, windows, vents, etc shall be properly mapped out and left un-built until the wooden/metal frames have been fixed in position. All timber frames shall be built in as the work proceeds and the backs of frames to include for one coat of aluminium wood primer before fixing. All door frames, window frames, vent, frames, plates, etc are to be bedded solidly at the back in cement mortar (1:3) and pointed as described. Provide and fix galvanised/wrought iron holdfast, of size 40 x 230 x 3mm thick and fixed at centres as required by the S.O, to all timber frames abutting walls. All holdfast shall have one end twice hooked, bent and screwed to timber frame, other end fishtailed and built into brick or concrete wall. Before building into brickwork, the holdfast shall be painted with one coat of approved anti-rust chromate primer.

1.14.

Mortices, Holes, Chases Cutting of openings for other trades shall be avoided as much as possible. Where

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

required, such cutting of openings shall be done subjects to S.O.’s approval. The bricklayer shall provide in walls the openings required by other trades and shall do all cutting and making good. All chases, fair and raking cutting, beam filling, corbelling and cutting groove for flashings shall be formed or cut as required. All ducts, recesses for service lines and the like shall be formed to the correct dimensions. Forming chases in brick wall for concealing pipes, conduits etc, shall be of the smallest depth necessary for the purpose and excessive cutting shall be avoided at all times. Chases shall be formed by machine cutting without cracking or splitting the brick wall or causing any serious damage. The Contractor shall rectify all damage caused at his own expense and time and in the manner as directed by the S.O. 1.15

Cleaning On Completion On completion, make good all damaged joints on exposed faces of brickwork. Clean all exposed faces of brickwork with a solution of diluted hydro-chloric acid and clean water and afterwards with clean water only to remove surplus mortar, stains and dirt, etc.

1.16

Key For Plaster Except where specified to be fairface, all faces of brickwork are to be left rough and the joints raked out to a depth of 13mm whilst the mortar is green to form adequate key for plaster.

1.17

Sundry Items Leave or form all holes, mortices, chases etc., cut and fit brickwork around steelwork and concrete, build in ends of cills, joist etc., and carry out all other labours shown on the drawings or as necessary for the execution of the work. All bolts, brackets, lugs etc. are to be grouted or pinned in solidly with cement mortar, and holes and chases for pipes, conduits, etc are to be packed solidly with cement mortar or fine concrete.

2.0

AERATED CONCRETE BLOCKS Aerated concrete blocks shall be from approved manufacture complying with B.S. 2028 Type B 1364:1968 or the relevant S.S. code and shall be of the shape and sizes as shown on the drawings. The minimum Compressive Strength shall be 7 N/mm 2. The hollow blocks shall be manufactured in ordinary Portland cement, dry mixed in the ratio of 1 part cement to 3 parts of sand and pressure-pressed in metal moulds. All block shall then be cured for at least two weeks and shall not be used until at least two

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

months from date of manufacture had lapsed. All defective, chipped or under strength blocks shall not be used and shall be removed from site immediately. All blocks shall be finished smooth, ready to be painted. Build concrete hollow block walls at locations indicated, bedded and pointed in cement and sand mortar (1:3). 3.0

GLASS BLOCKWALLS Glass block walls shall be as specified in the drawings. The glass block shall be first quality glass blocks, or approved equivalent, and laid in accordance to the manufacturer's instructions, in particular to the provision of expansion joints, sealants, pointings, fixing accessories, etc and to the approval of the S.O. Samples shall be submitted to the S.O. for selection and approval. All accessories must be accompanied with the submission including special shape and corner pieces for 90 degree angles. The glass blocks shall comply with the following properties: Country of manufacture Sizes

: Italy : 240mm x 240mm 80mm, 190mm x 190mm x 80mm, half size blocks, slip proof, cross ribbed, squared,

satin, Specific Weight Hardness (Mohs Scale) Specific Heat Index of Refraction Light Transmission Linear expansion Modulus of Elasticity Compressive Strength Flexural Strength Impact Strength Poisson’s Ratio Heat Transmittance Fire Resistance

4.0

clear, smooth and wavy. : 2,5000kg/m3 : 6.0 : 64.5 J/kg 0K : 1.5 : >75% (clear) : 0.000007 cm/cm 0K : 760,000kg/cm2 : 7N/mm2 : 40N/mm2 : 2KN : 0.2 : DIN 52619 : ASTM C236 : DIN 4102 part 5

WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO EXTERNAL FACING BRICKWALLS 4.1

General

4.2

The Contractor shall carry out water test to the external facing brick walls to test the water tightness of external wall construction. The external facing brick walls directly facing the exterior but exclude walls along balcony parapet walls at the staircases. Source of Water

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

The water used for filling up of reinforced concrete water tank before the sterilization shall be used for the water tightness test to the external facing brick walls. The Contractor shall only be allowed to sterilize the water tank after completion of the water tightness test to the external facing brick walls. Power Supply's potable water shall not be used for the water tightness test to external facing brick walls. Power Supply's potable water shall not be used for the water tightness to external facing brick walls except for re-test cases. 4.3

Method of Testing 10% of the façade of external brick wall or area as directed by the S.O. or his Representative shall be tested for water tightness. Provide the following information to the S.O. or his Representative for approval at least 2 months before the water test to be carried out: a) The entire equipment set up to conduct the water test b) Procedure of the water c) Pump capacity to deliver the required flow rate d) The method to suspend the nozzle The nozzle of the water jet shall be fixed at a distance of 1800mm to 2000mm away from the surface of the external wall and incline at 30 o to the external wall. The capacity of water delivered shall be 300 liters per hour and the duration of testing is 2 hours. The nozzle shall be placed in such a way that it covers the entire wall panel. Ensure that the drawing of water from the water tank for testing does not contaminate the water tank. The wall panel shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage appears at the internal surface of the wall panel or the adjacent areas during the spraying and within half hour after the completion of spraying. Portable Field Water-Tightness Testing Device developed by BCA in collaboration with Jetsis International is recommended to be used for the for the aforesaid water tightness testing

4.4

Failure of the Testing In the event of any failure in the first water tightness test, the Trade Contractor shall rectify the dampness and/or leakage and carry out a second water tightness test. Another 10% façade of external brick wall or additional area as directed by the S.O. or his Representative for the second water tightness test. In the event of the second water tightness test fails, the Contractor shall carry out water tightness test to all external facing brick wall panels for the whole block. The Contractor shall rectify all leakages and repeat the test until all the external facing brick walls have passed the test. The costs and expenses of all the water tightness tests, retests and rectification work shall be borne by the Contractor. In addition, the S.O or his Representative reserves the right to reject any external facing brick wall that performs unsatisfactorily during the water tightness tests.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

1.0

GENERALLY

1.1.

All timber shall be the best of its kind, well seasoned, free from shakes, waney edges, large or unsound knots, spongy or brittle heart, and any other defects.

1.2.

All timber shall be graded in accordance with the latest approved rule of the Malaysian Grading Rules for Sawn Hardwood Timber and the Contractor shall obtain and produce to the S.O a Grading Certificate in accordance with the rule from the Grading Authority. The Contractor shall pay all grading fees and any other charges in connection therewith. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for grading to be carried out. Such fees and charges shall be included in the rates for carpentry and joinery.

1.3.

All graded timber shall be marked with the grade mark, the standard name of the timber and the registered number of the Timber Grader. No ungraded timber shall be brought onto the site or into the Contractor's joinery workshop. The SO may order the removal of any such ungraded timber from the site.

1.4.

Before any payment is made to the Contractor in respect of timber used in the works, the Grading Certificate covering the said timber must be produced to the SO.

1.5.

The grade of timber used in the works shall not be lower than "Standard & Better Grade M.G.R.". This grade allows a small number of defects in the timber, including a limited amount of sapwood. All visible surfaces of timber when fixed in position shall be entirely free from sapwood, knots, and any other defects.

1.6.

After the Contractor has taken delivery of the graded and seasoned timber, it shall be stored under cover and shall be kept perfectly dry before use. The SO may inspect the timber at any time to ensure that it is being stored under proper conditions and may reject any timber improperly stored.

2.0

UNWROT AND WROT TIMBERS

2.1

Unwrot timbers shall be left with a sawn face to hold the full dimensions specified or shown on the drawings. In wrot timbers, an allowance of 2mm for each wrought face shall be allowed for "nominal" sizes specified or shown on the drawings.

3.0

TIMBER FOR CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

3.1

All timber for carpentry works shall be Kapoh, keruning. Merbau and any other timber within the same strength group as classified in SS CP1 while all timber for joinery works and fittings shall be in Kapoh unless otherwise stated.

3.2

The type and grade of timbers shall be as stated in the Drawing, or the Scope of Works. Unless otherwise stated, the use of timber shall comply with the Code of Practice on "Use of Timber in Building" - CP1.

3.3

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.4

All timber shall also be pressure impregnated with fire retardant chemical or compound approved by FSB. Certificate of Application shall be submitted to the SO. All treatment shall be strictly to manufacturer's specification to achieve the requirements laid down by FSB.

3.5

The Contractor to ensure that both treatments is compatible and do not affect performance of timber.

3.6

All timber shall also be pressure treated with an approved wood preservative by pressure impregnation method in accordance with the relevant B.S. or S.S. codes. The Contractor shall submit to the SO, certificates of treatment for each consignment of timber.

3.7

If applicable, and where specified that any existing timber joists that are in good condition and certified sound by the Engineer shall be retained, the existing paint work shall be sand off and the timber treated with approved fire retarder and wood preservative.

3.8

Pressure Treatment

3.9

3.8.1

Timbers where described as "pressure treated" shall be impregnated under vacuum and pressure with an approved proprietary wood preservative to comply with the relevant B.S. or S.S. codes and be treated in accordance with the relevant B.S. or S.S. codes and Code of Practice.

3.8.2

The treatment shall be carried out by an approved specialist firm and in a manner approved by the SO and in strict compliance with the manufacturer's specification to achieve the relevant B.S. or S.S. codes.

3.8.3

The Contractor shall produce a certificate from the supplier that the timber has been pressure treated in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and showing the quantities and sizes of timber treated and the nett retention of dry salt obtained. The dry salt retention in all timber is subject to the approval of the SO.

3.8.4

Ends of pressure treated timber which are cut or bored shall also be treated and sealed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Moisture Content 3.9.1

All timber shall be properly seasoned and dried until the moisture content of timber complies to Table 1.0 - Moisture Content Of Timber For Various Positions In Buildings (Source : CP7 1978 Code Of Practice For The Structural Use Of Timber).

3.9.2

The timber shall be stored under a covered shed and properly stacked to enable air to circulate freely around all faces. The Contractor shall determine the moisture content either by a moisture meter or by the standard weighing method.

3.9.3

The SO shall reject any joinery timbers having a moisture content other than the acceptable limits as specified. The SO reserves the right to submit any timber to the Singapore Institute of Standards & Industrial Research for test and report.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.9.4

The Contractor shall replace at his own expense any timbers which shrink or are damaged in finished work caused through the use of imperfectly seasoned timber.

3.9.5

The Contractor is responsible for the accuracy of all dimensions and shall carry out site checks to determine the actual dimension of such works, where necessary. All inaccuracy will have to be corrected at the Contractor's expense.

3.9.6

Setting out drawings showing the positions and locations of all furniture in relation to the floor services shall be submitted to the SO prior to the commencement of any works.

3.9.7

Mock-ups, samples of materials, finishes, colors and prototypes of each item of furniture required to be provided or submitted, when directed by the SO, shall be approved by the SO in writing prior to the commencement of such works. The Contractor shall allow for the provision of mock-ups and sample submissions within his tender and the contract period. Approved prototypes may be incorporated into the works.

3.9.8

All timber shall be selected from the best grade suitable for its purpose and shall be sound, well seasoned and free from sapwood or other defects in so far as they are likely to have a deleterious effect on the durability, structural soundness or appearance of the work.

3.9.9

All timber shall be delivered to the site as soon as possible after commencement of works and shall be open-stacked on stickers under cover so as to ensure maximum seasoning and to inhibit warping, etc.

3.9.10 Unless otherwise specified or scheduled, the following timber or equivalent alternative nominated or approved by the Client shall be used, all subject to approved samples.

3.9.11 Exposed timber surfaces shall of the following finishes: a) in selected veneer ply and oak/touched edging to all areas. b) in laminate finish of approved colors. 3.9.12 Generally framing timber shall be of wrot kapur or kempas. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing proposed rafter and ply decking layout to SO for approval. 3.9.13 Timber shall be in single lengths where possible. Where joining is unavoidable, these joints shall be staggered and scarfed over supports. 3.9.14 The dimensions of all sawn or wrot timbers are finished sizes unless otherwise stated. 3.10

Storage All timber shall be properly stacked to enable air to circulate freely around all faces and stored under a properly constructed and roofed enclosure.

3.11

Framing Timber All framing timber shall be correctly seasoned timber to the requirements of the BS Standard 1186 before fabrication.

3.12

Timber Treatment

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.12.1 All timber used shall be of the best quality, perfectly dry and well seasoned, sawn die square, free from sap, shakes, weary edges, knots and all other defects. 3.12.2 All timber shall be pressure impregnated by treating with wood preservative by the full cell vacuum/pressure impregnation process. All timbers to be treated shall be machined to the final dimensions in which they shall be used before impregnation. Where subsequent sundry labour such as cross-cutting, boring, etc. is unavoidable, all exposed surfaces shall be liberally swabbed with an approved wood preservative. 3.12.3 All timber shall be in properly morticed, tendoned, shouldered, wedged, pinned, bradded, etc. 3.12.4 All visible nails in joinery work shall be punched in and stopped. Screws shall comply with SS 186:1978. 4.0

NAILS, BOLTS, ETC.

4.1

Nails, screws, bolts, nuts and other fastenings etc shall comply with the relevant B.S. or S.S. codes.

4.2

All nails, screws, bolts and other fastenings are to be of a suitable type and size and in sufficient number. Where necessary to avoid splitting, holes for nails are to be prebored to a diameter not exceeding four-fifths that of the nail. Holes for bolts are to be bored from both surfaces of the timber, and are to be of a diameter equal to 11/16 times that of the bolt. Washers are to be used under all nuts and bolt heads. Nuts are to be brought up tight but not so as to crush the timber.

4.3

Timber connectors shall be as specified and teeth or rings are to fully embedded in the timber.

4.4

Where fixing with cups and screws is specified, the cups are to brass turned or heavy pressed pattern. Screws heads shall be countersunk and filled or pelleted as specified. Pallets shall be cut from matching timber and fixed with grain running in the same directions as that of the timber.

4.5

4.6

Wrot faces are to be sanded to a perfectly smooth surfaces with slightly rounded exposed arises before receiving decorative finishes. Timber for joinery with natural finish, varnished or polished finish is to be selected to match grain and colour and be free of other defects.

4.7

Plugging Plugging for fixing carpentry or joinery to brickwork or concrete shall be wood plugs cut with a slightly twisted taper to fit tightly into the joint or mortice into which they are driven, or dove-tailed where cast in-situ or built in. Wood plugs are to be treated with wood preservative. Alternatively, for screwed fixings, "Rawlplugs" or other approved similar plugs may be used.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

4.8

Glue Glue is to be approved resin-based or synthetic rein-based adhesive of appropriate type, and is to be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

4.9

4.10

Fixing And Fasteners 4.9.1

Timbers shall be fixed to brickwall or reinforced concrete structure by means of "Rawlplugs" hardwood plugs and screws, ramsets or other approved fixing devices at such centres to provide secure fixing.

4.9.2

The Contractor shall obtain the SO's permission for the usage of "Ramset" fixing apparatus or other similar cartridge power fixing gun and steel fasteners.

4.9.3

Timber which are required to be secret-fixed shall be finished with countersunk-screwed and pelleted.

4.9.4

Brass screws shall be used for all fixings and each shall be of the size necessary for proper fixing.

Power Fixing Timber To Concrete 4.10.1 Fixing of timber to concrete with power driven fasteners shall be carried out by means of an approved automatic cartridge operated hand tool used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 4.10.2 The Contractor shall obtain, if required, all necessary licenses required for the use of power driven fasteners and shall pay all fees in connection.

5.0

WORKMANSHIP

5.1

General 5.1.1

All carpentry works shall be accurately set out in strict accordance with the drawings, framed together and securely fixed.

5.1.2

Joints in carpentry timber are to be accurately formed and of appropriate type to transmit the loading and resist the stresses to which they are subject. Abutting surfaces in timber exposed to the weather are to be thickly coated with priming paint immediately before assembly, unless required to be glued.

5.1.3

Joints in plates, heads and cills of partitions and similar members are to be halved 150mm long or, at angles, for the width of the member. Joints in purlins, ridges and similar members are to be scarfed for a length equal to twice the depth of the member, and tightly wedged. Rafters or joints trimmed around openings are to be correctly framed with tusk-tenon joints and dovetailed housings. Studs in partitions are to be stud-tenoned at head and cill. All bolts, nails, screws, spikes plugs, bolts, etc shall be provided by the Contractor as necessary and as directed by the SO.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

5.2

5.3

5.1.4

Every post, beam, joist, rafters, stud, strut, tie and similar members is to extend in one piece between its supports or fixings unless otherwise specified or approved in writing, in which case it is to be adequately jointed in an approved manner.

5.1.5

Plates, heads and cills of partitions and similar members are to be in one piece between points of change of direction provided that halved joints may be used to avoid the use of timbers exceeding 6.0m long.

Notching, Holes, etc 5.2.1

Where joists, rafters, etc are notched over supports the depth of the notch is not to exceed two-fifths of the depth of the member.

5.2.2

Holes in joists etc., for pipes are to be as near to the neutral axis as possible and are not to exceed one- quarter of the depth of the member.

Bolts Connections Bolts connecting timbers loaded parallel to the grain shall be spaced a minimum of eight times the diameter of the bolt from the end of the timber. Bolts connecting timbers loaded perpendicular to the grain shall be spaced a minimum of four times the diameter of the bolt from the load edge. No bolt shall be closer than twice the diameter of the bolt to any edge of timber. Minimum bolt spacing shall be two and a half times the diameter of the bolt.

5.4

5.5

Joinery Work 5.4.1

One sample of each type of joinery work shall be accurately set out to full size with all joints, ironwork and other works connected therewith and submitted to the Architect for approval prior to commencement of respective works.

5.4.2

All work shall be properly morticed, tenoned, shouldered, wedged, pinned, nailed etc. as directed and to the satisfaction of the SO. The above works shall be properly glued up with quality approved glue.

5.4.3

All exposed surfaces of joinery work shall be wrought unless otherwise specified. All sizes stated are nominal sizes unless otherwise stated as finished sizes. Where there are no full size details, exposed corners of frames, glazing bars and other finishes shall be rounded.

5.4.4

All visible nails in joinery work shall be punched in and stopped.

5.4.5

Where glued joinery work is likely to come into contact with moisture, the glue shall be of an approved waterproof type.

Fixing Frames 5.5.1

Fixing door and window frames into concrete structure - Door and window frames shall fit neatly into the openings. All crevices between frames and walls, beams or other structures shall be filled up with cement mortar (1:1).

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Heads of window and door frames which abut concrete structure shall be fixed with concrete nails and ramset, and the feet of door frames fixed according to details. 5.5.2

Fixing door and window frames to brickwork - Timber door and window frames not abutting reinforced concrete work shall be secured to walls with six and four fishtailed holdfasts per frames respectively. The holdfast shall be galvanised mild steel, one end turned up and twice countersunk, drilled and screwed to frame and other end tailed and built into the joints of wall.

5.5.3

All timber and frames etc. abutting concrete, brick or plaster shall be properly brushed with two coats of approved wood preservative to the relevant B.S or S.S. codes before fixing.

6.0

SISIR / PSB LABELLED FIRE DOORS AND FRAMES

6.1

Fire resistance doors and frames of ratings as specified in the drawing must be obtained from a manufacturer approved by FSB or SISIR/PSB and installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The fire resistance rating of the doors delivered to site shall be clearly marked on their surfaces. The Contractor shall produce certificates from the Inspectorate of Fire Services, SISIR and manufacturer's test certificates to substantiate the fire resistance rating of door delivered. If the approval of the Inspectorate of Fire Services of any door is not substantiated to the satisfaction of the SO, it shall be removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor's own expense.

6.2

The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his rates for everything necessary, whether specified herein or otherwise, to provide SISIR/PSB labelled fire resistance doors and frames complying with the requirements of the Inspectorate of Fire Services on fire doors of 1/2 hour, 1 hour and 2 hour ratings respectively.

6.3

For timber fire doors, the doors shall be finished with 1.3mm thick Class ‘0’ plastic laminate on both sides. The lipping for woodgrain patterned plastic laminate shall be finished with matching timber lipping of similar woodgrain pattern while the lipping for solid coloured/patterned plastic laminate shall be finished with plastic laminate of 1.5mm thick solid colour core. The vision panel shall be 6mm thick clear fire-rated glass panel. Mere compliance with the specification shall not relieve the contractor from his liabilities should the door fail to achieve the required fire ratings.

6.4

Unless otherwise specified or indicated in the Door Schedule and Drawings, fire doors of above one hour fire ratings shall be constructed of 1.22m (18g) thick zinc coated steel sheet press formed to provide a fully flush, double skin door shell with lock seam joints at stile edges. The internal construction of the door shall comprise minimum 1.6mm thick stiles, top and bottom rails and reinforced with minimum four number intermediate 16g channels and doors shall be infilled with fire-resisting materials. Mere compliance with this specification shall not relieve the contractor from his liabilities should the doors’ construction fail to achieve the mentioned fire ratings.

7.0

FINISHES Wrot faces are to be sanded to a perfectly smooth surfaces with slightly rounded exposed arises before receiving decorative finishes. Timber for joinery with natural

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

finish, varnished or polished finish is to be selected to match grain and colour and be void of visible defects. 8.0

BUILT-IN FITTINGS FURNITURE)

8.1

The built-in fittings are to be executed all in accordance with the drawings and to the approval of the SO.

8.2

Where the joinery works are specified or shown to be fixed-in, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the necessary fittings are incorporated in the carcass, or alternatively, the Contractor may construct such ground works as are required to provide a suitable base and fixing for the joinery works.

8.3

No work on these is to commence until the Contractor has taken measurement from the site.

8.4

The Contractor is to secure fixed-in joinery works so that they are plumb and true to the shapes and members are to the full sizes shown on working drawings and details.

8.5

Vertical junctions shall be solidly bedded in mortar, wedged or otherwise secured as may be specified, or as is most appropriate in the circumstances, but a clearance is to be maintained in all overhead junctions so that settlement in the building carcass may take place without stressing or otherwise loading the joinery works.

9.0

PLYWOOD

9.1

Plywood shall be of selected quality and comply with the relevant B.S. or S.S codes and be of approved manufacture and termite proof. Plywood used for all doors, fitments, ceiling or panelling and external uses shall be of Weather and boil proof quality (type WBP) and shall be veneer or paint grade quality as indicated. Plywood for other uses shall be of Boil Resistant quality (type BR). Wherever used, plywood shall be finished with mouldings or beadings and no sawn plywood sections along either grain shall be exposed. All plywood shall be treated with wood preservative as specified.

9.2

Plywood shall be one of the following specified grades referred to in the relevant B.S. or S.S codes which, in the opinion of the SO, is appropriate for the work as follows:-

9.3

(REFER

ALSO

TO

SPECIFICATION

FOR

FIXED

9.2.1

Grade 1 - For use in the natural state. The veneer shall be free from knots, worm and beetle holes, splints, glue stains or other defects.

9.2.2

Grade 2 - For use where subsequent painting or similar treatment is required. The veneer on the face side may have a few sound knots, occasional minor discoloration or stain marks and small inlay repairs.

9.2.3

Grade 3 - For use where the plywood is not normally visible. The veneer may have defects other than those specified above, provided that the serviceability is not affected.

Each sheet of plywood delivered to the site shall bear the following markings:-

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

9.3.1

Country of manufacture

9.3.2

Grade for face and back

9.3.3

Bonding

9.3.4

Marine plywood shall comply with B.S. 1088 or the relevant S.S. code.

9.3.5

Nominal thickness of board

10.0

LAMINATED PLASTIC SHEETING

10.1

Laminated plastic sheeting shall comply with the relevant B.S. or S.S codes.

10.2

Where shown to be finished with laminated plastic sheeting, this shall be of abrasion resistant, cigarette- burnt proof, synthetic resins bonded decorative laminated plastic veneer quality of pattern and colour to be selected and approved by the SO. Adhesive to be used shall be of best quality, used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction.

10.3

The veneer shall be pressure bonded to the core and the core shall have a balancing veneer on the reverse side.

10.4

Generally 10.4.1 Plastic laminate, where indicated in drawings or schedule shall be 1.3mm thick from "Wilsonart", "Pionite" or "Formica" or other approved equivalent plastic laminte. 10.4.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the type of plastic laminate used for each piece of works shall be suitable for the intended use of the surface. Such usage shall include (but not limited to) use on horizontal surface, vertical surface, postforming use, chemical resistance use, fire-rated application, high wear use and electrostatic dissipative application. 10.4.3 The Contractor shall also ensure that the type of laminate used for a certain works shall comply with the necessary fire requirements or fire-rating as required for the said application of works. 10.4.4 Where plastic laminate are applied to fire-rated doors, the Contractor shall ensure that such laminate have been approved for used on such doors by FSB. 10.4.5 The Contractor shall allow (and price) for submission and selection by the S.O of all ranges of plastic laminate including all solid colours, speckled or patterned ranges, metallic selection and wood grain selections. 10.4.6 Plastic laminate shall be manufactured in a flat press by combining decorative papers saturated in melamine resin with phenolic-impregnated kraft layers at pressures exceeding 1000 psi and temperature approaching 150 deg C.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

10.4.7 Plastic laminate shall be supplied in complete single size intended for any particular application. No joints shall be allowed on any one single surface unless specifically approved by the SO. 10.4.8 Where patterned or woodgrain selections are used, the Contractor shall ensure that adjacent pieces of such laminate shall match both in pattern/grain line as well as in colour and tonality. 10.4.9 Plastic laminate shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and details. 10.4.10 The Contractor shall submit all technical datas, test report, FSB's approval letter for use of each type of plastic laminates where required by the SO. 10.4.11 Extruded aluminium hollow section head 75mm x 50mm, mechanically joined to 50mm diameter vertical posts with screw spline connections to form structural framework. 10.4.12 Framework to form the main support for the cubicles without reliance on panel media or patch fittings. 10.4.13 Assembled with concealed stainless steel fixings while front pilaster panels shall be silicon bonded into door frame and corner profiles. 10.4.14 Floor attachments with adjustable ground clearance from 60mm to 150mm to allow for uneven or sloping floors. 10.4.15 Solid coloured nylon door furniture with handle assembly held in position by a 10mm rebated powder coated aluminium cover plate. 10.4.16 Fixed handles and indication rosette with turn button and emergency release to the exterior, bolted and strewed through to contain the handle assembly. 10.4.17 Concealed nylon door latch and one number of coat hook per cubicle. 10.4.18 Fixed internal knob with rubber buffer to act as a door stopper. 10.4.19 Each door to have 3 nylon covered heavy duty brass hinges, 1 spring loaded to be adjustable for inward or outward opening doors. 10.4.20 The powder coated aluminium framework shall be available in a range of standard colour together with nylon door furniture in a range of complementary colours. 10.4.21 Cubicles for disabled access shall be fitted with special cranked through fixed handle and lever operated turn-button. 10.4.22 Samples of toilet compartments shall be submitted free of cost and fixed at the location as directed by the SO for approval. All materials subsequently delivered to site shall be equal to the approved samples. 10.4.23 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing the details of construction, assembly, erection and anchorage for approval by the SO.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

10.4.24 Installation of the toilet compartments shall be executed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 10.4.25 The Contractor shall clean and protect the toilet partitions and compartments to the satisfaction of the SO until handing over.

11.0

SOLID POLYMER TOP (METHYLMETHACRYATE – PMMA)

11.1

All vanity top, wash basin counters as shown in the drawings and/or schedule shall be in postform solid surface material, constructed of 13mm thick solid homogeneous, non-porous moulded reinforced polymer top (methymethacrylate PMMA).

11.2

All exposed surfaces shall be seamless, treated and be resistant to scratch, heat by the manufacturer, chemical, stains and no change in colours against ultra violet light. A 10-year warranty shall be submitted by Contractor against manufacturing defects covering the above usage.

11.3

Binders and jointing materials shall be compatible with the material and where exposed, of concealed hairline joints.

11.4

Shop drawings shall be submitted for SO’s approval shall indicate exact positions and locations of all openings, holes and penetrations, including splash boards, edging and trimming details, fascias and such like, and shall be of high grade workmanship quality.

11.5

The construction shall complete with 3mm thick galvanised steel mounting brackets and anchor or expansion bolts.

11.6

The solid polymer top shall comprise of Aluminium Hydroxide (2/3 by weight) and Polymethylmethacrylate without polyester (1/3 by weight) with colours pigments. Only colours approved for good contacts shall be used.

11.7

The solid polymer top shall have the following features 11.7.1 Solid, homogeneous throughout 11.7.2 Densely filled, non-porous 11.7.3 High thermal and impact resistance Seamless impermeable joints a) Does not emit toxic fume when burnt b) Resistance to germs - unable to support microbial growth c) Resistance to cigarette bums and able to remove the stains d) Fully resistance to HIV contaminants

11.8

Performance Standard

The performance standards of the postform solid surface material are required to match or surpass the following: Property

Typical Result

Test

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Tensile Strength Tensile Modulus Flexural Strength Flexural Modulus Elongation Property

6000 psi 1.5 x 10++ 7890 psi 1.4 x 10++ 0.4% Typical Result

ASTM-D-638 ASTM-D-638 ASTM-D-790 ASTM-D-790 ASTM-D-638 Test

Strain at Break Work to Break Hardness 56 Barcol lmpressor Thermal Expansion Thermal Conductivity Specific Heat

0.810% 2.48 in-lbs (modified) 94 Rockwell 'M' Scale

ASTM-D-638 ASTM-D-638 ASTM-D-785

3.02 x 10” in/in/0 C 7.0 Btu/hr/sq. ft/ 0f 0.2935 + (0.01 x OC) pcu/Ib/0C

ASTM-D-696 DuPont Test DuPont Test

0.33 Btu/lb/0 F BtuVcu fu/OF

DuPont Test

5-80 (mattc-polished) No change - 200 hrs Passes No loss of pattern 0.2 gm 0.008'

NEMA LD3-3.15 NEMA LD3-3.10 ANSIZ124.3 CS-221-66

No change

NEMA LD3-3.05

No change No change

NEMA LD3-3.06 NEMA LD3-3.08

28ft-lbs/in of notch 9.3 ft- lbs 13.3 ft-lbs 36” 1/2b. ball, no failure 144'. 16 lb. ball, no failure 204". % I b. ball, no failure No Cracks or Chips Passes Rating = 41 (modified*) (*additional stains used) No Change - 1000 hrs No Attack

ASTM-D-256 (Method A) ASTM-D-3029

Volumetric Heat Capacity Gloss (60 deg Gardner) Colour Stability Wear & Cleanability Abrasion Resistance Weight loss (1,000 cycles) Wear (10,000 cycles) Boiling Water Surface Resistance High Temperature Resistance Conductive Heat Resistance Impact Resistance Notched Izod . Gainer Solid Colours Sierras Ball Drop ½” sheet ½” sheet ½” sheet Bowls (point impact) Stain Resistance Weatherability Fungi and Bacteria

ANSI-Zl24.3 & 124.6 ANSI-ZI24.3 ANSI-ZI24.3 (modified*) ASTM-D-1499

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR CEILING FINISHES & SUPPORT WORK 1.0

GENERALLY 1.1

The ceiling works shall include all materials necessary for or incidental to the execution and completion of the ceiling finishes to the approval of the SO.

1.2

The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall liaise and co-ordinate with workers in other services such as air-conditioning, lighting, security, fire protection etc, in determining the location and schedule for cutting, fitting and making good openings in the ceiling. These works shall be deemed to be included in the rates for ceiling works.

1.3

The Contractor shall not install any ceiling boards or finishes until all wet-works within the space is completed and nominally dry, and M&E services are in place and tested.

1.4

The Contractor shall maintain and provide sufficient protection for the completed ceiling works until handing over upon completion. Until such time, the Contractor shall bear all responsibility and cost of replacements and/or making good any soils, dents or defacements to the finished work.

1.5

The installation of ceiling works shall be carried out in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s specifications and printed instructions, approved installation drawings and method statements.

1.6

All ceiling materials shall be stored on a levelled base clear of the ground on bearers placed not more than 1000mm apart, any stacked in the open shall be covered from external weather elements. When transporting, care should be taken not to damage the surface or edges of the ceiling materials.

2.0

SUBMITTALS 2.1

Workshop Drawings Workshop drawings for all types of ceiling systems shall be submitted to the SO for approval prior to installation being carried out, showing the dimensions, details of installation proposal, ceiling layout pattern indicating location of light fixtures, grilles, edge details, joints junctions, suspension systems, method of trims around openings and access openings required by M&E works and services. The Contractor shall employ an M&E Co-ordinator to co-ordinate all the M&E and building requirements and produce detail shop drawings of the reflected ceiling plan with all the services shown for the SO’s approval before commencing with any ceiling work.

2.2

Product Data Product data shall be submitted to the SO for approval, indicating the product description, including compliance with specified requirements and installation requirements. Mark manufacturer’s brochures to include only those products proposed for use.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

2.3

3.0

Samples 3 samples for all types of ceiling systems and its finishes specified herein shall be submitted free of charge to the SO for approval prior to ordering of the materials, and subsequent material delivered to site shall be equal to samples approved by the SO.

MOCK-UPS At the earliest possible time or latest 3 months before proceeding with the ceiling works, Contractor shall erect mock-up of a typical 3600mm x 3600mm ceiling panel area for the various types of ceiling systems and finishes. Mock-up shall be at location selected by the SO including finishes, joints and all necessary fixing showing the workmanship to be reviewed and approved by the SO before commencement of ceiling works. The mock up shall also allow for observation of the framing support system before applying the ceiling finishes. Confirmed mockups will serve as standard and quality accepted for ceiling work. Confirmed mock-ups may become part of the completed work of the project. Rejected mock-ups shall be demolished and removed immediately after the rejection with new mock-ups made until confirmation is received.

4.0

MAINTENANCE STOCKS The Contractor shall ensure that maintenance stock is provided for all various ceiling systems used.

5.0

TYPES OF CEILING SYSTEMS 5.1

Exposed Grid Mineral Fibre Board Suspended Ceilings The exposed grid mineral fibre board suspended ceiling system shall be as manufactured with the following properties. (i)

Ceiling Tile Ceiling tile sizes shall be 600mm x 1200mm x 15mm mineral fibrous board with aluminium backing strips behind to prevent sagging, with colour and texture as specified in the drawings, subject to the selection and approval of the SO All ceiling tile shall conform to ISO R-354 or ASTM C423 standards for sound absorption with minimum Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.60. All ceiling tiles shall have regular edges and be lay-in type, come complete with perimeter and trim accessories. Size Edge

: :

Acoustic Performance Fire Reaction

:

600mm x 1200mm x 15mm Fineline Bevel : NRC : .50 - .60 CAC : 35 - 39 BS 476 Part 6/7 Class ‘0’

(FLB)

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

(ii)

Flame Spread Smoke Developed Weight Thermal Resistance Light Reflectance

: : : : :

25 (ASTM E-84) 10 (ASTM E-84) 4.97 kg/m2 R - 1.85 LR - 1 (Per ASTM C523)

Dimension Stability

:

Limited Warranty

:

Shall withstand 40 oC and 90% RH without visible sag. 10 Year warranty against visible sag.

Ceiling Suspension Grid The suspension grid system shall be in 600 x 600 modules, 14 mm flange grids with all vertical grid member at 38mm height, made of hot dipped galvanised steel exposed ‘T’ grid suspended from 4mm diameter galvanised steel wire hangers with adjustable metal spring clips. The finish of the exposed ‘T’ grid shall be subjected to colour selection and approval by the SO. Metal support systems shall be designed and installed by the Contractor in accordance to the ceiling system manufacturer’s recommendation. All ferrous metals shall be rustproofed. Hangers shall be substantial and sufficient to prevent excessive deflection in the ceiling and able to withstand a variety of upward and downward accesses requirements. Suspension by means of wire will not be permitted. Additional hangers and support work shall be provided at recessed light fittings, air conditioning diffusers, access panels, any other ceiling suspended M&E services and equipment etc.

(iii)

Workmanship Fix ceiling materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations ensuring compliance with design and performance requirements to the approval of the SO. Set out accurately and give levelled soffits, free from undulations and lipping, with all lines and joints straight and parallel to walls. All runners of exposed grid ceiling system shall be straight, level and evenly spaced out. The SO shall reserve the right in determining the method of setting out and alignment to be employed. Contractor shall ensure that edge ceiling boards/sheets are not less than half in width or length. Cut and fit ceiling tiles/sheets around recessed light fittings, air conditioning diffusers, sprinkler heads and the like. Form openings for access panels together with additional trimming and framing, etc. Deflection between supports of any part of suspended ceilings shall not be more than 1/450 for spans up to 1830mm and 1/600 for spans over 1830mm.

5.2

Calcium Silicate Ceiling System The calcium silicate board ceiling shall be 9mm "Masterboard HP" or other equal and approved ceiling board and shall be of approved type pattern and colour and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The board shall be tested to

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

B.S. 476 Part 6 & 7 and approved by the Fire Authority.

Where shown on the drawings, provide and construct ceiling consisting of panels size and thickness as specified with 45 degree profile to all edges or as detailed. The ceiling panels shall be fixed to an approved sawn pressure treated timber suspension system comprising joist, spaced not more than 600mm apart and fixed with approved hangers to concrete soffit. Fixings to be concealed rust proof screws or nails at centres not exceeding 200mm around the perimeter of the panel and not exceeding 300mm in the centre of the panel. Ceiling panels are to be primed on both faces and all edges with acrylic alkali resisting primer sealer prior to fixing. Calcium silicate boards shall not be affected by water. Even if exposed to damp environments and shall not absorb more than 55 % of its own weight of water, and upon drying out it shall retain its original strength. After fixing and before application of finishing coat, all screw holes shall be properly filled in with acrylic filling compound. 5.3

Calcium Silicate Board Fire-Rated Suspended Ceiling The ceiling shall comprise of approved proprietary suspension system with 1220mm x 2440mm calcium silicate board installed using 38mm x 38mm x 0.9mm suspension grid as shown in the drawings. (i)

Material The calcium silicate board 2-hr fire-rated suspended ceiling shall be autoclaved and asbestos free calcium silicate board with the following properties:Physical Properties Weight per 2440mm x 1220mm board/ thickness (mm)

6mm thick/17 kg approx 9mm thick /26 kg approx 12mm thick /35 kg approx 15mm thick /43 kg approx 20mm thick /57 kg approx

Nominal dry density

875 kg/m3

Flexural strength (dry)

9.0MN/sqm

Moisture movement ambient to +0.05% saturated Thermal Conductivity (K) 0.17 W/mK Coefficient of Thermal Expansion to 100oC

9 x 10-8 per oC

Combustibility and fire performance

Class 1 rating, complying with BS 476: Part 4; 1970 BS 476: Part 6 – Fire Propagation

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

BS 476: part 7 – Surface Spread of Flame

(ii)

Surface spread of Flame BS 476: part 7 1971

Class 1

Smoke generation

Minimal

Alkalinity (PH Value)

7 to 10

Hard body Impact Resistance BS 8200

6mm & 9mm - 3Nm 12mm - 6Nm

Chemical

Unaffected by diluted acid and chemical solutions

Biological Resistance

No nourishment of mould and fungi. Resistant to attack by vermin and insects

Appearance

The board is off-white in colour when unpainted, with a lightly textured reverse face. The choice of paint is to be determined by the SO.

Asbestos Content

100% asbestos free

Fire performance

Minimum 2 hour fire-rated to FSB standard

Suspension Frame Layout The 1220mm x 2440mm calcium silicate ceiling boards shall be installed using 38mm x 38mm x 0.9mm thick suspension grid recommended by the manufacturer and as shown in the drawings. The main tees shall be lined out at 1200mm centres with 1200mm long cross tees inserted at 610mm intervals. Main runners shall be supported by suspension angles of 32 x 19 x 0.9 thick to other structure at 1200mm centres Perimeters shall be finished with steel angle trims of 32 x 19 x 0.56mm thick. The angle shall be fixed to wall using No. 8 screws into noncombustible wall plugs of 500 centres. All channels intersection must be fixed properly.

5.4

Gypsum Plaster Ceiling Plasterboard shall be 12.7mm thick tapered edge gypsum wallboard of approved manufacture to receive direct painting complying with BS 1230. Boards shall be fixed with the ivory surface outwards and tapered edges lightly butted. End joints shall be 3mm wide and staggered. Supports shall be

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

provided at all edges of boards. Fixing to timber shall be by means of 2mm diameter small flat head nails 40mm long. Nail heads shall be driven home to form a shallow depression but not to break the paper. Joint and finish boards in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to achieve a flush seamless surface ready for painting to Architect’s specification. 5.5

Fibrous Plaster Ceiling Fibrous plaster ceiling board shall be of approved manufacture, 12mm thick comprising of gypsum plaster reinforced with strands of fibreglass evenly distributed throughout at the ratio of 365 grams per sqm complying to BS 1230. The 1220mm x 2440 x 12mm thick fibrous plaster ceiling boards shall be installed using 38mm x 38mm x 0.9mm thick suspension grid tees recommended by the manufacturer and as shown in the drawings, subject to SO’s approval. The main tees shall be lined out at 1200mm centres with 1200mm long cross tees inserted at 610mm intervals. Main runners shall be supported by suspension angles of 32 x 19 x 0.9 thick to the structure at 1200mm centres Perimeters shall be finished with steel angle trims of 32mm x 19mm x 0.56mm thick. The angle shall be fixed to wall using No. 8 screws into non-combustible wall plugs at 500mm centres. All channels intersection must be fixed properly. Flush up all joints between ceiling boards with superfine gypsum plaster complying to BS 6214 and leave a flat homogeneous plastered surface complying to BS 5492, ready for painting to SO’s approval. Contractor shall provide 1 no of 600mm x 600mm access panel and frame of proprietary design in ceiling for every 10m run of corridor and 4 nos in every room with location to the approval of the SO..

5.6

Metal Ceiling System Metal Ceiling System shall comprise aluminium panel press-formed from electro-galvanised mild steel and factory finished with polyester powder paint (minimum thickness 60 microns) to a smooth and textured finish. Size of metal ceiling panel to be 600mm x 600mm. Metal support systems shall be designed and installed by the Contractor in accordance to the ceiling system manufacturer’s recommendation. All ferrous metals shall be rust-proofed. Hangers shall be substantial and sufficient to prevent excessive deflection in the ceiling and able to withstand a variety of upward and downward accesses requirements. Suspension by means of wire

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

will not be permitted. Additional hangers and support work shall be provided at recessed light fittings, air conditioning diffusers, access panels, any other ceiling suspended M&E services and equipment etc. The aluminium ceiling system shall be available in any standard colour from the RAL or B.S. colour range for selection by the SO. The suspension system shall be hot dipped galvanised steel hanger rods, hung directly to the soffit of the floor slab above Fibre Cement Ceiling The fibre cement ceiling shall comprise fibre cement boards with flush joints. Materials, method of fabrication, fitting, assembly, supporting frames, fastening, jointing and installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specification and proprietary systems, and be of the highest quality practices of the industry, using new, clean and appropriate materials as specified. 5.7

All works shall be accurately and neatly fabricated, assembled and erected. The Contractor is required to produce shop drawings showing the proposed installation mechanism for the relevant authorities’ approval. The approval, however, shall not absolve the Contractor from their responsibilities as stipulated in this clause (i)

Installation Of Suspended Ceiling The ceiling shall have its own supporting system and shall consist of suspension rods of 8mm diameter minimum in galvanised steel or hanger, anchorages and levelling devices, runners, coupling and clips, wall mouldings, joint trimmings and other accessories necessary for suspending from the structural ceiling, making levelling adjustment, and the proper assembling of the ceiling system.

(ii)

Grid Layout The suspension system shall be designed to carry the total load of the ceiling and constructed of steel main tees to design requirements. Similarly, the cross tee of the same gauge shall be spanned to design requirements.

(iii)

Fixing Of Boards The 6mm fibre cement board or other equivalent shall be fixed onto the suspension system with 20mm long (No. 8 self-embedding head) screws at 250mm centres on main tees and 600mm centres on the cross tees. The angle hanger support to the concrete soffit shall be fixed using M6 expansion anchors or other equivalent with at least 80mm embedment. Steelwork to steelwork shall be secured with 20mm long M4 screw and nut.

(iv)

Flush Jointing System Fibre Cement Board shall be fixed to steelwork using No. 8 selfembedding head, Tack screws at a minimum distance of 12mm from the edges and 50mm from the corner. Fibre Cement Sheets should be flush jointed using perforated paper tape embedded in bedding cement and finished with topping cement.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Fibre Cement Board shall be fixed and cleaned at least 24 hours before the application of a Jointing compound. In no circumstances shall fibre cement board be wetted before plastering. Repair all surface damage and defects and leave all surface fully prepared to receive finish painting or other decorating. (v)

Protection And Cleaning Protect all work from damage during transportation, storage at job site, erection, and subsequent construction activities. After installation, provide additional temporary protection as required to protect all work from damage during subsequent construction activities. After installation is completed, boards shall be cleaned where soiled and touched up where scratched or scuffed with appropriate paint or plaster recommended by manufacturer. Upon completion of the various portions of the installation, all rubbish and equipment which have accumulated as a result of the work shall be removed. Any defective, soiled or improperly installed components which cannot be satisfactory corrected shall be replaced with new material at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out and complete all remedial works at such time as designated.

(vi)

6.0

Handling And Storage All materials shall be delivered and stored in an enclosed area to provide protection from physical damage and effects of the environment. Sheets should be stored in neat stacks laid flat on the ground, supported evenly on level gluts.

INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP FOR SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM The whole of the propriety suspended ceiling work shall be executed in the best and most workmanlike manner. Installation work is to be carried out by the specialist installer approved by the SO. The framing channel used shall be free from distortion and of suitable thickness for rigidity. The gauge of the framing channel shall be submitted for the SO’s approval. Suspended ceilings shall be supplied and installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The Contractor shall provide shop drawing for the SO’s approval showing plan layout, edge details, suspension systems, fixing proposal and methods of trim around apertures. Suspended systems shall be rigid and must allow for fine adjustments. All members shall be aligned for true level surface and straight line. A setting tolerance of more than 3mm (non-cumulative) over 300mm will not be

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

permitted in the horizontal plane. The maximum deflection allowable across any one module will be 1/300 of the span when installed complete with ceiling panel and service fittings. Any defects in the finished installations due to misaligned framing or any other cause shall be remedied by the Contractor at his own expenses. The Contractor is responsible for providing the necessary apertures, trims for the installation of smoke detectors, lighting fittings, speakers and other system wide, items to be fixed into the suspended ceiling and carried out by separate ‘system wide’ contractors. All suspended ceiling system subject to exposed condition must be capable of resisting wind uplift of 0.38KN/m 2 As far as possible, furring sections shall be such as will permit interlocking of parts, weather-tight fit with a flush face, without use of built strips and exposed screws. After shop drawings have been approved, samples of the various extruded sections profiles, brackets and accessories are to be submitted for SO’s approval. Control samples after finalisation of all details mock-up sample incorporation all major joints, junctions, fixings, trims, and the link are to be supplied and erected on site to be selected by the SO for approval of tolerance and fixings. The rigid ceiling suspension system shall be in hot dipped galvanised steel channel or other approved metal suspension system. The hot dipped galvanised steel rod hangers shall be in two parts. The top portion of the rod hanger shall be hooked on to an angle bracket, which has one end holed to receive the rod hanger and other end ramsetted to the soffit of reinforced concrete floor slab above. The lower portion of the rod hanger is fixed to the main carrying channel or spine of the grid system at 1200mm centres both ways by means of spring clips or hooking around the channel and fixed to the upper portion with a flat spring clip to permit adjustments in the levelling of the ceiling boards. The Contractor shall conduct a mock up to verify that the ceiling structural support systems can support the weight of the ceiling and any other forces (e.g. wind etc.) that the ceiling may be subjected to during the lifetime of the ceiling system. The above description on the suspension system shall be the minimum s tandard required. The Contractor shall submit the details of the ceiling system together with catalogues, detail shop drawings and samples for the SO’s approval. The proprietary rigid supporting system shall consist of main and cross runners forming a 600 x 600mm structural grid. The cell elements shall be de-mountable directly from below as well as in an upward direction. Adaptation for perimeter conditions shall be made by cuts-in the cross-runners and cell elements. Where edge profiles with their cut-outs are exposed, they shall be concealed by special L-Shaped cover profiles. Should the inside of the cover profile remain visible, it is to be finished in a coloured

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

strip in a finish to match the colour/finish of the ceiling to the approval of the SO. A special proprietary ceiling support shall be used, whereby the connection to the main runner is concealed in the centre of intersections. WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide warranty for ceiling board works for a period of one (1) year from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality of material, prevention of ingress of termites and termite activities into substrate, integrity of joints, and any damage to material, not due to fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR DOORS 1.0

GENERAL

1.1

This particular specification document is to be read in conjunction with the Architectural Drawings, Bills of Quantities and other documentation issued to the Contractor. The materials and finishes proposed is subject to selection and approval of the S.O and Client. All finishes and fixing including assembly is subject to approval of shop drawings and Contractor's PE endorsement where necessary and to be as per standards and codes applicable in Singapore.

1.2

Where trade names or catalogue numbers are mentioned in this Specification or the Bills, the reference is intended only as a guide to the type of article quoted or material required. Subject to the approval of the S.O, the Contractor may substitute any article or material similar and equal to those described by reference to trade names or catalogue numbers. All proprietary materials or processes specified in this Specification or the Bills of Quantities are to be used or carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

1.3

The Contractor is to highlight any discrepancy or deviation in the document and seek clarification and approval from the S.O prior to fabrication of the works.

2.0

ABBREVIATIONS Throughout the Specification and other Documents, the following abbreviations have been used: m m2 m3 mm mm 2 No oz lb Cwt kg Ton o C N W BS

CP

AS ASTM

-

Linear metre Square metre Cubic metre Millimetre Square millimetre Number Ounce (avoirdupois) Pound (avoirdupois) Hundredweight Kilogramme Metric Tonne Degree Celcius Newton Watt The 'British Standard' (including any amendment or reenactment) issued by the British Standards Institution current as of the date of submission of tender. - The 'British Standard Code of Practice' (including any amendment or re-enactment) issued by the Council for Codes of Practice of the British Standards Institution current as of the date of submission of tender. Australian Standards American Society of Testing Materials

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

DIN SS

BCA PSB FSB ISO 3.0

-

Deutschae Industrie Norm (German Industrial Standards) - The 'Singapore Standard' (including any amendment or reenactment) issued by the Singapore Productivity and Standards Board current as of the date of submission of tender. Building Construction Authority of Singapore The Singapore Productivity and Standards Board Fire Safety Bureau International Standardisation Organisation

SCOPE OF WORKS The Contractor to also read this document in conjunction with architectural, structural and M&E drawings provided and to include all necessary works that are required to be done to complete this Package.

3.1

Non Fire Rated Timber Doors a) Non Fire Rated Timber Doors including Ironmongery b) Non Fire Rated Timber Door Frames. c) Other Related Accessories.

3.2

Fire Rated Timber Doors a) Fire Rated Timber Doors including Ironmongery b) Fire Rated Timber Door Frames. c) Other Related Accessories.

3.3

Non Fire Rated Metal Doors a) Non Fire Rated Metal Doors including Ironmongery b) Non Fire Rated Metal Door Frames. c) Other Related Accessories.

3.4

Fire Rated Metal Doors a) Fire Rated Metal Doors including Ironmongery b) Fire Rated Metal Door Frames. c) Other Related Accessories.

4.0

SAMPLES

4.1

All samples for all of the scope of work including name of manufacturer and country of origin is to be submitted for S.O’s approval by the Contractor. The Contractor is to submit test reports, certificates for products and materials used and method statement for the installation works, for S.O’s approval.

4.2

Contractor to allow for early installation of mock-up of doors at locations as may be directed by the S.O. The Contractor to submit revised door and ironmongery schedule during the course of project if there are changes and to submit as-built door and ironmongery schedule and drawings at the end of the project.

5.0

METAL DOOR FRAMES

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

5.1

Metal door frames shall be manufactured by approved manufacturer and shall be produced from 2mm thick coated steel sheet press-formed and individually produced where necessary to suit the exact application requirement by way of frame profile types, door size and hardware preparation. The materials used for manufacturing doorframes shall provide excellent resistance to rusting as well as a good base for paint finishes.

5.2

Metal door frames shall be produced to suit all authority requirement including BS 1245 and for fire doors BS 459 :Part 3.

5.3

All frames shall be fully reinforced and prepared to accept hinges and lockstrike plates as specified for the individual requirement as against samples on templates provided by the hardware supplier and the need for drilling, tapping or cutting on site should be obviated whenever possible.

5.4

Frames shall be produced in knockdown form with butt joints for simple bolted assembly or mitre-joints in knockdown form or welded construction. All corner joints shall have all edges tight with trim faces mitred and continuously welded and stops mitred.

5.5

Frames shall be supplied in knockdown form for easy and economical transportation, storage and erection. All frames shall have knock off spreaders at bottom of frame for protection until installation.

5.6

Metal doorframe shall be provided with one welded-in floor anchor and four adjustable fixing lugs to each jamb. All strike jambs shall be provided with neoprene seal or rubber buffers. All hinges shall be screwed to the reinforced treaded steel plates of sufficient thickness concealed in the metal frames. Plaster guards shall be installed at the back of all ironmongery cut-out. Reinforcement for strikes, flush bolts, closures and holders and surface reinforcement for hinges shall not be less than 7 gauge steel.

5.7

All hollow metal door frames shall be punched for silencers to be supplied by the ironmongery. Each single door shall receive three (3) silencers; each leaf in each pair of door shall receive four (4) silencers. Backs of all hollow frames shall be filled in solid with cement and sand (1:6) infill.

5.8

Metal door frames shall be finished in powder coat paint as specified under the section for painting works.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR DRYWALL PARTITIONS 1.0

GENERALLY

1.1

Contractor shall ensure partitions to be used shall comply with the relevant requirement of the Standards and Codes listed or referenced in the body of the Specification .

1.2

Standards Singapore Standards SS CP1 The use of timber in building construction SS 72 Treatment of timber and plywood with copper / chrome / arsenic / wood preservative Other Standards BS EN 10143 BS.1230: Part 1 BS 5234: 1 & 2 BS 5588 BS 7364 BS 8212 AS 1604

Specification for continuously hot-dip, metal coated steel sheet and strip. Specification for plasterboard excluding materials submitted to secondary operation. Partitions. (including matching linings) Fire precautions in the design construction and use of Building Code of Practice for shop, offices, industrial and storage buildings. Galvanised steel studs and channels for stud and sheet partitions and linings using screw fixed plasterboard. Code of practice for dry lining and partitioning using Gypsum plaster board. Specification for preservative treatment- sawn and round timber.

1.3.

Contractor shall allow for all necessary cutting to accommodate for corner joint, including all necessary stainless steel fixing accessories to SO.’s approval.

1.4.

Contractor shall ensure specified fabrication tolerances must be observed at all times and fabricate in accordance with approved shop drawings. He shall provide all information necessary to secure work in place if necessary.

1.5.

Contractor shall include everything necessary or incidental to the execution and completion of all partitions as specified herein, shown on the drawings or as may be directed on site by the SO.

1.6.

Contractor shall ensure all fully framed polyester powder coated extruded aluminium with perimeter head stabilizing section and continuous side fixing channels. Extruded aluminium hollow section head75mm X 50mm mechanically joined to 50mm diameter vertical posts with screw spline connections to form structural framework. Corners joined to head section and formed with solid aluminium castings. Framework to form the main support for the cubicles without reliance on panel media or path fittings.

1.7

Contractor shall ensure mild steel studs comply with BS 7364. Studs to incorporate services slots.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

2.0

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

2.1

Structural Criteria Drywall partition supplier shall erect to comply partitions strength as set out in BS 5234-2 : 1992. and determination of the effects of door slamming set out in BS 52342 :1992. Where the wall acts as a protective barrier take into consideration the BCA’s impact and lateral loading requirements.

2.2

Dead Loads The self-weight and other associated dead loads of the complete partition system shall be supported and transferred to the main building structure.

2.3

Fire resistance The partition system and components shall comply, as a minimum, with the requirements of the FSSD and any additional requirements of other Statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the works.

2.4

Fire integrity Drywall partition supplier shall conform to FSSD requirement.

2.4

Impact Resistance Plasterboard a) Plasterboard to comply with BS 1230: Part 1, type 1 to 5 with exposed surface and edge profiles suitable to receive the specified finish. b) To comply with BS1230: part 1, types1/5 with high density core not less than 925 Kg/ m3 and heavy duty paper facings.

2.5

Moisture Resistant Plasterboard To comply with BS 1230: Part 1, type 3 and 4 with moisture resistant core and moisture vapour resistance of backing layer not less than 60 MNs/g.

2.6

Acoustic Treatment Contractor shall ensure that acoustic sealant used must comply to the board manufacturer requirement and shall apply to perimeter junctions with walls, floors, ceilings and around openings and other potential air leakage points including frame members prior to fitting core boards and around fire stops to horizontal joints.

3.0

CONSTRUCTION DETAILING

3.1

Beading / stops Contractor shall ensure that rigid bead / stops comply with the manufacturer’s requirement. Material used shall be galvanized steel.

3.2

Cavity barriers Contractor shall ensure cavity barriers shall be enveloped with mineral fibre.

3.3

Studs Contractor shall ensure set out floor / head channels and perimeter studs to give a framework which is accurately aligned with a true vertical plane. Fix securely at all perimeters at not more than 600mm centres. Position studs at equal centres to suit specific linings, maintaining sequence across openings. Provide additional studs as necessary to ensure support to all vertical edges of boards. Framing

3.4

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.5

a)

Contractor shall provide accurately positioned and securely fixed framing to receive partition heads running parallel with but offset from main structural supports.

b)

Contractor shall provide accurately positioned and securely fixed framing to support fixture, fittings and services. After fixing boards, mark positions of framing for following trade.

c)

Contractor shall provide additional framing, accurately positioned and securely fixed, to give full support to board edges and lining perimeters in accordance with board manufacturer’s recommendation.

Partition and compartment panels a) Contractor shall ensure partition panel shall be attached to floor and soffit of slab. b)

Contractor shall ensure installation of the compartments shall be executed in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendation and shall clean and protect the partitions and compartments to the satisfaction of the S.O. till hand over.

c)

Contractor shall co-ordinate the partition works with all interfacing work packages and trades to ensure correct setting out and positioning.

d)

Contractor is to ensure exposed edges of panels and doors shall be chamfered safely. Edges shall be in stainless steel.

3.6

Colour Colour of drywall partition to be approved by S.O.

4.0

SAMPLES AND SHOP-DRAWINGS

4.1

Contractor shall ensure sample of compartments shall be submitted free of cost and fixed at the Location as directed by the S.O. for approval. All materials subsequently delivered to site shall be equal to the approved samples.

4.2

Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing all details of construction, assembly, erection and anchorage for approval by the S.O.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR EXTERNAL WORKS

PROPOSED UPGRADING WORKS FOR ST STEPHEN'S SCHOOL

ANNEX 1 FLOW CHART FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SCHOOL FIELD

FIRST 2 MONTHS OF CONSTRUCTION PERIOD (Checklist refer to Annex 2)

Site Procession

MIN. 3 MONTHS MAINTENANCE PERIOD (Checklist refer to Annex 3)

1 MONTH GROWING PERIOD

Supply and Planting Turf

Construction of Earthwork / Drains / Sub-soil drainage / Fencing

(Min 3 inspections)

Inspection by SO / RE / RTO

Handover Inspection by SO / RE / RTO / FM (Assessment details refer to Annex 4)

Site supervison by RE / RTO

Inspection by SO / RE / RTO / FM

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR EXTERNAL WORKS ANNEX 2 CHECKLIST FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SUB-SOIL DRAINAGE SYSTEM FOR SCHOOL FIELD Item

1

Scope of work carried out Excavate and dispose off site existing 150mm soil. Note: Contractor to sweep excavated ground with metal detector to ensure there are no existing metal objects between surface level to a depth of 600mm deep of soil.

2

Preparation of trenches to receive sub-soil drainage system, grade to fall 1:80

3

Laying of filtration membrane

Photos taken by Main Contractor

Verified by RTO

Contractor’s Signature

Date of Commencement

Date of Completion

Remarks

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

4

Installation of subsoil drainage piping system

5

Backfilling of granite chips and sealing up of filtration membrane

ANNEX 2 Item

Scope of work carried out

6

Backfilling of 150mm soil mixture, grade to fall 1:80 Note: a) Contractor to show grade to fall at 3 spot locations.

Photos taken by Main Contractor

Verified by RTO

Contractor’ s Signature

Date of Commencem ent

Date of Completion

Remar ks

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

b) Contractor to sweep the school field with metal detector to ensure no metal objects are buried during construction period. 7

Supply and planting of ‘Cow’grass.

8

Initial application of Fertiliser after planting.

Notes: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

All excavated soil and debris must be disposed off site. All prepared trenches should measure 500mm D x 700mm W, all soil on the sides and surfaces to be loosened. Filtration membrane to have min 200mm overlap. Soil mixture : 3 part soil: 1 part compost: 1 part sand. Grass planted must be Close turf with gap not more than 30mm apart. Fertiliser - Application of Fertiliser at ratio of 0.3kg per m 2, followed by watering – approx. 14 litres per m2. All photographs will be collated together and submitted upon completion of the School field.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR EXTERNAL WORKS ANNEX 3 CHECKLIST FOR MAINTENANCE OF SCHOOL FIELD

Item

Scope of work carried out

Mont h of

Grass cutting Top dressing Rolling Fertilising Watering Weeding

Mont h of

Grass cutting Top dressing Rolling Fertilizing Watering

Verified by RTO

Contractor’s Signature

Dat e

Dat e

Remarks

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Weeding Mont h of

Grass cutting Top dressing Rolling Fertilizing Watering Weeding

Notes: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Grass cutting - Grass should not be cut lower than 25mm, allowing new shoot to establish. Top - Dressing - A Sandy soil to be used for Top-Dressing. Rolling - Roller not more than 150kg should be used even the ground when soil condition is moist. Fertiliser - Application of Fertiliser at ratio 0.3kg per m 2, followed by watering - appr. 14 litres per m2. Weeding to be carried out systematically by combing from one section to another.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR EXTERNAL WORKS ANNEX 4

ASSESSMENT OF SCHOOL FIELD FOR HANDING OVER School: ________________________________________________ Weather condition: After rain/Sunny (Delete accordingly) Ground condition: Wet/Dry S/No 1 1.1

Factor GRASS Grass Species/Purity of Turf (Axonopus compressus, ‘Cow’ grass)

1.2

General Health/Quality(dark & glossy leaves)

2 2.1

GROUND CONDITION General Level of Ground (generally even with limited undulation)

2.2

General Gradient of Ground (1:80 spot levels to be taken earlier

2.3

Safety for Play (no foreign objects embedded near the surface 150mm soil mixture, eg stones, metal rods etc)

3 3.1

DRAINAGE Surface Condition (no sign of waterlogging)

3.2

Porosity of Soil (no sign of long term water ponding)

4

Acceptable

Not Acceptable

Remarks

OTHER OBSERVATION COMMENTS

RECOMMENDATION: APPROVED APPROVED, WITH MINOR RECTIFICATIONS: Name of S.O/S.O. Rep:

________________________________

(AT3)

Signature of S.O./S.O. Rep: ______________

________________________________

Name of Attestor:

________________________________ (MOE, CCAB)

Signature of Attestor: ______________

________________________________

Name of RTO:

________________________________

Signature of RTO: ______________

________________________________

Date:

Date:

Date:

HANDED OVER FOR MAINTENANCE TO: Name of Maintenance Agency’s Representative:

________________________

Signature of Maintenance Agency’s Representative:

________________________

Date:

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR EXTERNAL WORKS 1.0

GENERAL This specification relates to works to be done outside the building. The works include but not limited to the following: a)

install perimeter turfing and planting;

b)

install perimeter fencing;

c)

construct subsoil drains for play field;

d)

construct perimeter drains with grating around building;

e)

construct road access-way and parking lots with line markings;

f)

construct playcourts;

g)

construct outdoor exercise area and install equipment and signs;

h)

install hydrants and taps around site;

i)

construct main entrance gate for vehicular and pedestrian access, and signage;

j)

construct ramps with tactile tiles at transition in levels;

k)

install lighting around site;

Please also refer to attached Annexures 1 to 4, and tender documents relating to C&S and M&E Works. 2.0

3.0

SITE CLEARANCE a)

Clear site of all rubbish, obstructions, shrubs, undesirable growth, etc. for proper execution of the entire works and remove all debris off site.

b)

Contractor to create earth slope to adjacent site, with cut-off drains, as indicated in Tender Drawings.

EARTHWORKS a)

Excavate to cut or fill up with best of excavated earth and/or approved earth from Contractor's own sources, and properly compacted to form the platform levels.

b)

Excavate or fill to form embankment and slope between ground of different heights to the required gradient.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

4.0

5.0

6.0

INTERNAL ROAD CONSTRUCTION a)

The Contractor to take due diligence to ensure proper gradients for road construction, perimeter drainage, apron construction, joints at changes in levels and changes in materials.

b)

Contractor to source for and install good quality inter-locking paviours for the internal service roads, and ‘Grass Cell’ type paviours at fire engine access hardstanding next to playfield.

PLAYFIELD & OUTDOOR EXERCISE AREA a)

The Contractor to ensure proper preparation of soil and ground conditions when installing subsoil drainage system for the play field.

b)

Contractor to prepare ground bedding to install exercise equipment on the allocated area indicated as ‘Outdoor Exercise Area’.

c)

Contractor to submit shop-drawings and perspectives of Outdoor Exercise equipment to SO for approval, before confirming orders of equipment.

d)

The Contractor shall supply and install suitable exercise equipment and arrange them with sufficient setback space between each equipment for safety use.

PERIMETER FENCING The Contractor to prepare ground conditions for installation of supports and framework for perimeter fencing. All joints and bends to be properly fixed and installed to meet MOE guidelines.

7.0

ROAD LIGHTING Contractor to supply and install roadside lighting as indicated in Tender Drawings.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION 1 .0

FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

1.1

Generally

1.2

a)

This specification shall cover fire protection works for the project, including fire hydrant, fire hosereel, fire extinguisher, fire suppression system for kitchen hoods, etc.

b)

The Fire Fighting Installations shall be executed by the Contractor and / or his Licensed Plumber, otherwise the works shall be executed by a fully licensed firm and shall be in full compliance with the Public Utilities Board's requirements. If the works are not satisfactorily installed and properly functioning in all respects, the Contractor shall rectify the defects at his own cost.

c)

The Contractor shall allow for all the builder's work in connection with the installation such as cutting, chasing, coring, fixing brackets, touching up or making good floors and walls etc.

d)

All expenses incurred for stamping fees required by the Public Utilities .Board shall be borne by the Contractor.

e)

The Contractor is to test the entire fire protection installation on completion of project, to the satisfaction of the S.O.

f)

This specification is to be read in conjunction with C&S and M&E specifications. Contractor to be aware of and coordinate requirements for the satisfactory coordination, installation and operation of fire fighting equipment

As-built Documents a) The Contractor shall on completion of the works, submit two (2) sets printed as-built drawings and one (1) set soft copy of as-completed drawings, indicating the layout of the works, to the S.O. b) Contractor to ensure that materials and equipment used to be approved by PSB or tested and approved for use by Fire Safety Bureau (Singapore Civil Defence Force).

2.0

EQUIPMENT

2.1

Fire Hydrant a)

The location of fire hydrants are indicated in the architectural plan (site and first storey plan.

b)

The installation of hydrant to be fitted with properly sized underground pipework, to the compliance of Fire Safety Bureau (Singapore Civil Defence Force).

c)

The hydrants are to be tested upon completion of the installation, in the

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

presence of RTO (site staff), SO, M&E Consultant, Main Contractor and Licensed Plumber. Measurements of the water pressure test and distance of throw are to be recorded. 2.2

Fire Hosereel a)

Contractor is to supply and install recess type swivel hydraulic non-kink hosereels complete with self-finished steel side discs, cast brass centre body with machined waterways and bearings, spray jet nozzle with on/off handle, screw down globe valve on inlet to reel, and wall bracket complete with bolts including fixing to walls and jointing inlet to water pipe.

b)

The fire hosereel compartment boxing is to have clearly printed lettering on compartment box.

c)

The fire hosereel is to be tested upon completion of installation, to ensure water pressure is adequate and complies to the latest requirements of the Fire Safety Bureau (Singapore Civil Defence Force).

2.3

2.4

Fire Extinguishers a)

Contractor is to supply and install PSB-approved fire extinguishers conforming to the latest requirements of the Fire Safety Bureau (Singapore Civil Defence Force).

b)

The extinguishers are to be to locations and types as per indicated in architectural drawings.

c)

The extinguishers are to come complete with handle, squeeze grip release valve, gas distribution's safety catch and discharge nozzle and mounted on brackets plugged and screwed to walls or columns.

d)

The extinguishers are to be tested and primed, with date of such testing to be clearly indicated on label to each extinguisher. Prior to the expiry of extinguishers, within the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor is to arrange for extinguishers to be re-tested and primed. Such testing and priming is deemed to be within the Contractor’s contract sum and scope, and no additional cost will be considered.

Fire Suppression System for Kitchen Hoods The Contractor is to supply and install fire suppression system to the kitchen hoods of the Canteen Kitchen. Refer to M&E Tender Specifications. The Contractor is to note that installation and testing of similar fire suppression system at the Training Kitchen in Blk ‘D’ is NOT in this contract.

2.5

Fire-Stop to openings in floors and walls

Contractor is to supply and install approved fire-stop sealing compound to withstand two (2) hours’ fire resistance to all electrical risers which penetrate floors / walls in

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.0

TESTING AND COMMISIONING

Contractor is to test the water pressure and water throw of the fire hydrant and fire hosereel, in the presence of RTO (site staff) and during inspection by Registered Inspector. Such attendance by Contractor and his licensed plumber are deemed to be included in the tender cost, and no additional costs will be considered.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR FIXED FURNITURE 1.0

GENERAL

1.1

The specifications in this section relate to design and construction of timber counters / wall mounted cabinets, counters with solid surface counter top / cabinet laminated top, sides, internal and external face, in accordance to the following performance specification and standard comply with the relevant requirements of the standards and codes as list below.

1.2

Singapore Standards SS CP 1 SS 1 SS 71 SS 72 SS 173

1.3

Use of timber in buildings Plywood Nomenclature of commercial timbers Treatment of timber and plywood with copper/chrome/arsenic wood preservative Glossary of terms relating to timber and woodwork

Other Standards BS EN 438-2 Decorative high-pressure laminates (HPL) sheets based on thermosetting resins. Determination of properties. BS EN 573-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - chemical composition and form of wrought products. Chemical composition BS EN 1935 Single axis hinges, requirements and test methods BS 1186 Timber for and workmanship in joinery BS 1449-2 Steel Plate BS 4360 Specification for weldable structural steels BS 4965 Decorative laminated plastic sheet veneered boards and panels AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodic oxidation coatings. AS 3715 ASTM 3715 ASTMC 509

Metal finishing. Thermoset powder coating for aluminium and aluminium alloys Pressure sensitive tapes Elastomeric cellular preformed gasket and sealing material

2.0

PERFORM ANCE REQUIREM ENT S

2.1

The Contractor to ensure that the he has to take into account of the following requirement when carrying out the proposals.

2.2

The self-weight and other associated dead loads of the complete door and frames are to be supported and transferred to the main building structure.

2.3

The Contractor is deemed to include the design, supply and installation of all necessary supports & fixings & the water tightness between the metal framed timber leaf works and the surrounding building element.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

2.4

The timber works shall be supplied with ironmongery shall be lockset with vertical key lock types as per contract and specification to SO’s approval. All doors leafs, drawers, shelving (internal and external) are to be glued with laminate

2.5

The drawings in the tender package with requirements is indicative of the design intent only and does not purport to identify or solve completely the problems related to the construction. The Contractor shall at his own cost submit shop-drawings showing all aspects of construction of all timber Counter / Cabinet Layout and installation details, and co-ordination with all relevant building elements, for SO’s approval, before proceeding with the actual works.

2.6

Prior to proceeding with the works, the Contractor is to prepare suitable samples and / or mock-ups for SO’s approvals.

2.7

Unless otherwise specified or approved by the SO, grading shall be in accordance with Malaysian Grading Rules by qualified timer grading agents registered with Malaysian Timber Industry Board. Timber grade shall be of sound Grade for GMS (General Market Specifications)

3.0

MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS

3.1

The Contractor is to ensure that moisture content when fitted to be between 10-15%, moisture content variation between adjacent timbers to be no more than 3%.

3.2

The Contractor is to ensure, unless otherwise specified, that timber member sizes shall be in accordance with the Malaysia Forest Service Trade Leaflet No 38 for square or rectangular sections.

3.3

For widths, depths or thickness not exceeding 75mm within 5mm of the specified size.

3.4

For widths, depths or thickness exceeding 75mm, within 10mm of the specified sizes.

3.5

The Contractor is to ensure that unwrought timbers shall be left with sawn face to hold the full dimensions shown in the drawing

3.6

The Contractor is to ensure that wrought timber be allowed for each wrought face.

3.7

The Contractor is to ensure all timber shall be impregnated by means of Vacuum pressure processes in accordance with SS72.

3.8

The Contractor is to provide granite with certificate of performance from manufacturer setting out compliance with the integrity rating comply with the standard performance.

3.9

The Contractor is to ensure silicone-free dry PVC shall be used between cabinet and wall.

3.10

The Contractor is to ensure Fixtures and Fastenings shall comply with BS EN ISO 3506-1 and BS EN ISO 3506-2.

3.11

The Contractor is to ensure that the solid surface counter top shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction and requirement and properly

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

supervised by the manufacturer's supervisor. 3.12

4.0

Prior to proceeding with the works the Contractor is to prepare and obtain the SO’s approval for shop-drawings showing all typical installation details. WORKMANSHIP

4.1

The Contractor is to ensure that all workmanship must be carried out to the best quality standard and to the SO’s approval.

4.2

Co-ordinate the metal frame / timber door leaf / laminates and granite works with all interfacing works packages and trades to ensure correct setting out and positioning.

4.3

Handle and hoist assemblies carefully, at all stages to ensure that all materials are not damaged, and in accordance with manufacturer/s instruction.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR FLOOR & WALL 1.0

BEDS, BACKINGS AND INSITU FINISHINGS

1.1

Thin Set Mortar : Materials 1.1.1 Portland cement shall be grey or standard colour. Use white colour where it is specified for grout. 1.1.2 Sand shall be 30 - 60 mesh silica, clean and graded natural sand. For grout, white sand passing a 16-mesh screen shall be used. 1.1.3 Liquid latex mortar additive shall be thin set mortar additive as supplied by reputable and reliable supplier for the construction industry to S.O’s approval, for thin set mortar bed and/or levelling coats less than 6mm thick. 1.1.4 Colouring pigment additives shall be of high purity, chemically inert, nonstaining, non-fading and alkali-resistant mineral oxides. Colours shall be selected by the S.O from the approved manufacturer's full range. 1.1.5 Floor grout shall be appropriate Floor Grout and Joint Filler gauged with grout admixture as supplied by reputable and reliable supplier for the construction industry, to approval of S.O. 1.1.6 Wall tile grout shall be appropriate Wall Grout gauged with grout mixture as supplied by reputable and reliable supplier for the construction industry, to approval of S.O.

2

CEMENT-SAND PLASTER

2.1

Generally 2.1.1 The Contractor shall carry out all the cement-sand plastering works as specified herein, where detailed or shown in the drawings. The Contractor shall allow the cost of forming patterns, mouldings, motifs, all necessary falls and currents, non-slip recessed grooves, expansion joints and skirtings to the finishes including any bordering required, to the satisfaction and approval of the S.O. 2.1.2 Samples of various locational floors and wall plaster works laid in representative areas not less than 5000 x 5000 shall be provided for the S.O’s approval before any work commence on site. The approved sample areas shall be used for the purpose of quality and workmanship control, and also for comparison. Any work not equal to the approved sample shall be classified as defective. 2.1.3 Plastering sand shall be clean, natural, uncrushed or partially crushed sand of a light colour, free from organic matter, suitable for use in plastering and approved by the S.O. The clay-plus-fine silt content shall not exceed 5% by weight and 15% by volume as specified in BS 1199.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

2.1.4 The field test for determining the volume of silt shall be carried out in accordance with the methods as hereinafter described. All sand found to contain silt in excess of 15% by volume shall not be used for plastering or in mortars but shall be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense. 2.1.5 Sand shall be sieved fine and of as light a colour as possible. 3.0

WATERPROOFING COMPOUND

3.1

The waterproofing compound shall as approved by the S.O. in the specifications herein, and strictly used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.1.1 Field Test To Determine Level Of Contaminants In Plastering Sand Carry out field tests as and when required by the S.O for determining the volume of silt and clay in plastering sand. Prepare a salt solution using one teaspoonful of table salt to half litre of cold tap water. Fill a clean jam jar to about one third of its volume with a sample of the plastering sand. Pour the prepared salt solution into the jam jar to about 90% full. Close lid of the jar, shake its contents vigorously and leave to stand for half an hour. A layer of silt will settle over the top of the sand. Should the layer of silt exceeds one-tenth of the depth of the sand in the jar, the sand is too contaminated to be used and shall be rejected. The S.O may also carry out a physical inspection of a batch of sand. If it stains excessively or balls up in the fingers when rubbed, the sand shall be removed from the Site at the Contractor's expense. 3.1.2

Cement-sand Plastering for New Works Unless otherwise specified, plaster shall be applied in two coats to the total nominal thickness indicated. The first coat shall be cross scored to provide a key for the second coat which shall be 6mm thick trowelled or floated to produce a tight, matt, smooth surface in a true plane to correct line and level with walls and reveals plumb and square. a) Render and set minimum 13mm (for interior plastering), or minimum 25mm (for exterior plastering) thick cement and sand (1:4) plaster gauged with approved plasticiser and steel trowelled smooth to all exposed concrete surfaces such as soffits of concrete slabs, beams, canopy, staircases etc unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. b) Render and set 20mm (for interior plastering), or minimum 25mm (for exterior plastering) thick cement and sand (1:4) plaster gauged with approved plasticiser and steel trowelled smooth to all exposed common brickwork surfaces unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

3.2

Plaster angle and stop beads made from hot dipped galvanised steel to BS 2989 : 1982: Z2 quality coating type G275 of approved manufacture shall be used at all

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.3

arises, edges, recessed grooves, abutments, corners and joints for plastering and tiling work. The beads shall be manufactured to BS 6542:1984. Expanded steel strip mesh shall be used to reinforce plaster along stress lines where cracking is likely to occur, or when plastering over the joint between two different materials, or for plastering over narrow gaps such as service chases.

3.4

Expanded steel corner mesh shall also be used to reinforce plaster at internal corners. The expanded steel strip mesh shall be made of hot-dipped galvanised steel to BS 2989:1982:'Z2 quality coating type G275' of approved manufacture.

3.5

Carry plaster into grooves and rebates of frames and finish with a slightly coved internal angle against metal window frames. 3.5.1

Batching and Mixing of Materials Materials shall be batched by volume in properly sized gauge boxes, one for each material. The materials shall be mechanically mixed or hand mixed on a clean watertight platform and to the satisfaction of the S.O. Mixes containing cement shall be used within two hours of the first contact of the cement with water. All materials remaining after this period shall be discarded and not re-tempered. Contractor shall submit to the S.O, relevant certification from the approved supplier of the plasticiser incorporated in the plaster mix, as that the quantity used and the dosage is in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.5.2

Preparation of Surfaces Contractor shall rake out joints of brickwork and blockwork to a depth of at least 10mm before the mortar is set in, for the areas to be plastered. Thoroughly hack or the roughen the surfaces to provide a key for plastering. Also, hack off any projecting fins on the concrete work and remove all traces of mould oil, paint, grease, dirt and other incompatible materials by scrubbing with water containing detergent and washing off with clean water. Brush plastering surfaces to remove all loose particles, dust, laitance and efflorescence, etc and ensure that the surfaces are well wetted before applying each coat. Re-wet to keep damp continuously as required to receive the second coating and to equalise suction.

3.5.3

Movement Joints Movement joints in the base shall be carried through applied coatings and finishings. Form joints against properly braced timber formwork.

3.5.4

Curing Work shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and cracking. No traffic shall be permitted on insitu pavings or beds until 7 days after laying.

3.5.5

Angles In Paving, Plastering And Rendering

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.5.6 3.5.7

4.0

Internal angles shall be slightly coved, external angles and arises slightly rounded true to line and with neatly formed mitres. Defects and Making Good - All cracks, blisters and other defects shall be made good by hacking out the plaster to, Edges shall be undercut to form dovetailed keys, surfaces shall be cleaned, cement slurry to be applied and plaster re-applied to match the surrounding plaster.

BEDS AND BACKING TO RECEIVE OTHER MATERIALS 4.1

Beds shall be laid in bays not exceeding 15m2 as near square shaped as is practicable.Bays shall be laid to break joint to avoid four corners coinciding and with at least 24 hours allowed between placing adjacent bays.

4.2

Finish beds and backings with a screeded finish to receive insitu finishings or finishings bedded in mortar; with a wood floated finish left plain to receive inflexible finishings fixed with an adhesive; and with a smooth steel trowelled finish free from protuberances and hollows to receive flexible finishings. Where the finishing will be executed by an approved specialist sub-contractor, the bed or backing shall be finished to the sub-contractor's approval. In such cases, the Contractor shall obtain the sub-contractor's written confirmation that the bed or backing is satisfactory in all respects and forward a copy of such confirmation to the S.O.

5.0

SCREEDS AND PAVINGS

5.1

Placement of Screeds and Pavings 5.1.1

All surfaces to be screed or paved must be thoroughly brushed and washed cleaned and well wetted before each coat of screed or paving is applied.

5.1.2

Contractor shall ensure proper adhesion between screeds or pavings and the structure. Smooth concrete surface must be hacked to form keys to the satisfaction of the SO.

5.1.3

All mortars for paving and screed shall be mechanically mixed unless otherwise directed by the SO. The Contractor shall make allowance for the use of cement necessitated by such other method of mixing as directed. Only the whole bags of cement shall be used in any one batch of mix, and the cement and sand shall be measured by volume in properly sized containers, one for each material.

5.1.4

No partially or wholly set mortar shall be allowed to be used or re-mixed.

5.1.5

Spread, rake, screed and thoroughly compact by hand, tamping or rolling with a 100 kg roller. If a roller is used, three transverses shall be made in each direction. a) Compact by hand at corners and at any joints as they are being formed.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

b) Power float in two operations. Power floating shall be taken over joints in order to obtain a compact flush surface finish. c) Power trowel in one operation to produce a smooth surface relatively free from defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. d) After the surface has hardened, hand trowel to produce a surface free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance. e) Screeds which are to receive surface application of materials such as waterproofing or roofing membranes shall be smoothly finished in strict accordance with the conditions specified for such applications. 5.1.6

Screeds and pavings, where specified in the drawings, shall be finished to minimum of 1:100 fall or to fall as shown in the drawings, or as directed by the SO, and finally , to be laid to the levels shown on the drawings, free from all irregularities and depressions so that water drains off the floor, leaving none standing.

5.1.7

All arises, internal angles, external angles etc, shall be cleaned and slightly rounded and neatly formed mitres

5.1.8

Immediately after trowelling, the insitu screed or paving shall be adequately kept damp and allowed to cure with no shrinkage and cracking. Where possible, as soon as the surface is hard enough, the completed areas shall be flooded with 25mm depth of curing water for not less than 7 days retained by placing a line of mud or clay around the perimeter of each day’s work.

5.1.9

All making good shall be cut out to a rectangular bay typical to the location, and finished flushed with the face of surrounding paving. The cut surface shall be wetted with water to receive new cement mix at the same mix as the original paving or screed. All cracks or blisters and other defects shall be cut out in similar manner and made good and the whole of the work left perfect on completion.

5.1.10

All finished surfaces shall be finished to a true and even surface over the whole area.

5.2

Protection To Screeds And Pavings

5.2.1

Protect surfaces which are to receive subsequent finishes against any form of damage immediately after laying. If, when the finish is to be laid, the surface shows irregularities likely to affect the finish, Contractor shall grind back within limits to 2.5mm below the intended finished level and bring up to a finished level by the application of an approved self-levelling compound applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions or recommendations.

5.2.2

The cement based self-levelling compound containing powder polymer mixed with water shall be CL-Floor 33 Pumpable Smoothing Wearcoat Compound, or other approved equivalent.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

5.2.3

Contractor shall protect paved surfaces after laying, and limit traffic over the floor. 5.2.4 Contractor shall also take up and lay protective coverings as required for cleaning, sealing and polishing. Protection shall also include a periodical cleaning where required to prevent dirt, grit, etc from becoming en-grained. No protective finish shall be laid or applied in any manner which will in ways hinder or inhibit the fixing of later floor finishes.

5.3

5.4

Cement and Sand Paving 5.3.1

Immediately before laying, the surface shall be well dampened with a slurry of neat cement and water brushed on. The new cement and sand paving shall be laid while the slurry is wet, and of thickness required consisting of one part cement and three parts of sand by volume.

5.3.2

Paving shall be laid in bays not exceeding 15m2 as near square shaped as is practicable. Bays shall be laid to break joint to avoid four corners coinciding and with at least 24 hours allowed between placing adjacent bays.

5.3.3

Paving surfaces shall be finished smooth and true to plane with a steel trowel, free of protuberances and hollows.

Hardened Cement and Sand Paving 5.4.1

5.5

The hardened cement and sand screed or paving shall be of thickness required and shall consists of one part cement to three parts of sand by volume with an approved hardener added in accordance to the manufacturer’s instructions, laid on concrete to levels, falls and direction, trowelled smooth with a steel trowel or power floated as specified.

Granolithic Paving 5.5.1

Granolithic paving shall consist of two parts cement, one part clean washed sand and five parts granite chippings of approved colour and size to pass a 6mm mesh and be retained on a 3mm mesh and be washed free from dirt.

5.5.2

The water cement ratio shall be kept as low as possible consistent with obtaining full compaction to avoid segregation or excessive laitance.

5.5.3

Lay paving in bays with simple butt joints arranged to coincide with any structural joints. Lay bays in one operation in as near square proportions as possible in the following sizes:a) For monolithic construction (i.e. where the paving is laid within 1 to 3 hours of laying the base concrete), in bays not exceeding 25m2.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

b) For separate construction where the average paving thickness does not exceed 25mm, in bays not exceeding 20m 2 . c) For separate construction where the average paving thickness exceeds 25mm, in bays not exceeding 15m 2 .

6.0

5.5.4

When granolithic is laid as separate construction, the base concrete shall be thoroughly hacked. The base shall be soaked with water for at least 12 hours, the surplus water removed and a thin layer of neat cement grout scrubbed into the surface of the base immediately before laying the paving.

5.5.5

After laying and fully compacting the paving, it shall be trowelled at least three times at intervals during the next 6 to 10 hours to produce a uniform and hard closely knit surface with high resistance to abrasion, free from laitance with as much coarse aggregate just below the surface as possible.

EXPANDED BEADING

METAL MESH

(‘EXPAMET’), RECESSED

GROOVES

AND

6.1

Fixing to timber shall be by means of 38mm galvanised steel staples and to metal by galvanised wire or clips. The slope of the strands shall be all in one direction which for vertical work shall be inwards and downwards.

6.2

Where plaster and backings are applied to surfaces of dissimilar backgrounds which abut each other, the joint shall be reinforced with 'Expamet' galvanised steel strip mesh, or approved equivalent.

6.3

The metal lathing shall be hot-dipped galvanised expanded metal complying with BS 1369 weighing not less than 1.6 kg/m2. It shall be lapped 40mm at joints and secured with galvanised steel wire.

6.4

Internal and external corners and window and door reveals shall also be reinforced with 'Expamet' hot dipped galvanised steel corner mesh.

6.5

Arises, corners of plaster works shall be formed with suitable Corner and Angle PVC Beads, or other approved equivalent. The corner beads shall be of the following type:

6.5

a)

For internal corners

- Corner Bead (Thin with foot,); - 2-Way Corner Ruler; or - Corner Ruler.

b)

For external corners

- Corner bead (Thick with foot); - Corner Ruler (A-Type,); or - 2-Way Corner Ruler; or - 2-Way Corner Ruler, Free Type

The Recessed Groove Joints shall be of the following type: a)

For external recessed plastering groove - 20mm Groove Joint

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

b)

For internal recessed plastering groove - 10mm wide Groove Joint; or - 10mm Punching Groove Joint. Strip and corner mesh, angle beads and recessed groove beads shall be fixed with mortar grout strictly in accordance to the approved manufacturer’s instructions or recommendations. 7.0

GRADIENT TEST 7.1 balcony

8.0

Gradient tests shall be carried out on all toilet, kitchen and external floors.

7.2

After the screed/paving has been laid and stiffened sufficiently, the surface shall be tested for trueness with a 3m long straight edge.

7.3

The straight edge shall be held in contact with the surface and the trueness of the surface checked at not less than two different angles. All high areas shall be cut down and depressions filled up and refinished to level, falls and directions.

7.4

Straight edge testing and surface corrections shall continue until the entire surface conforms to the required falls and directions of 25mm to every 300mm towards water outlets and/or scupper drains as shown on the drawings.

TILE AND SLAB FINISHING 8.1

Ceramic & Homogeneous Tiles 8.1.1 The Contractor shall include in his rates, allowance for the cost of forming patterns, all necessary falls and currents, non slip grooves and expansion joints to the tile finishes specified herein. 8.1.2 All tiles shall be of first grade, first quality, well burnt, true to shape , size, evenly matched for colour, tonality and texture, free from blemishes or any visible defects and complete with chamfered edges. 8.1.3 The supply and laying of homogeneous tiles, including all angle tiles, to walls and floors, as specified herein or shown in the drawings, shall be bedded and jointed in cement and sand (1:3) mortar or laid with tile adhesive to a minimum 12mm thick cement and sand (1:3) base which shall be provided, rendered plumbed and floated to a surface suitable to receive the tiling, to the S.O’s approval and pointed with matching coloured cement or grout. 8.1.4 Tiles shall be soaked in clean water before fixing. A layer of cement mortar (1:3) or approved tile adhesive of 3mm thick shall be applied to the back of the tiles, pressing the tiles to the prepared surface firmly and necessarily tapping it to ensure bonding. All joints shall not be more than 1mm wide and pointed with colour matched cement or grout.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

8.2

8.1.5 Where cutting of tiles is necessary to lay to fit, the tiles shall be cut neatly and the edges shall be ground smooth to ensure neat junctions. Tiles shall be carefully cut and fitted round tiling obstructions such as pipes, etc. Packaging 8.2.1 All tiles shall be packed in properly labelled wooden pallets complete with plastic covers. 8.2.2 All tiles shall be kept in batches, numbered in accordance with the number of the containers and or pallets.

8.3

Delivery All tiles shall be delivered to the site in their original unopened containers or pallets with all labels intact and legible at the time of use.

8.4

Samples and Mock Ups 8.4.1 Samples of tiles shall be submitted free of cost to the Architect for approval within 3 calendar months subsequent to the commencement of work. 8.4.2 The Contractor shall loose lay a mock-up (for all types of tiles) of approximate 15m2, for approval by the S.O prior to manufacturing. The exact location, colours, and patterns of the tiles shall be directed by the S.O.. The mock-up shall be executed to the complete satisfaction of the S.O. Upon acceptance of the mock-up by the S.O, the Contractor shall be required to submit full coloured shop drawings both in print form, and in diskette form, of the tiling layout plans and elevation drawings to a minimum of metric drawing scale of 1:50 unless otherwise approved by the S.O. 8.4.3 The Contractor shall submit 1 set of control samples of the approved tiles mounted on display timber boards to the S.O the time of or immediately after approval of the loose lay mock-up 8.4.4 All tiles subsequently delivered to the site for the works shall be gauged against the approved control samples for correct colouration and quality. 8.4.5 The Contractor shall submit local test reports from approved testing laboratories to show that the proposed tiles comply in all respect with the specifications.

8.5

Tests 8.5.1 Notwithstanding, the submission of test reports as provided for in the Clause 6.5, the Contractor shall also allow for the cost of providing samples, transport, air freight (if any), testing fees and all other charges and expenses incurred in sending 3 lots each of the tiles from each consignment to SISIR or other approved laboratories separately for

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

testing in 10 pieces per lot selected randomly at the discretion of the S.O. 8.5.2 The Contractor shall provide the services of the forklift and any other necessary equipment for eth sampling of tiles. Samples will be picked at random by the S.O or his authorised representative(s) and the contractor shall ensure that any pallet or pallets be opened for this purpose. 8.5.3 Tiles shall be tested in accordance with methods and procedure adopted by SISIR or other approved laboratories. 8.5.4 Upon failure of the tiles to meet with the specification, the entire pallet or the entire tiled area shall be removed from site and made good at the Contractor’s own expense. 8.6

Colour & Calibration 8.6.1 The Contractor shall provide full range patterns, colours and textures of the tiles. The S.O shall have prerogative in the selection of tiles on their particular patterns, colours ranges and textures and there shall be no additional cost to the Employer. 8.6.2 To ensure consistent tonal qualities, tiles should be manufactured in a single process irrespective of delivery schedule. The Contractor shall ensure that tiles of the same type in any one area or in two or more adjoining areas shall be the same and shall show no sign of change in quality, colour, hue, shade, tone texture, etc. 8.6.3 All polished or matte finished homogeneous tiles shall be of similar calibration when delivered to site. Difference between calibration of the polished and matte finished tiles shall not be accepted.

8.7

Accessories The Contractor shall provide all accessory tiles including corner tiles of matching size and colour to trim round all water pipes inclusive of concrete kerbs, windows and any other openings to the satisfaction of the S.O.

8.8

Cleaning And Protection of Tiles 8.8.1 All tiled walls and floors shall be cleaned on completion of tiling works and all surfaces left tidy to the satisfaction of the S.O. 8.8.2 Precaution shall be taken by the Contractor to protect finished work from damage by other trades. 8.8.3

Where laid floor tiles will be subject to damage or discolouration due to ongoing construction operations or traffic, it shall be protected with wood boards, plywood sheets or kraft paper over one layer of clear plastic sheet.

8.8.4 Tiling work damaged or discoloured shall be removed and replaced with new tiles at the Contractor's expense.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

8.8.5 Use cleaning materials that are compatible with tile, grout and mortar materials. 8.8.6 Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded or other defective tiling work. 8.9

Maintenance Stock 8.9.1 The Contractor shall provide maintenance stock of all the homogeneous tiles and their related accessories in accordance to the following proportions: Area Up to 300m 2 Over 300m 2 to 1200m 2 Over 1200m 2 to 8000m 2 Over 8000m 2 to 20000m 2 Over 20000m 2

8.10

Percentage 2% 1% ¼% 1/ 8% 1 /10%

Remarks Min 1m2 , max 6m2 Min 6m 2, max 12m 2 Min 12m 2 , max 20m 2 Min 20m 2 , max 25m 2 Min 25m 2 , max 40m 2

Tile Adhesive 8.10.1 Tile adhesive for internally laid homogeneous and ceramic tiles shall be flexible and damp resistant organic based adhesive to SO’s approval, conforming to the following technical specification:Specific Gravity : 1.61kg/It PH : 9 - 9.5 Dry Solid Content : 79 –80% Brookfield : 2.4 x 104 Toxicity Hazard : No Inflammability : No Tensile Adhesion Strength : 0.27Mpa Shear Adhesion Strength : 2.18Mpa 8.10.2 Tile adhesive should laid in minimum thickness of 5mm for Marble and Granite slab, and 3mm thick for homogeneous and ceramic tile. It shall be non-staining to the tiles or slabs. Subfloor for areas using tile adhesive shall be wood float finish. 8.10.3 Joints shall be grouted with an approved water based synthetic resin polymer waterproof grout compatible to the type of tile adhesive used and of colour to match the tiles or slabs to S.O’s approval.

9.0

QUARRY, HOMOGENEOUS, CLAY & SLATE TILES 9.1

Generally 9.1.1 All Quarry, Homogenous, Clay and Slate tiles shall be of any one colour, finish or pattern shall be obtained from one manufacturer approved by the S.O.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

9.1.2 If requested by the S.O, the Contractor shall submit samples of tiles to PSB for testing and Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for and will pay the fees without cost to the Employer in connection therewith. 9.1.3 Homogenous and Slate tiles shall be 300 x 300 x 6-10mm and laid with joints not more than 4mm wide. 9.1.4 Clay tiles shall be 108 x 108 x 6.5mm with cushion edges and spacer lugs complying with SS 57. Tiles shall be laid with joints not more than 2mm wide. 9.1.5 Quarry tiles shall be 152 x 76 x 16mm and complying with BS 6431. Tiles shall be laid with joints not more than 4mm wide. 9.1.6 For all quarry homogenous, clay or slate tiles, for which a prime cost rate for supply is incorporated in the Bills of Quantities, will be subjected to selection and approval by the S.O.

9.2

Laying the Tiles 9.2.1

Ensure that substrate surfaces are dry, true to plane and level, clean and free from contamination and loose areas.

9.2.2 Start wall tiling from the top and work downwards. 9.2.3 Set out tiles so that cut tiles are kept to a minimum and where they do occur area as large as possible. Lay out joints in straight unbroken lines. Horizontal joints in adjacent walls shall be aligned. 9.2.4 Carry movement joints through the full depth of tile and bedding. Partially fill with filler and finish flush with sealant to the approved manufacturer's recommendation. 9.2.5 Neatly cut and fit tiles around any obstructions. Cut and grind edges of tiles against fixtures to the approval of the S.O. 9.2.6 Finished faces of tile shall be true to plane, square and all tiles shall be fully bedded. 9.2.7 Clean tile surfaces thoroughly upon completion. 9.3

Bedding Tiles In Water Resistant Tile Adhesive Ensure that cement beds and backings are flat enough to permit fixing with a thin bed adhesive.

9.4

Bedding Tiles In Mortar 9.4.1 Soak tiles to suit the various types of tiles and allow to drain.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

9.4.2 Wet backgrounds just sufficiently to prevent excessive absorption of water from the bedding mortar. 9.4.3 Bed tile skirtings solid to wall in cement mortar (1:3) before floor tiles are laid. 9.4.4 Fill any deep keys or frogs and evenly ‘butter’ the entire back of each tile with cement mortar (1:3) to give a finished bed thickness of 6-10mm. Place tiles and firmly tap into position ensuring a solid bedding under the whole tile and proper adhesion over the whole of the background and the tile back. 9.5

Bedding Tiles In Thin Set Mortar 9.5.1 Clean bed surfaces thoroughly. Dampen the surfaces if it is very dry, but do not saturate. Float thin set mortar over area no greater than the area to be covered with the tile. Meanwhile, allow the mortar to remain plastic. Cover evenly with no bare spots. Comb mortar with notched trowel within 10 minutes of applying tile to form key to receive floor tile. Finished mortar bed thickness shall be 2mm to 3mm after beating in. 9.5.2 Press tile firmly into freshly notched mortar bed. Beat in and adjust tile before initial set takes place. Press and beat tile into position to obtain 100 percent contact with the mortar, without voids. Rib-backed tile shall also have a thin application of mortar on the back of each tile prior to placing on the mortar bed. 9.5.3 Backing surfaces shall not be soaked prior to applying mortar. Dampen dry backings only as needed to achieve cure. 9.5.4 Tiles shall be grouted and pointed with the approved factory-prepared grouting mixture. Grouting shall be performed in accordance with the approved manufacturer's recommendations. 9.5.5 Use the proper grout for their respective locations. Joints shall be packed full and free of all voids or pits. Tool to a uniform texture, matching approved samples. Excess mortar shall be cleaned from the surface as the work progresses. 9.5.6 Any hardened grout film or haze shall be removed using a suitable cleaning solution. Dampen the surface with the cleaning solution. Allow to soak 15 to 30 minutes and then use a power scrubbing machine with a nylon pad to polish off the surface and remove the film.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

10.0

MARBLE AND GRANITE 10.1 Generally 10.1.1

The supply and delivery of all granite and marble tile materials shall be carried out by reputable and reliable tile supplier, to the approval of S.O. The granite or marble slab installation work shall be executed by an experienced tile installer, with minimum 5 years of marble/granite installation experience to be proposed by the Contractor, subject also to approval by the S.O.

10.1.2

The Contractor is deemed to have included the cost of providing 4 nos of 600mm x 600mm x 20mm control samples to the S.O, for each granite and marble type specified herein or selected, air freight charges, testing fees and other charges, charges incurred in sending marble and granite slabs for testing, if required and directed by the S.O. All subsequent granite and marble tiles used shall be matched and be gauged against the control samples. Any granite and marble slabs used not matching the approved control samples shall be rejected and replaced by the Contractor free of costs.

10.1.3

All damaged, defective, rejected granite or marble slabs shall be replaced by the Contractor at his costs. The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient stock of granite and marble slabs consistent with the approved control samples in terms of quality, grade, texture design, size, thickness, pattern, tonality, colour etc, are maintained for replacement throughout the Contract Period and Maintenance Period.

10.1.4

The Contractor shall provide for each type of granite or marble slabs or tiles to the sizes as shown in the drawings or in accordance to the measurement and specified in the Bills of Quantities. Where granite or marble slabs sizes are not indicated in the drawings or the Bills of Quantities, they shall be of size 600mm x 600mm x 20mm. The Contractor shall allow in his pricing for each different type of granite or marble slabs as shown in the drawings or as specified.

10.2 Material 10.2.1

All granite and marble supplied shall conform to the minimum requirements of the relevant standards unless otherwise specified. All materials shall meet the minimum requirements in regard to the physical properties, trueness of shape, dimensional tolerances and quality of finish.

10.2.2

The granite and marble slabs shall essentially be the best quality of its kind, and suitable for the purpose intended. The granite and marble tiles shall be cut from slabs selected from the same approved quarry bed, and shall be free from cracks, fissures, chips, stains or other defects which would affect its strength and appearance. They shall also be of consistent in terms of quality, grade, texture design, size, thickness, pattern, tonality and non-fading colours to the approval of the S.O. Patching and filling to the granite or marble slabs, if it is approved by the S.O, shall be carried to the satisfaction of the S.O.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

10.2.3

The selected type of granite/marble floor and wall slabs shall be obtained and selected from an approved quarry of sufficient quantity output capacity.

10.2.4

All slabs shall be selected, pre-cut, polished, flamed or honed at factory with not more than accepted tolerances in the stone industry (variation of face dimensions on any stone shall not exceed 1mm in 900mm and thickness variation not exceeding +3mm or -3mm).

10.2.5

The granite and marble slabs shall be selected with the specified finish on one face and all edges to be neatly squared at the sides and back.

10.2.6

The granite and marble slabs shall be selected so that the natural blend of colour and vein, grain and pattern is consistently obtained throughout the supply of the slabs.

10.2.7

Granite slabs with honeycomb structure shall be filled with blending colour filler to achieve and maintain the overall colour to the approval of the SO.

10.2.8

The Contractor shall at his own cost, prepare, demolish and amend mock-up floor and wall sample of minimum 3 square metres for the granite and marble slabs prior to actual installation when directed by the S.O, until the quality, texture and finish required is approved by the S.O, after which all granite and marble floor and wall tilling executed shall be equal to the approved mock-up.

10.2.9

Contractor shall provide allowance of minimum 13mm, in addition to the thickness of the slabs for the tile backing in relation to the finished surface.

10.2.10 Where cement mortar backing is used, granite slabs shall be sealed at the front, back and sides to prevent the effects of staining with minimum two (2) coats of approved water-based acrylic sealant, to approval of S.O. 10.2.11 All granite and marble slabs shall be coated on surface with an approved multifunctional protecting, solvent based agent, which is formulated by special silicone resins and free from corrosive elements. The surface coating shall perform a total waterproofing, anti-stain, antifungi action with good stain resistance. The approved coating shall not cause a change of colours, nor creating a surface film interfering with the natural transpiration of the materials. 10.3

Sizes And Thickness 10.3.1 All granite and marble tiles and slabs shall be 20mm thick except for restricted areas, which shall be designed and custom cut to fit the intended profile to the approval of the S.O.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

10.4

Joints 10.4.1 The specialist shall be responsible for the design and accuracy in setting out of the joints. All joints shall be grouted with an approved water based synthetic resin polymer waterproofed grout, compatible to the type of tile adhesive used and yet able to accommodate differential movement such as thermal movement etc. 10.4.2 All joints between granite and marble tiles shall be flushed butt joints not more than 1mm wide, unless otherwise shown in the drawings, pointed with granite dust obtained from the cut tiles or slabs mixed with tinted cement to colour match the granite or marble, to the approval of the S.O. Apply an approved sealer to the surface of grouted joints immediately after installation. 10.4.3 Movement joints shall be installed where granite or marble tiles abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, kerbs, columns etc. and directly over expansion joints in structural surfaces. 10.4.4 Interior installation shall have movement joints spaced a maximum of 7000mm x 7000mm. Exterior areas shall have movement joints spaced a maximum of 6000mm x 6000mm. 10.4.5 The movement joints shall be provided and filled with Polyurethane Joint Sealant or approved equivalent, and used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

11.0

CARPET TILE 11.1 SUBMITTALS 11.1.1

Shop Drawing showing columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required as well as direction of carpet pile and pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to installation.

11.1.2

Carpet schedule using same room designations indicated on drawings.

11.1.3

Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.

11.1.4

Submit manufacturer’s complete set of color samples for Architect’s initial color selection.

11.1.5

Submit two 19.6” x 19.6” samples illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified.

11.1.6

Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

11.2

11.1.7

Include maintenance procedures, recommendations for maintenance materials and equipment and suggested schedule for cleaning.

11.1.8

Submit warranty, certification and description of reclamation and recycling process

Quality Assurance 11.2.1

Manufacturer Qualification 11.2.1.1

Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with minimum 3 years documented experience.

11.2.1.2

Upon request, manufacturer to provide representative to assist in project start-up and to inspect installation while in process and upon completion.

11.2.1.3

Representative will notify designated contact if any installation instructions are not followed.

11.2.2 Installer Qualifications 11.2.2.1

Flooring contractor must be certified by the carpet manufacturer prior to bid.

11.2.2.2

Flooring contractor to be a specialty contractor normally engaged in this type of work and shall have prior experience in the installation of these types of materials.

11.2.2.3

Flooring contractor possessing Contract for the carpet installation shall not sub-contract the labor without written approval of the Project Manager.

11.2.2.4

Flooring contractor will be responsible for proper product installation, including floor testing and preparation as specified by the carpet manufacturer.

11.2.2.5

Flooring contractor to provide Owner a written installation warranty that guarantees the completed installation to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year after job completion.

11.2.3 Acceptance Inspection 11.2.3.1

At owner’s option, representative samples (consisting of a full width strip, minimize length to be determined by testing laboratory based on testing required) shall be taken from deliveries made under this contract and submitted for quality control testing to a NVLAP certified independent testing facility chosen by the SO, Owner, and/or Contractor. Sample to be tested according to the following methods: AATCC 20: Fiber Analysis (Cross Section w/ Photo, Melt Index, Fiber Identification, Determination of Antistat

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Existence) Backing Identification: Cross Section of Backing w/ Photo, Backing Identification (Must show compliance with 2.02.C.) Aachen / ISO 2551 / DIN 54318: Dimensional Stability An original certified copy of the test reports will be sent to the S.O or Contractor in order to verify compliance of the production run with requirements specified. All costs for such testing are the responsibility of the Contractor. Any product that fails the test must be reported to the S.O. The Manufacturer can choose to have a sample from the same lot tested at an independent lab of their choice. If this sample passes, the Contractor and Owner have no further course. If the Manufacturer has supplied a sample that is shown to have a fibre construction or backing identification that did not meet the initial requirements of the Owner or does not represent what was specified by the Manufacturer, the Owner can request damages and may need to replace the carpet. If the Owner has twice failed a test for dimensional stability, the Manufacturer may face charges for not meeting the requirement of the Owner. The Manufacturer would only be forced to replace the carpet if the installation began to noticeably change in dimensions. 11.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING 11.3.1

Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer’s original packaging listing manufacturer’s name, product name, identification number, and related information.

11.3.2 Store in a dry location, between 60 degrees F and 80 degrees F and a relative humidity below 65%. Protect from damage and soiling. Store in pallet form as supplied by Manufacturer. Do not stack pallets. 11.3.3 Make stored materials available for inspection by the Owner’s representative. 11.3.4 Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 48 hours prior to installation. 12.0

INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP 12.1

The Contractor shall check all concrete and brick walls for plumbness and accuracy necessary for the setting out and installation.

12.2

Where granite or marble slabs are cladded to portal frames, and all framings for free standing stone wall finishes, the Contractor shall engage his own Professional Engineer (PE) to design and endorse the steel support system

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

and details of joints if any, to the Consultant Structural Engineer’s and SO’s approval 12.3

All granite slabs shall be fixed with stainless steel clamps and anchors with the 40mm air space at back grouted solid with cement mortar to a level 1500mm above floor level.

12.4

Granite slabs shall be fixed with 30mm airspace between wall and back of slab.

12.5

All metal anchors and clamps shall be stainless steel, to be proposed by the Specialist. Where stainless steel anchors are fixed to brick walls, chemical masonry anchors shall be used. The Contractor shall allow for fixing on to bricks with extrusion holes.

12.6

Stainless steel anchors and clamps shall be fixed with non-shrinking grout as directed and as per manufacturer's instructions.

12.7

The Specialist shall prepare and provide three (3) complete sets of fully detailed minimum 1:5 scale shop drawings with proposed anchorage fixing proposals and edge and profile details and coloured 1: 10 scale tiling layouts and patterns drawings, internal and external corners, arises, bird-mouths, bullnose, ogees, etc; and any other information etc; to be submitted to the SO for approval prior to actual installation of granite or marble tiling work.

12.8

The Contractor shall calculate strength and size of anchors to be used, depending on size and weight of slab and all anchor holes shall be drilled at least 100mm away from edge of granite or marble tile.

12.9

The stainless steel anchoring system shall be approved by the Consultant Structural Engineer and SO prior to fixing, and support and restraint anchors shall be placed so that no transfer of load is effected between tiles or slabs.

12.10 All granite and marble tiles on completion of installation work, the floor and wall shall be removed of debris and excess materials, and cleaned with nonalkaline cleaning solution, and be protected with heavy duty polythene sheeting so as to prevent staining from woodwork, coffee/tea spills, oil and grease all at the Contractor’s own cost. 12.11 Marking, Packaging and Labelling 12.11.1 The following markings shall be legibly and indelibly impressed on the back of each slabs the name of the Principal Supplier/Manufacturer with address of the quarry, and country and address of the Manufacturer of the marble and granite slabs. 12.11.2The Contractor shall attach different colour labels indicating the date of delivery for different batches of slabs, at all sides of the palletised packages for easy identification.

13.0

CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF FLOOR AND WALL T ILES

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

13.1

Precaution shall be taken to protect finished work from damage by other trades.

13.2

Where floor or wall tiles will be subject to any damage or discolouration due to ongoing construction operations or traffic, they shall be protected with timber hoardings, plywood sheets or kraft paper to the approval of the SO.

13.3

Tiling work damaged or discoloured shall be removed by the Contractor and replaced with new tiles at the Contractor's expense.

13.4

Clean grout and setting materials from the face of the tile while materials are workable. Contractor shall ensure that the finished tile faces are clean and free of all foreign matter. Contractor shall use only cleaning materials that are compatible with tile, grout and mortar materials.

13.5

Contractor shall ensure that the finished installation is clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded or other defective tiling work, on handing over.

WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide warranty for Carpet floor tiles for a period of five (5) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover against edge ravelling, zippering, resiliency loss of the backing and delamination of the secondary backing from the primary backing containing the fibre face, the effectiveness of the adhesive, workmanship, and any damage not due to fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR GLASS 1.0

GENERALLY

1.1

Glass shall be as specified and approved and is to comply with the relevant B.S or S.S codes. It shall be free from blemishes, bubbles, specks, scratches, waves and other defects. All glass shall bear the label of its manufacturer. Samples of all glass shall be submitted to the S.O for approval before ordering.

1.2

The shading coefficient and thermal conductance of the glass shall be stated in SI units. Where reflective glass are specified; the reflective coating shall comply with the Authorities' requirement of not more than 10% reflectivity.

1.3

Glass shall be butted to suit the opening, leaving a clearance of 1.6mm all round.

1.4

Glass shall be delivered with factory labels attached and stacked in near vertical position on timber, felt or other resilient edge strips. Keep glass clean and dry during delivery and storage.

1.5

Glass sample shall be submitted (min size 600 x 600) to S.O for approval for each glass type.

1.6

All site dimensions shall be taken before cutting glass. Edges of panes shall be clean cut and free from imperfections. All glass shall be cut accurately to fit frames with necessary clearance and shall be set to give full bedding on the entire width of frame.

1.7

A suitable form of protection shall be afforded to all edges of glass and shall not be removed until immediately before fixing on site. Should shop or site conditions necessitate deviation from the above requirements, the proposed glazing procedures shall be submitted in writing for the S.O’s approval prior to starting the work.

2.0

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WINDOWS AND GLAZED DOORS

2.1

Notwithstanding the approval of glass endorsed by the S.O, the Contractor shall be responsible for the following:a) All design, methods and procedures in respect of fabrication, preparation, delivery,

installation and protection of glasswork of various types required. b) Obtaining and strictly complying with manufacturer's recommendations and

instructions for handling, preparation and installation of their respective glass products. c) Re-confirming that installation conditions are proper and acceptable for glasswork

of types required; by thorough examination, in advance, of all details respective to glasswork required herein. d) All as necessary to provide structurally sound, effective and durable glasswork and

of first quality workmanship as intended under these specifications.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

2.2

Putty Glazing to wood shall be best linseed oil putty. Glazing to metal shall be with approved proprietary mastic or with the manufacturer's approved materials and methods. Wood rebates are to be primed before puttying. No putty is to be painted until 14 days after glazing.

2.3

Float Glass Float glass shall be as specified and approved. Minimum thickness is 6mm.

2.4

Obscured Glass Obscured glass shall be plain rolled, sand blasted and to be cut and glazed so that the direction and face of the pattern is the same throughout.

2.5

Wired Glass Wired glass shall be Georgian-wired glass and where required to be "lined up", it is to be cut so that the wires in adjacent panes line up both horizontally and vertically.These are to be used for fire rated doors with vision panels (at Staircases).

2.6

Tinted Glass Glass shall be as specified and approved. Tinted glass shall be of approved colour with a shading co-efficient of 0.75 or such minimum standards as approved by the Authority and to the approval of the S.O. The tint for glass shall be fast. Should any deterioration develop after glazing under normal conditions of use, then any such affected glazing shall be replaced entirely at the Contractor's expense.

2.7

Glass Louver Blades Glass louver blades are to have all arises ground down smooth and shall be from an approved manufacturer.

2.8

Tempered Glass Tempered glass shall be used at the full-height glass doors and lift car doors. Proper identifications of tempered glass property is to be shown on one corner of each glass panel.

2.9

Laminated Glass

Unless otherwise specified, the laminated clear glass panels shall be 12.68mm laminated clear heat-strengthened glass, consisting of the following composition:  6mm thick clear heat strengthened glass  2 x 0.34mm thick high penetration resistant (HPR) polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer,

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

 6mm thick clear heat strengthened glass. The technical properties of the 12.68 mm thk laminated clear heat-strengthened glass shall be as follows:     2.9

Visible transmission Visible reflection Shading co-efficient U' value

: : : :

82% 8% 0.92 5.5 w/m 2 K

Glazing Without Beads Glass shall be well-bedded and back puttied, and secured with springs (to wood) or glazing clips (to metal). Front putty is to be neatly finished to stop 1.6mm from the sight line of the rebate.

2.10

Glazing With Beads Unless a bedding strip is used, glass shall be well bedded and back puttied. Where bedding strip is specified, this shall be of wash leather, folded around the edge of the glass.

2.11

Proprietary Product

Proprietary glass system where required shall be those as specified and the works shall be carried out strictly to manufacturer’s instruction. 2.12

Mirrors Mirrors shall be 6mm thick and of first quality polished plate glass copper backed mirror as specified with beveled edge all round and shall be fixed with chromium plated dome-headed screws unless otherwise stated.

Mirrors shall be fixed to 6mm thick first grade glass on 10mm thick marine plywood backing supported all round on timber framing. Refer to architectural details for mirrors at toilet areas. 3.0

GLAZING INSTALLATION

3.1

Glazing materials and methods to comply in all respects with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the panel to be glazed for the highest quality installation.

3.2

It is essential that glazing methods allow for expansion and contraction of all components within the system.

3.3

Glazing shall be performed by skilled workmen in accordance with the best trade practices, and without springing or forcing. All instructions from the glass and glazing materials manufacturer shall be followed.

3.4

Tong marks shall be concealed within the stile rebate.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.5

All adjoining surfaces not to receive glazing materials shall be protected against staining or damage of any kind.

3.6

Glazing rebates shall be clean, dry and free of any materials that might adversely affect the bond and seal of the glazing materials or the proper drainage of the rebate

3.7

All glass and glazing materials shall be suitably primed, unless recommended otherwise in writing by the manufacturer and approved by the SO.

3.8

All approved sealant shall match the color of the aluminum framing or glass.

3.9

Setting blocks shall be approved 90 durometer neoprene rubber of the full width of the rebate and not less than 10mm thick and placed at the glass quarter points. They shall be of a length recommended by the glass manufacturer and be placed in such a way as not to interfere with water drainage of the glazing rebate.

3.10

Jamb blocks shall be used on each glass unit supported on four sides. The blocks shall be approved 90 durometer neoprene and shall be placed at the top and bottom of the rebate 3mm clear of the glass edge.

3.11

Face spacers shall be approved 60 durometer neoprene rubber, continuously applied around the perimeter of each glazed opening on both inside and outside faces.

3.12

Approved exposed sealant shall be installed so that top surfaces of the sealant beads are sloped to drain water away from the glass. All exposed sealant surfaces shall be tooled smooth.

3.13

Sealant tapes or ribbons, where used, shall be mitered joints at each corner. Glass shall be centered in each opening to provide the recess and clearances recommended by the glass manufacturer and approved by the SO.

4.0

CARE OF GLASS

4.1

Glass on site shall be stored in a dry, sheltered and well-ventilated location. It shall be stored in racks in a near vertical position with means to secure the glass against wind loading.

4.2

Stacked glass on opened cases containing glass must not be subjected to direct sunlight, because build-up of heat within the stack can give rise to high thermal stress resulting in breakage. Glass shall be inspected periodically for possible moisture damage. On no account should glass be allowed to stand on or lean against materials that might damage the edges.

4.3

During installation and throughout the Contract period, the Contractor shall cover and protect all glass against damage by staining, abrasion, wet cement and breakage, etc.

5.0

COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS

5.1

Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from dust, dirt, fingerprints; scratches, warping, waviness; broken unit, chips or cracks; stains; discoloration or other defects or damage. All damaged and defective panes shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the SO at the Contractor's own cost.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

5.2

Exterior installation shall be airtight and watertight throughout; free from leaks or entry of water, wind or air into or through interior of concealed structure; other than via waterways or provisions for drainage as particularly provided for and approved.

5.3

Each lite or panel shall be set plumb, level, square and accurately positioned to locations required, adjacent like limits accurately aligned.

6.0

WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide warranty for Glazing works for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality of material against abnormal deterioration, leakage of water and air, glass leakage or cracking, delamination of glass, edge separation and staining by sealant.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR IRONMONGERY 1.0

2.0

GENERAL 1.1

The Contractor shall provide ironmongery obtainable from suppliers and to colors and finishes approved by the S.O in accordance with or exceed the bench mark given herein with the brands or systems indicated or other approved equivalent.

1.2

Samples of all ironmongery to be used on the works shall be submitted to the S.O for approval prior to order delivery and installation on the site.

1.3

The Contractor shall coordinate and furnish all hardware templates to the door manufacturer prior to fabrication of all doors and to liaise with door manufacturer and hardware supplier to ensure proper and complete installation.

1.4

Before any electrically controlled or operated hardware is ordered, such as for BAS system, security, fire and safety systems, the Contractor shall coordinate the voltages with the S.O and nominated sub-contractors.

1.5

The Contractor shall liaise with the hardware supplier(s) and all M&E nominated sub-contractors together to ensure the works when completed meet all FSB requirements to the approval of the S.O.

1.6

All hardware items shall be individually and properly packed and labelled with door number, hardware sets, Master-Keying references and location of doors.

1.7

The Contractor shall allow for suitable ironmongeries to manually-operated roller shutters (to be installed next to Staircases on first storey). The cost for such ironmongeries shall be deemed to be included in the overall contract sum.

1.8

All fixing shall be appropriately concealed and supplied with countersunk screws fixing.

1.9

The Contractor is to observe and adhere to the Dos and Don’ts of Ironmongery (including but not limited to storage, installation, protection and usage of ironmongery) prior to handover of the project as required by the S.O. The Contractor is to inform the School of such Dos and Don’ts during the handover of the project, so that the School can also observe, adhere to and do likewise for the installed Ironmongery.

TENDER SUBMITTAL 2.1

The Contractor to check architectural drawings and schedules, and satisfy himself to the quantities and types of ironmongery that is appropriate to the use and location. Based on the information supplied in the tender, Contractor shall submit tender sum for all ironmongeries and related items.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

2.2

3.0

4.0

The Contractor shall submit a hardware list when directed by the S.O identifying each hardware item by manufacturer, manufacturer’s catalogue number and reference.

2.3

The Contractor shall submit hardware schedule(s) and to collate all master key system. Review of the hardware schedule by the S.O does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of ensuring that the master key system is complete and perform well.

2.4

The Contractor shall, when so directed by the S.O submit samples of each and every item of hardware specified.

2.5

All samples shall comply with the specifications.

2.6

The Contractor shall coordinate all mock-ups of door and hardware as required by the S.O.

2.7

All relevant test reports and hardware schedule shall be submitted for the S.O’s approval prior to ordering of hardware items order and commencement of hardware works.

2.8

All hardware for fire rated door shall be manufactured and installed to comply with specifications stipulated under SS332 : 2007 specifications for fire doors. Approved fire test certificates or assessment shall also be submitted.

REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS 3.1

All ironmongery to be fitted onto fire doors shall be approved by FSB/PSB. Certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the FSB/PSB requirements under which the items are specified shall be submitted.

3.2

The Contractor shall comply with the following regulatory requirements and standards : a) Singapore Fire Safety Bureau (FSB) b) PSB Singapore (TUV SUD PSB) c) Code on Barrier–Free Accessibility in Buildings. 2007 d) EN standards (follow listing below) e) Underwriters’ Laboratories , Inc. (UL) Standards f) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) g) West Germany Standards (DIN) PROTECTION OF HARDWARE

The main contractor shall ensure that all installed hardware are well protected from damage during the construction period and to take all precautionary measures against tampering of all doors and hardware. 5.0

INSTALLATION & FIXING OF IRONMONGERY The main contractor shall ensure that rates for fixing of ironmongery shall deemed to

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

include the following: a) b) c) d) e) f) 6.0

Fixing with screws of the same finish as the ironmongery Oiling, easing and adjusting all moving parts Taking off and re-fixing after painting where necessary Leaving in perfect work order Handing over properly labelled keys on completion Cutting, sinking, boring and morticing as required. LOCK-SETS

6.1

Lock-sets shall normally be heavy duty, cylindrical type or mortised type and must be approved by FSB/PSB according to EN 12209. Mortice lock-case shall be operable by most European profile cylinders.

6.2

All lock sets and lever handle trims to be strictly applicable for use in fire doors without any modification required.

6.3

Trim Alignment for lock-body to ensure threaded case and trim aligners properly secure the lock-body on the door centerline. Rigid mounting prevents rocking of the lock-body when loads apply to the door.

6.4

Benchmark a) LT, b) Dorma, c) Briton, or d) Other approved equivalent

7.0

DOOR HANDLES 7.1

All lever handle shall comply to EN1906 & be strictly spring loaded and in Satin Stainless Steel US32D finish.

7.2

Door handles to have clip on or threaded cover / rose with C-clip and through-bolt fixing pins.

7.3

Spindles size to be 8mm square with recess slot for allen screws fixing (based on direct screw fixed on spindle) and compatible with specified lockset, strictly without

any modification. 7.4

Thread on assembly with allen key fix & tightened to spindle with 2 to 3mm depth holes (no slots) for secured fixing.

7.5

Metal adapter & mounting plate

7.6

Allen / shake proof screw for adapter.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

7.7

Handle shall be tightened to adapter or secure with fixing clip instead of directly on spindle.

7.8

All levers /pull handle must be fitted with a solid insert for optimum strength and to withstand very rough handling.

7.9

All levers/pull handle, roses and accessories must be supplied with a bolt through fixing and supplied with a torx head detail to prevent tempering.

7.10 Where required, lever/pull handle, knob, flush handle, panic device and accessories could be inter-mixed for inside/outside to create special function and usage. 7.11

8.0

Benchmark on Handle Design a) LT b) Dorma c) Briton or d) Other approved equivalent

FIVE KNUCKLE FULL MORTISE BALL BEARING HINGE 8.1

Comply to EN 1935 with pins stems in all non-ferrous bearing hinges & stainless steel material.

8.2

Base material must be solid stainless steel. Finish shall be in stain stainless steel.

8.3

Equipped with either Oil-Impregnated Bearing or Ball Bearing.

8.4

All hinges have template screw hole location for use on either wood or hollow metal doors and frames. All hinges shall be supplied with wood screw for timber doors and machine screw for metal doors.

8.5

All full mortice hinges are to be available with security studs for added safety and security.

8.6

To provide minimum 3 nos. hinges for door up to 2150mm high, 4 nos. up to 2450mm high and an additional hinge for every 450mm high thereof or for doors exceeding 1000mm width. 8.7

Benchmark

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

a) b) c) d) 9.0

DOOR CLOSER WITH BACK CHECK OR WITH HOLD OPEN 9.1

10.0

LT Dorma, Hager or Other approved equivalent.

Maximum opening of 180 degree with full hydraulic control.

9.2

All door closer to come with pressure relief valve to prevent over-loading and oil leakage.

9.3

Tested to efficiency rating of closing force in relation to opening force in excess of 60%.

9.4

Adjustable latching force to ensure that the door is properly closed and latched.

9.5

Hold open arm available (optional upon request).

9.6

All door closer shall be supplied with regular or parallel arm as standard.

9.7

All door closer shall comply to EN 1154 and tested with a minimum cyclic test of 1,000,000 cycles for heavy endurance. Certificates of test or compliance to be submitted for S.O approval. The S.O shall reserve the right to request for any door closer cyclic performance test at any time to ensure that the door closer proposed are complied to the requirement specified. There should be no additional cost incurred if such test is needed. Contractor must ensure full compliance to the above cyclic requirement.

9.8

Fully adjustable hydraulic back-check for fire door.

9.9

Fully adjustable hydraulic delayed action (where required) with up to 60 second delay.

9.10

All weather fluid and temperature compensating regulators from 15 degree to + 40 degree Celsius.

9.11

Low friction bearing rack and pinion mechanism

9.12

Benchmark : a) Dorma Close Rite GR150 b) Dorma TS72 series c) Groom GR150 or d) Equal and approved equivalent

FLOOR SPRINGS 10.1 Comply to EN 1154 with Back-check to prevent door from hitting side panel.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

10.2 Pressure relief valve to prevent overloading and oil leakage. 10.3 Applicable for door weight up to 120kg. 10.4 Interchangeable extended spindle from 5mm – 50mm. 10.5 To come with full arrange of offset or center pivot hinge & accessories suitable for aluminium, tempered glass, hollow steel or wood door. 10.6 Maximum opening of 180 degree with hydraulic control. 10.7 Benchmark : a) Dorma BTS Series b) Geze c) Mustad or d) Equal and approved equivalent 11.0

CYLINDERS AND MASTER-KEY SYSTEM 11.1

All cylinders shall comply to EN1303, EN179, EN1125, VdS, SS332:2007, High Classification of Attack Resistance 2, Fire and smoke resistant doors EI30, E30, T30, R30.

11.2 The Cylinder and Keying System shall be of a Tripartite Integrated Security System (TIS) for Cost Efficient and Effective Security. The TIS System consist of three Subsystems: a)

Restricted Profile Keying Suite: Cylinder with Tight Overlapping Profile and Keys with Multiple Ridges, b) High Security Keying Suite: Cylinders that has Double Profile with Side & Control Bar and Hidden Gates Cylinders as well as Keys with Side Notches on Multiple Ridges; c) Electronic Cylinder with i-button technology and IP54 protection for Access Control; d) Combi Key that integrate and access the three Sub-systems ; 11.3 Computerized keying records shall be held by the manufacturer to allow authorized persons to duplicate keys. 11.4 Cylinders shall be made from extruded solid chrome, satin stainless steel or brass, finished to match other ironmongeries and of the correct length to suit individual door thickness. 11.5 Cylinders shall be minimum 5 or 6 pin tumbler type cater to Great Grand Master and Construction Key Combinations.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

11.6 All cylinders supplied must be under Grand Master-Key complete with construction key system. Such system shall be able to link with the optional high security cylinder, removable and interchangeable cylinder and having a capacity for future extension. The Contractor shall produce a key chart in grand master key system for SO’s approval prior to installation. 11.7

Benchmark a) EVVA DPS/ GPI / e-Primo b) ELCA c) CANAAN or d) Equal and approved equivalent

11.8 The Contractor shall liaise with the SO on the requirement of Master-Key System and shall prepare key chart in accordance to the requirements by the SO. The proposed system shall be approved by the SO. 11.9 Ally cylinders supplied shall be of the same manufacturer and have anti-pick protection by specially designed housing mushroom pins. 12.0

13.0

FIRE EXIT DEVICE 12.1

For wooden or hollow metal doors of 1-3/4” thick.

12.2

Supply with wood and machine screws.

12.3

Rim shall be reversible type.

12.4

Chassis shall be made of Nonferrous alloy with Stainless steel cover.

12.5

Latch-bolt shall be stainless steel of ¾” throw.

12.6

Complete with surface mounted strike.

12.7

Complete trim plate, pull handle and cylinder.

12.8

To comply to EN 179 with minimum 200,000 cycles.

12.9

Benchmark: a) Dorma b) ELCA c) Briton or d) Approved equivalent

PULL HANDLES (FOR HANDICAPPED TOILETS AND OTHER FITTINGS) 13.1

All pull handles shall be in satin stainless steel finish and for use in fire door

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

application. 13.2

Conform to PSA standards for High Duty.

13.3 With pull handles, door stops signage and matching accessories of same material and color. 13.4

14.0

Benchmark a) LT b) Trident c) Dorma or d) Equal and approved equivalent.

FLUSH BOLT / EXTENSION BOLT / AUTO FLUSH BOLT 14.1 All flush bolt shall comply to EN 12051 & be of conceal type lever action in satin stainless steel. Length of flush bolt 200mm and 300mm for timber doors. 14.2 Extension flush bolt lever-action type in stain chrome. Length of extension rod shall be available from 300, 450 & 100mm for Metal/Aluminium doors. 14.3 Dust proof socket use shall be of spring type. Dust proof socket cover must be able to remove for maintenance.

15.0

14.4

Auto flush bolt will be required for door with panic function.

14.5

Benchmark a) LT b) Trident c) Dorma or d) Equal and approved equivalent.

DOOR SELECTOR 15.1 Door selector shall be non-handed. For frame fixing with integral telescopic shock absorber. 15.2

Adjustable screws for tolerance compensation when installed.

15.3

Stainless Steel and approved to use for fire door.

15.4

Benchmark a) LT b) Trident c) Dorma or d) Equal and approved equivalent.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

16.0

ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCK/HOLDER 16.1 The electromagnetic lock shall be highly reliable, Low Power Consumption long life and high holding force of minimum 700lbs. 16.2 The electromagnetic lock shall have positive locking and unlocking without residual magnetism or moving parts that might stick, jam bind, wear out and need replacement. 16.3 The electromagnetic lock shall be suitable for single or double leaf swing doors. For double leaf doors, two locks shall be provided. 16.4 The electromagnetic locks shall be contained, completely factory wired, fully concealed and tamper resistant with only external wire connections. 16.5

17.0

Benchmark a) LT b) Canaan c) ELCA or d) Equal and approved equivalent.

ACOUSTIC DOOR SEAL 17.1 Acoustic door seal shall be provided to rooms like generator Room, Function Room and cinema (if applicable). 17.2 Acoustic door seal shall seal automatically with delayed action when door closer and seal shall retract automatically when door opens. 17.3

Acoustic door seal shall have the following properties and features: a) Sounding and flame proof with non flammable silicone profile. b) Additional internal seal for increase smoke proofing. c) Flexible silicone material with cavity lip profile. d) Actuator has to be in a unique asymmetric design for a smoother operation on hinge or lock side controlled actuation.

e) f)

Fixing can be grooved or recessed. The Aluminium profile casing and actuator are made of temperature resistant materials. g) Must not be dragging along the floor when the sealing profile is raised and lowered. h) Closed cell TPE Foam Structure with outer resistant skin/Sheath. i) Extremely low water absorption.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

j) 17.4

18.0

19.0

20.0

21.0

Compression set resistance.

Minimum Benchmark a) K.N. Crowder b) Pemko c) Raven, or d) Other approved equivalent.

WEATHER SEAL 18.1

Weather seals shall be provided to all external doors.

18.2

Minimum Benchmark a) K.N. Crowder b) Pemko c) Raven, or d) Other approved equivalent.

DOOR STOPS AND OTHER ACCESSORIES 19.1

To be in satin stainless steel finish.

19.2

To provide suitable matching fixings with all or floor anchors. Mild steel bolt or equivalent to be used.

19.3

Minimum Benchmark a) LT b) Canaan c) Trident or d) Other approved equivalent.

SLIDING DOOR GEAR 20.1

Weather seals shall be provided to all external doors.

20.2

Minimum Benchmark a) K.N. Crowder b) Henderson c) Canaan, or d) Other approved equivalent.

EXIT CONTROLLER 21.1

Exit Controller shall be provided to all doors that require restricted exit.

21.2

Minimum Benchmark a) EVVA b) ELCA c) Canaan, or d) Other approved equivalent.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

22.0

EYE VIEWER 22.1 Eye Viewer shall have minimum of 180 degree angle of vision. Eye Viewer for Fire Door shall have glass lenses. Finishes shall match other ironmongery used. 22.2

Minimum Benchmark a) LT b) ELCA c) Canaan, or d) Other approved equivalent.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) ROOM AND SERVER ROOM 1.0

2.0

GENERAL 1.1

This specification relates to the construction and ins tallation of materials and fitments to accommodate Local Area Network (LAN) Room and Server Room within the School premises.

1.2

Contractor to note requirements in Tender Drawings and Specifications, and comply to current Codes and Regulations relating to LAN and Server Rooms for Schools. This specification is to be read in conjunction with the M&E specifications.

1.3

The maximum weight allowed in the LAN Room is 1500 kg. The maximum weight allowed in the Server Room is 1,800kg.

1.4

All openings penetrating the LAN Room and Server Room are to be sealed and air-tight.

MATERIALS 2.1

Floor a)

To be finished with thick heavy-duty antistatic vinyl material. Below the vinyl material there is a layer of vapour barrier to ensure LAN Room and Server Room are water-tight.

b)

Joints of anti-static vinyl material to be welded neatly and firmly, to create a smooth surface, without lumps or unevenness.

c)

There is a 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening. Vapour barrier and anti-static vinyl materials are to turn up and cover this concrete kerb.

2.2

Skirting To be same material as floor, to be rolled up to 100mm high fixed tight and without gaps to walls. Joints to be welded neatly and firmly.

2.3

Wall a)

2.4

b)

The brick layer to be of minimum 100 mm thick solid brick construction, plastered smooth on inner surface to receive the secondary wall panel.

c)

On the inner surface of the LAN and Server Room, to add another layer comprising 75mm thick insulation and 12 mm thick calcium silicate board. The boards to be plastered and painted with emulsion paint.

Ceiling a) Contractor to note that on the soffit of rc slab, there will be skim coat plaster. On this will be fixed a layer comprising 75mm thick fibreglass insulation and 12 mm thick calcium silicate board. The boards to be plastered and painted with emulsion paint. b)

2.5

Contractor to note that wall comprises two layers – outer layer is brick material and inner layer comprises insulated panels.

The double layers at wall and ceiling to allow for bracket fixings to support light and air-condition fan coil units, electrical power points and switches.

Door and Door Frame a) Doors to be one hour fire rated, air-tight solid timber door with jimmy-proof lock.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

b)

2.6

3.0

Door frame to be of mild steel casing with cement grouting infill to frame, and finished with metal paint.

Grounding strip Contractor to note that this strip is to be installed and located at the same level and near to the power points.

FITMENTS 3.1

3.2

Equipment rack and network trunking a) For LAN Room There will be three (3) racks of size 0.8m x 0.6m x 2.2m to be installed within the LAN Room. This will be done by others and not in this contract. b)

For Server Room There will be five (5) racks of size 0.8m x 0.6m x 2.2m to be installed within the Server Room. This will be done by others and not in this contract.

c)

For both LAN and Server Rooms, network trunking will be sited on the floor and linked to the rack. This will be done by others and not in this contract. However, Main Contractor to provide opening through wall for IT Contractor to install the network trunking.

Power points a) For LAN Room: There is to be four (4) numbers twin-gang for computer, two (2) numbers single gang for FCU, and one (1) number single gang for PLC to be installed in this contract. Contractor to note and comply. The switches and power points are to be installed slightly protruding from the insulated walls. b)

3.3

4.0

For Server Room There is to be five (5) numbers twin-gang for computer, four (4) numbers single gang for FCU, and one (1) number single gang for PLC to be installed in this contract. Contractor to note and comply. The switches and power points are to be installed slightly protruding from the insulated walls. Telephone Points Contractor to supply and install two (2) numbers telephone points for Server Room.

3.4

Distribution Board (DB) The DB will be wall mounted at 1.8m from finished floor level. Contractor to note and comply.

3.5

Light fittings Contractor to supply and install appropriate light fittings on walls of the LAN and Server Rooms. Lighting level of 500 lux is to be provided. The light fittings are to be mounted 1.8m from finished floor level.

3.6

Air-conditioning Contractor to provide appropriate air-conditioning unit for the LAN and Server Rooms, to provide 24 hours air-conditioning. There will be two (2) fan coil units in LAN Room and four (4) fan coil units in Server Room. The fan coil units are to be mounted 2.2m from finished floor level.

3.7

Heat and Smoke Detector Contractor to provide appropriate heat and smoke detectors to LAN and Server Rooms.

PREPARATION 4.1

Ensure floor, walls soffit of slab to be dry, clean, without cracks and ready for installing finished materials.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

4.2

5.0

6.0

7.0

Brick wall to be plastered smooth and left to dry for at least 48 hours.

INSTALLATION 5.1

Waterproofing to be applied to floor and upturn 300mm high, and cover the 100mm high concrete kerb at door.

5.2

Insulated walls and ceiling to be neatly joined and fixed to brick wall.

5.3

Cut openings and brackets for power points and switches to be neatly cut. Upon completion of installation of power points, switches and air-condition units, Contractor is to seal up any gaps on walls and ceiling.

5.4

Contractor to supply and install suitable support brackets or metal casing for wall lightfittings, air-conditioning units, power points etc.

TESTING 6.1

Operate air-conditioner for at least 24 hours continually, when interior finishes and fitments are completed. Contractor to check for controlled room temperatures, any leaks in walls and ceilings, any condensation in walls, floor and doors.

6.2

Arrange for MOE IT Department to inspect and take over the LAN and Server Rooms.

DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (DLP) Contractor to rectify any defects (for works covered in this contract) found in the LAN and Server Rooms during the DLP.

8.0

COMPLETION Contractor is to submit testing forms (indicating checked and signed items), Operations and Maintenance Manual and as-built drawings at completion of contract.

9.0

WARRANTY Contractor is to provide warranty for the vapour barrier of five (5) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works, for the proper segregation of any moisture from ground to the LAN / Server Rooms.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR LANDSCAPE PART 1 – PLANTING WORK 1.0

S C O P E O F WO R K 1.1

This specification concerns the external landscape around the new teaching block / Indoor Sports Hall (ISH). It covers the turfing next to site boundary, and softscape around the new teaching block / ISH. This specification is to be read in conjunction with the Specification for External Works, with Annexures, and Tender Drawings.

1.2

Provide plantings for the landscape areas as shown on the landscape drawings with plants in a healthy, vigorous growing condition. All works indicated on the drawings by notes shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in this Specification. Any items not specifically shown on the landscape drawings or specified, but normally required to conform with such intent, are considered as part of the landscape works (hereinafter referred to as "Works"). The S.O reserves the right to make held adjustments and reasonable substitutions to insure implementation of the landscape concept in relation to field conditions.

1.3 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i)

The Works includes but is not limited to the following: plant acquisition and supply erosion control clearing and grubbing imported screened soil and backfill pre-planting weed control soil preparation and fine grading/mounding planting operations on the landscape areas landscape maintenance supervision warranty

1.4.

The main purpose of this Specification is to insure the acquisition and installation of healthy plant materials of the highest quality in the quantity desired specifically for this project:

1.5

Plant Acquisition Work Locate, purchase and transport plant materials specified herein to the project site.

1.6

Substitution 1.6.1

If any plant specified is not obtainable, submit a written substitution request to the SO at least three (3) months prior to commencement of site work. This request may present either a different size of the same species or a similar alternate species with the proposed adjustments to the contract price for each.

1.6.2. Substitution(s) of plant material will not be permitted unless authorised in writing by the SO. 1.7

Construction Schedule Upon award of contract, provide the SO a written projected planting schedule

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

noting the estimated completion date, number of working days required and any special coordination requirements. This planting schedule can be incorporated into the overall master programme/schedule for this project.

1.8

Selection, Tagging and Ordering Plant Materials 181

Submit a request for inspection and documentation to the SO at least one (1) month prior to commencement of site work under this section that all plant material has been ordered.

1 8 2 Plants shall be subject to inspection and rejection by the SO at place of growth and after delivery for conformance with specifications. All plants not conforming to specification will be rejected, 183 1.9

Plants identified as specimen, field grown. field stock, and all palms will be inspected at place of growth by the SO.

Imported Screened Soil 1.9.1 Upon award of contract, furnish the source of imported screened soil to the SO for approval.

2.0

1.9.2

Take representative soil samples from the proposed source area. Submit samples to a recognised laboratory for analysis for required fertilisers, pH and salinity of soil. Test report to be submitted three (3) months upon award of contract.

1.9.3

Submit test results and schedule of fertilisers to the SO for review, A change of the specified fertilisers may be issued based on the soil analysis results.

1.9.4

Include costs of labours and equipment required to clear, place, amend and fine grade the soil.

JOB CONDITIONS 2.1

Meet on Site Prior to commencement of site work, meet with the SO and all other concerned parties on the site to review the works under this section. Request this meeting in writing one (1) week prior to desired meeting time.

2.2

Underground Utilities and Obstructions Ascertain the exact location of all underground utilities and other obstructions at the site that may affect the works. Any services and obstructions encountered shall be reported to the SO. Protect, uphold and maintain all services during the execution of works. Repair all damages to any known services or other underground obstruction at the Contractor’s expense, whether accidental or otherwise. Report damages to any services to the SO.

2.3

Hoisting The Contractor shall provide the necessary hoisting facilities for his tools.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

equipment, material and to remove such facilities after completion and make good all works disturbed. 2.4

Access The Contractor shall make provisions for access to landscape areas and remove such access facilities on Completion of works.

2.5

Protection

2.6

2.5.1

Provide necessary safeguards and exercise caution against injury or defacement of existing site improvements. Prevent vehicles of any kind from passing over sidewalk. kerbs, etc., unless adequate protection is provided.

2.5.2

Be responsible for any damage resulting from planting operation. Repair all damages to return the area to the previous condition at the Contractor's expense.

Clean Up Keep air areas of works clean, neat and orderly at all times during the period of the contract. Clean all areas at the end of each day.

2.7

Samples and Tests The SO reserves the right to take and evaluate samples of materials for Conformity to specifications at any time, Furnish samples upon request by the SO. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site at the Contractor’s expense.

3.0

MAINTENANCE PERIOD 3.1

General Maintain all plants and planted areas in optimum growing condition and appearance.

3.2

Duration Maintenance, as specified in Item 14.0 of Part 3 in this Specification "Landscape Maintenance'', shall Continue one (1) full calendar year or three hundred and sixty five (365) days after practical completion of the landscape planting work or until the approval of the final inspection. Care of plant material during installation is not considered part of the formal maintenance period.

3.3

Plant Material 3.3.1

Plant material that is considered to be: a) dead or dying and not in a vigorous thriving condition; b) improperly installed; or c) in a defective, unsound or diseased condition: shall be replaced immediately by a plant of the same species and size as originally planted.

3.3.2

The expense of replacement of plant material during the maintenance period shall be borne by the Contractor.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.3.3

3.4

If all or certain portions of the works completed pre not acceptable under the terms and intent of the drawings and specifications, the formal maintenance period for the unacceptable works and any related items shall be extended at no cost to the Client until the defects in the works have been corrected and the rectified works are accepted by the SO and the Client.

Pre-Maintenance Inspection and Final Inspection 3.4.1

At the completion of planting operation and prior to the beginning of the formal maintenance period, the Pre-Maintenance Inspection shall be held. At the completion of the formal maintenance period, the Final Inspection shall be held.

3.4.2

Request these inspections by the SO in writing one (1) week prior to the Completion of landscape planting work in order that a mutually agreeable time for inspection may be arranged.

3.4.3

The SO, Client and Contractor or representatives, shall be present at the inspection.

3 .4.4

At the time of inspection, the Contractor shall have all the landscape areas under the contract free of weeds, dead leaves and trash, neatly cultivated and raked. All stakes and plant basins shall be in good order. At the final inspection, lawns shall be neatly cut and all clippings removed.

their

authorised

3.4. 5 If, after the Pre-Maintenance Inspection, the SO and the Owner are of the opinion that all works have been performed in accordance with the drawings, specifications, and as per authorised field adjustments, the S.O will give the Contractor a written notice of preliminary acceptance, noting any items which must be corrected. 3.4.6

4.0

If, after the Final Inspection, the SO and Client are of the opinion that the landscape planting work has been performed in accordance with the drawings and Specifications, a written notice of acceptance and completion of landscape planting work will be given, After final acceptance has been given, the warranty period of twelve (12) months shall commence.

WAR R AN T Y 4.1

Plant Material 4.1.1

Plant material furnished or relocated shall be warranted, for a period of one (1) year from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty shall cover against improper installation, defective, unsound or diseased conditions that may appear.

4.1.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the SO of the death of any plant materials during the warranty period, the subject plant materials shall be promptly replaced with same species as originally planted, and shall be of similar size as if normal growth had occurred since the original

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

planting. Replacement shall be subject to all requirements of the specifications.

4.2

4.1.3

When plants are replaced, advise the SO in writing, of the necessary establishment maintenance which must be performed. If this information is not provided, the Contractor will be liable for total cost of replacement should the replaced plant die.

4.1.4

The Contractor shall not be held liable for loss of plant materials after the expiry of Formal Maintenance Period due to lack of care, and due to vandalism, acts of God, or accident.

Liability The liability under the warranty shall include the repair of damage to the Client's property caused by the failure of works performed under this section. All of the provisions of this section apply to works performed to satisfy the requirements of the warranty.

5.0

APPLICABLE CO DES & ST ANDARDS 5.1

The following codes and standards serve as a guide to the minimum quality acceptable for materials, products and workmanship.

5.2

The Contractor may propose alternative codes and standards, provided the Landscape Contractor can demonstrate that the minimum quality for materials, products and workmanship will not be reduced and they are submitted to the SO for his review and approval in advance of their use.

5.3

ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials C33 BS BS

- Specification for concrete aggregates - British Standards Institution - British Standards - Recommendations for General Landscape Operations (excluding hard surfaces) - Peat

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

PART 2 - LANDSCAPE PRODUCTS 1.0

GROWING MEDIA 1.1

Imported Screened Soil 1.1.1

Natural, fertile, friable soil free from stones, noxious seeds, weeds, roots, and subsoil in any quantity with a clay content not exceeding 30 percent by weight and having a pH of 5.5 - 6.5. Provide soil analysis test results and soil sample for approval by the SO.

1.1.2

Soil analysis test results are to determine the values of pH, texture as well as contents of nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium and magnesium.

1.2

In-Ground Planting Backfill Mix The backfill mix for in-ground plantings of trees, palms and shrubs shall consist of the following: a) 2 parts of imported screened soil b) 1 part of cocopeat or peat moss c) 1 part of coarse river sand (no salty material) d) 10 lbs/cu yd. Slow release Mag Amp 7-40-6 Fertilizer (coarse granule) Mix thoroughly before placing in the planting pit. 1.3

1.4

2.0

3.0

Planter Mix Quality Required: 1.3.1

It shall be free from heavy clay or coarse Sand, stones, lumps, other vegetation, roots, sticks and other foreign materials.

1.3.2

All shall be of the same composition and structure throughout.

1.3.3

All shall not be delivered, handled, or placed in a muddy condition.

Removal of Excavated Material: Do not re-use excavated site material in backfill mix. Deposit all excavated material at location(s) as approved by the Client for removal.

FERTILISER 2.1

N-P-K as recommended by soil analysis. uniform in composition, free-flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment, delivered to the site in un-opened containers, each fully labelled, conforming to the applicable fertiliser laws, and bearing the name or mark of the manufacturer.

2.2

Plant Tablet: “Agriform 21" gram tablet or equivalent as recommended by the Contractor, subject to the SO’s approval

2.3

Manure : Well rotted poultry manure or as approved

MULCH 3.1

Peatmoss or approved organic equivalent free from soluble salts and with a pH of 5.0 - 7.0.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.2 4.0

Provide 25mm layer over all landscape areas except turf.

PRE-PLANT ING HERBICIDE “Round up” or equivalent as recommended by the Landscape Contractor, subject to the SO’s approval.

5.0

PRE-EMERGENT WEED CONTROL "Rontar-G, “Treflan”, “Eptam”, “Vegitex” or equivalent as recommended by the Landscape Contractor, subject to the SO’s approval.

6.0

PLANT MATERIAL 6.1

Quantities Provide sufficient quantities of plant materials needed to Complete the works as shown on the drawings. Quantities indicated on the drawings are approximate only and are provided for the convenience of the Contractor.

6.2

Nomenclature Names of plants shall conform with names generally accepted in the local nursery trade, and as interpreted by the SO, In all cases of dispute, the decision of the SO shall be final.

6.3

Condition 6.3.1

All trees, palms, shrubs, vines, and groundcovers shall have a normal habit of growth and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect infestations,

6.3.2

The minimum acceptable size of all trees, palms and shrubs measured after pruning, with branches in normal positions, shall conform to the measurements specified on the plant list.

6.3.3

Calliper measurement shall be taken at a point on the trunk 1.0 meter above natural ground line for trees with 100rnm in calliper and above.

6.3.4

Plants that meet the measurements specified, but do not possess a normal configuration or balance of height and spread will be rejected.

6.3.5

Trees, palms and shrubs larger in size than specified may be used subject to SO’s approval, but the use of larger plant materials will make no change in the contract price. Height shall not be submitted for balanced form.

6.3.6

Trees, palms and shrubs shall have sufficient roots to hold the root ball together after removal from container/bags without being rootbound.

6.3.7

Specimen, field grown and field stock trees and palms shall have a root ball of sufficient size to support the plant’s recovery from transplanting.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Trees/palms delivered with small or inadequate root balls will be rejected. In all cases, the decision of the SO shall be final. 6.3.8

All large and 'specimen' trees/palms shall be transplanted from growing site by mechanical crane and planted at site by mechanical crane. Manual labour shall not be used.

6 3.9

Any tree, palm or shrub w i th a weak, thin trunk not capable of supporting itself when planted in the open will be rejected.

6.3.10 Trees and palms will be straight and of uniform shape without damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders, unless specified. Trees and palms with abrasions of the bark, sunscalds. disfiguring knots, or fresh cuts of limbs over 12mm which have not been pruned and painted or completely callused, will be rejected. 6.3.11 Rooted cuttings shall be healthy, vegetative material with well established roots at one or more nodes. 6.3.12 Turf plugs shall be 100mm in diameter, neatly trimmed, with minimum 75% of the root system intact. 7.0

SAND Sand shall be clean, course angular, well grained river sand free from soluble salts for the landscape planting work.

8.0

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS The Contractor shall allow for the following list of materials in the rates for materials in the BQ: 8.1

W ood Tree Stakes; 50m m x 50m m x 2500m m rough construction grade hardwood with no paint or stain. Bamboo may be substituted subject to the SO’s approval. Only clean, new timber shall be used.

8.2

Hose and Wire Ties: (12mm) diameter rubber hose with #12 galvanized iron wire.

8.3

Guy Wire; No 12 galvanised iron for large potted trees, No 9 galvanised iron for field grown trees

8.4

Rebar: No. 4 600mm minimum length for large potted trees. No. 7, 1000rnm minimum length for large field grown trees.

8.5

Marker: Plastic surveyor tape. Bright colour, minimum 500mm long. Use same colour throughout project.

8.6

Tree Paint: “Cabot" tree seal or equal.

8.7

Header: "Cobra" polyethylene lawn and garden edging with anchors.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

9.0

8.8

Protective Fence: 50mm x 50mm x 1800mm hardwork post set in ground 600mm. Post spacing at 1500mm centres with three (3) rows of approved ropes passing through each other.

8.9

Erosion Control Mat: Honey comb, tri-dimensional structure equivalent to 'Geoweb laid to manufacturer's instruction.

SUB-SOIL DRAINAGE 9.1

Coarse washed river sand.

9.2

Aggregates/fine crashed rocks 25 - 40mm diameter

10.0 POLYM ERIC M AT ERIAL 'Aquasorb' or equivalent to be approved by the SO. The polymeric material is to be used manufacturer's specifications. Price for polymeric material shall be allowed for in the rates for plant material.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

PART 3 – LANDSCAPE EXECUTION 1.0 CLEARING 1.1 Clear all landscape areas of existing vegetation not specified to remain and all other debris and foreign material considered a hindrance to planting operations and/or unsightly in appearance. The Contractor shall be responsible to check and verify all plants specified to be removed.

2.0

3.0

1.2

Maintain previously established grades and swales (finish graded areas only), unless otherwise stated.

1.3

Arrange to have all cleared material moved to areas on site as directed by the SO.

PRE-PLANTING WEED CONTROL & EXISTING PLANT PROTECTION 2.1

Apply pre-planting herbicide to all visible weeds, before and soil placement.

2.2

Protect all existing plants specified to remain from damage. The Contractor is to propose method of protection.

IN-GROUND PLANTING BACKFILL MIX 3.1

4.0

5.0

Provide the following minimum depths of in ground planting backfill soil mix: a) all tree/palm plantings - minimum 900mm depth b) all shrub plantings - minimum 300mm depth c) all groundcover areas - minimum 300mm depth c) all turfed areas - minimum 100mm depth

SOIL PREPARATION 4.1

Uniformly distribute organic soil conditioner and the fertiliser specified by the soil analysis over all landscape areas.

4.2

Manually till the top 150mm of all landscape areas to evenly incorporate the amendments into the soil.

FINE GRADING AND MOUNDING 5.1

Adjust finish grading with imported screened soil as necessary. Grades shall be smooth and even on a uniform plane without abrupt changes or pockets, and shall slope away from all buildings. Verify the surface drainage of all landscape areas, and notify the SO of any discrepancies, obstructions, or other conditions considered detrimental to proper execution of the Work.

5.2

The Contractor is responsible for the creation of rough earth profile as well as the final smoothing of mounds as specified.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

53

All works shall be tied to existing conditions and controls such as existing trees and landscape features, utility lines. pavement and kerbs etc. Finished grades shall bear proper relationship to such controls. Adjust all new works as necessary to meet the conditions and fulfil the intention of the drawings.

5.4

After initial settlement the finish grade shall be lower than adjacent walks, kerbs, and headers: a) Turfed Area: 15mm - 20mm b) Shrubs and Groundcovers 25mm - 50mm

5.5

6.0

7.0

Immediately prior to planting operations, all landscape areas shall be cleaned of weeds, debris, rocks over 25mm in diameter, and clumps of earth that will not break up easily.

SOIL AND DRAINAGE CONDITIONS 6.1

Notify the S.O in writing of all soil or drainage conditions encountered during planting operations which the Contractor considers detrimental to growth of plant material. Include a cost proposal for the correction of the problem for approval before proceeding with the site work.

6.2

If drainage conditions of plant pits appear unsatisfactory, test drainage by filling with water. Conditions permitting the retention of water in planting pit for an excessive period of time shall be brought to the attention of the SO.

PLANTING OPERATIONS FOR IN-GROUND PLANTING 7.1

Delivery, Handling and Storage of Plants 7.1.1 Plants shall be packed, transported and stored with utmost care to ensure protection against injury. Do not prune prior to installation except for removal of dead or dying plants. Do not bend or bind-tie plant material in a manner which will cause damage or destroy natural shape. Tie palm fronds to prevent breakage before loading. 7.1.2

If trees are not in a dormant state, spray with anti-desiccant to cover foliage as recommended by the manufacturer, prior to shipping plants.

7.1.3

During shipment, protect plants with suitable coverings to prevent excessive drying from sun and wind. Special protection is to be provided for acclimatised plants.

7.1.4

Deliver plant material after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected. and adequately watered.

7.1.5

All specimen, field grown and field stock trees/palms be planted the same day they are delivered to the site.

7.1.6

All specimen plants and palms over 2.0m trunk height shall be transplanted with a mechanical crane. Manual labour shall not be

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

used.

7.2

Plant Pits 7.2.1 All trees, palms and shrubs shall be installed in pits with vertical sides.

7.3

Setting Container and Larger Plants 7 3.1 Location of trees, palms, shrubs and shrub beds are to be staked out on site by Contractor for review by the SO prior to execution of work. The Contractor shall inform the SO one (1) week in advance of inspection of staking-out. 7 3.2

Plants shall be centred and set on the appropriate compacted backfill mix that has been puddle and settled.

7.3.3

Plants shall be set with the soil level even with the finish grade and planted to give the best appearance in relationship to adjacent structures or surroundings.

7.3.4

Use appropriate backfill mix to continue filling plant pits. Set plant plumb and brace rigidly in position until backfill mix has been tamped solidly around root ball. When 3/4 of the pit is backfilled, water thoroughly, saturating the rootball.

7.3.5

Evenly distribute planting tables per manufacturer’s instructions. Continue filling pit to finish grade with backfill mix.

7.3.6 When the plant is filled, place 300mm wide plyboard strip with stakes around rootball. 7.3.7 Water all plants immediately after planting.

8.0

9.0

7.4

Mulch After completion of planting operation, provide 25mm thick peat-moss or approved equivalent mulch to alt planting pits and beds, except turf areas.

7.5

Guying & Staking Immediately after planting, stake all 2000mm (trunk height) tall and smaller trees and palms. Guy all larger trees and palms.

GROUNDCOVERS 8.1

Location of groundcovers are to be staked out on site by the Contractor for review by the SO prior to execution of the site work. The Contractor shall inform the SO one (1) week in advance of inspection of staking-out.

8.2

Install plant material in moist soil in the landscape areas in neat rows, insuring complete coverage of all landscape areas including under and around trees and shrubs.

CLOSE TURFING/SODDING

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

11.0

9.1

Lay sod as soon as possible after delivery to prevent deterioration.

9.2

On the prepared planting surface, fertilised and moistened, lay sod butt-joint together with no open joints visible, and pieces not overlapped. Lay smooth and flush with adjoining grass areas, paving and top surfaces of kerbs.

9.3

On slopes 2:1 and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with wooden pegs at maximum 600mm on centre. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod.

9.4

Immediately water sodden areas after installation. Water in sufficient amounts to saturate sod and upper 100mm of soil.

9.5

After sod and soil has dried sufficiently to prevent damage, roll sodden areas to ensure good bond between sod and soil and to remove minor depressions and irregularities.

PRE-EMERGENT WEED CONTROL Immediately after planting, apply pre-emergent weed control materials to all planted areas which will not be seeded.

1 1 . 0 T R E E T R AN S P L AN T I N G 1 1 . 1 General Do not move trees/palms until pruning has been completed and new plant holes have been properly excavated and prepared to receive the trees/palms. 11.2

Plant Holes After excavation to the proper depth, loosen soil in the bottom of each hole to a depth of 300mm.

11.3

Pruning Remove the secondary branches/fronds in an appropriate way as to preserve the natural character of the tree/palm. Use clean. sharp tools. Make cuts smoothly with no tearing or ripping of the bark. Treat all cut surfaces of 25mm diameter and larger with wound dressing. Remove all dead and broken branches/fronds. Trim all aerial roots for trees.

11.4 Trimming All tree trimming shall be approved by the S.O prior to trimming if requested. 11.5 Balling Prepare ball of soil at roots to be removed with each tree, Unless otherwise directed by the SO, the size of rootbalts shall be as following guides: Tree/Palm Height 1.5 - 2m height 2 - 3m height 3 - 4m height

Transplanted Rootball Size 1.2m dia. & above 1.8m dia. & above 2.5m dia. & above

Prune roots bruised or broken by excavation with a clean cut as soon as

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

practicable after exposing. Coat cut sections of exposed roots with a moist paste of a standard hormone for stimulation of new root growth. Wrap ball with burlap covering and secure with wire or twine. 11.6 Removal Remove each tree with its wrapped root ball. Carefully move to its new location. 11.7 Replanting Replant with care and in accordance with standard nursery practices. 1 1 . 8 Planting Backfill Use 'In-Ground Planting Backfill Mix' as specified for backfilling plant hole. 11.9 Soil Conditioner Spread 5 pounds of specified soil conditioner uniformly over the bottom of each plant hole. 11.10 Backfill each plant hole by placing prepared soil in layers around the root ball. Tamp each layer in place in manner to avoid injury to either roots or ball and without displacing position of the tree/palm. 11.11 At the middle layer, place six (6) fertiliser tablets equally spaced around each tree. 11.12 When three quarters of the backfill has been placed, fill hole with water and allow soil to settle around roots. Complete backfilling. 11.13 For each tree/palm of 2000mm (trunk height) tail and below, install at least three (3) stakes spaced equally and anchored into the ground to a minimum depth of 400rnm and at least 500mm away from the tree/palm trunk, immediately after planting. 11.14 Secure stakes to tree/palm trunk with tree ring or approved rubber hose. 11.15 For each tree/palm exceeding 2000mm (trunk height) tall, install at least three (3) guys spaced equally around each tree/palm as detailed, immediately after planting. 11.16 Encase each guy wire in a resilient tree tie and attach to tree trunk or crown at an angle of approximately 60 degrees, at about 2/5 the height of the tree/palm. 11.17 Anchor guys to notched stakes. Drive stakes into the ground angled away from the tree/palm. Drive tops of stakes at least 300mm below the surface of the ground. 11.18 Tighten each guy with its turnbuckle. Keep guys taut. 11.19 Attach flag strips on each guy at 900mm intervals, covering 213 of the guy wire. 12.0

PALM WAT ERING COLLAR The Contractor shall install watering collar with 15mm thick, 300mm wide timber plank as specified as soon as the palm is planted.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

13.0

PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING PALM/TREE 13.1

The Contractor shall protect existing tree/palm specified to remain.

13.2 Standard maintenance as specified in Item 14.0 in this specification shall apply to these existing tree/palm under protection. 14.0

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 14.1 The Contractor shall maintain completed landscape planting work for a period of twelve (12) months immediately after the date certified by the SO. The maintenance work shall include, but is not limited to: 14.1.1

Protect areas susceptible to traffic by erecting barricades immediately after planting.

14.1.2

Irrigate landscape areas as required to insure active growth keeping areas moist but not saturated. Regulate irrigation as necessary to avoid erosion and gullying.

14.1.3

Fertilise as needed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and one (1) week prior to final inspection. Exercise proper caution and take measures necessary to avoid plant burn.

14.1.4 Keep landscape areas free of weeds and undesirable grasses through daily weeding, if required. Remove the entire root system of all weeds. Dispose of all weeds in appropriate trash containers. All nutgrass shall be manually removed before flowering. 14.1.5 Inspect all plants, including lawn, for disease or insect damage weekly. Treat unaffected. 14.1 6 Remove damaged or diseased growth from trees and shrubs. Treat cuts larger than 12mm diameter with specified tree paint. 14.1.7 Immediately remove any dead or dying plants not in a vigorous thriving condition. Replacement shall be the same species and size as originally planted. 14.1.8 Repair guys and reset, re-stake and tighten to proper grades or upright position any plants that are not in their proper growing position. 14.1.9 Mow lawn to a 20mm height whenever the average height exceeds 30mm, Remove clippings. 14.1.10 As it becomes evident that certain lawns and groundcovers have not uniformly or properly established, replant the areas immediately with the same plants and quantity as specified for the initial planting and maintain as specified for 90% coverage of healthy, actively growing grass and groundcovers for approval during the Final Inspection. 14.1.11 Trim all trees and shrubs as directed by S.O to establish desired form,

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

habit and appearance. 14.1.12 Maintain records of maintenance procedures including manpower, description of tasks, fertilisers seed, irrigation etc., submit copies of maintenance records to S.O. upon request and to the Owner upon completion of formal maintenance period. 14.2

15.0

Routine Maintenance Work Contractor to refer to External Works Specs relating to Landscaping and School Field for the expected maintenance work schedule.

RESTORATION The Contractor is responsible for the use of all materials, labour and equipment. and any injury to plant material caused by Such material, labour and equipment shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

PART 4 – TREE PALM ACQUISITION PROGRAMME 1.0

PURPOSE To acquire trees/palms either locally or imported for the purpose of installation as a major landscape feature.

2.0

LOCAL SOURCE Trees/palms as specified in size and characteristics are to be located and secured in Singapore no later than three (3) months upon award of contract. If this is unsuccessful, the Contractor will be responsible for the importation of trees/palms from outside countries. Imported trees/palms will be treated as a "substitution".

3.0

IMPORT OF TREES AND PALMS Plants may be imported from foreign countries if not available locally. Source shall be approved by the SO. The Contractor shall meet all necessary cost and documentation requirements through custom and quarantine in order to obtain the plants.

4.0

4.3

SELECTION AND APPROVAL 4.1

All trees and palms shall be sourced and selected to the approval of the S.O no later than three (3) months upon award of contract.

4.2

The Contractor shall submit in writing the source of all plant materials specified, including the suppliers company name, contact person's name, mailing address, telephone, facsimile, for written approval by the SO prior to plant acquisition.

Approval of all trees and palms shall be done by photographs submitted to the SO. The colour photos.shall be 3R size, with a scaled marker or standing person beside the plant for scale. Failing this, a visual inspection shall be arranged with the SO. Photographic approval shall not restrict the SO’s right to reject plants for any defects not evidenced in the photo.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

PART 5 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1,0

2.0

NURSERY OPERATIONS CENTRE 1.1

The Contractor shall have a plant nursery operations centre necessary for plant storage, propagation and acclimation to ultimately furnish the required plant materials of the type, size and condition specified.

1.2

The nursery shall be operational three (3) months after award of contract and throughout the duration of the contract.

NURSERY LOCATION The Contractor is required to have the nursery located in Singapore. The nursery is preferably located within 30 kilometres radius from the project site,

3.0

NURSERY LAYOUT The size of the nursery shall be sufficient to accommodate all plant materials. The nursery shall consist of the following basic functional areas:

4.0

3.1

Operation centre to include an office and caretaker's quarters, equipment and tool storage.

3.2

Propagation area to include facilities for propagation and starting of plants and storage area for compost and growing media.

3.3

Plant growing plots.

NURSERY OPERATION 4.1

The nursery shall have all utility services, including potable water, plant irrigation water, sewer disposal, electricity, etc. necessary for the successful operations of the nursery and optimum plant growth.

4.2

The nursery shall have all weather access roads within the nursery site for ease of delivery and removal of plant materials, equipment, supplies, etc.

4.3

The Contractor shall be responsible for drainage structures necessary to protect nursery plant material at the nursery site from rainfall run-off damage.

4.4

The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the nursery operations until all plants are installed.

4.5

The nursery layout should include protection from intensive winds, and fencing and other security measures against vandalism and plant damage from animals.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

4. 6

5.0

The nursery should be attended by a superintendent with thorough knowledge of plant propagation techniques, plus horticulture and botanical background. The nursery should be equipped with maintenance tools such as tree pruners, hand saws, shovels, movers, and soil processing equipment such as frontend loaders required for the basic nursery operation. Herbicides, fertilisers, plastic planting pots or bags should be of constant supply.

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL A fluent English-speaking foreman or supervisor with qualified horticultural training and experience should be provided. His/her name and contact telephone / handphone / pager number shall be submitted to the SO and Client. He/She shall make himself/herself available to supervise and direct the landscape planting work on site and at the nursery.

6.0

APPROVED SUPPLIERS Sub-contractors may be appointed by the Contractor to assist in sourcing the required plants but are to be of the approval of the SO.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

PART 6 - LANDSCAPE DEFINITION 1.0

SPECIM EN "Specimen" shall mean that the plant is of optimum quality. The plant shall have a matured, natural growth farm, healthy, vigorous in growth. It shall be free from any form of pest attack or scars/wounds that may arise from transportation from nursery to site and during planting operation. The plant shall individually be chosen / approved by the SO.

2.0

SAPLING "Sapling" shall mean that the plant is grown from seed / cutting / imarcots. It shall have a full crown, with its branches, root system intact when planted.

3.0

MATURE SPECIES

"Mature" shall mean the optimum size/growth of the plant of the particular Species. 4.0

BUSHY "Bushy" shall mean that the plant shall have a well branched crown filled with leaves.

5.0

ROOTED CUTTINGS "Rooted cuttings" shall mean that each stalk of stem cutting shall have its own supportive root system.

6.0

INSTANT TREE “Instant Tree" shall mean a mature tree of minimum calliper of 100mm diameter (unless otherwise stated), measured 1.0m from ground level, and shall have a clear straight trunk of minimum 2.0m high (unless otherwise stated), The head shall be well balanced and rounded and contain at least three (3) main branches, giving an overall height of 2.5 - 3.0m at the time of planting. Transplanted rootball size shall be at least 1.2m diameter.

7.0

SINGLE STEM PALM 'Single stem palm' shall mean a mature palm of minimum trunk girth circumference of 100mm diameter (unless otherwise stated) measured 1.0m from ground level and shall have a clear straight trunk of minimum 2.0m (unless otherwise stated) from root collar to the base of the leaf sheath (unless otherwise stated). The head shall be well balanced with at least five (5) fronds and evidence of one (1) new growing shoot. Transplanted rootball size shall be at least minimum 1.2m diameter.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

8.0

MULTIPLE STEM PALM "Multiple stem palms" are palms which naturally grow as a multi-stemmed clump by sending out suckers. They shall have a minimum of six (6) stems with a clear trunk height of 2.0m metres (unless otherwise stated) from the root collar to the base of the leaf sheath. There shall be at Ieast three (3) leaves on each stem and evidence of one (1) new growing shoot per stem.

9.0

SHRUBS "Shrubs" are woody perennials of generally multi-stemmed and bushy habit ranging from 3.0 - 4.5m down to 300mm at height. Shrubs shall have no less than three (3) main stems and shall be well balanced and bushy, with strongly developed fibrous root system.

10.0

HERBACEOUS PLANTS "Herbaceous Plants" are non-woody perennials usually of a clump forming habit. Plants shall have a well developed main stem or stems, with good symmetry and healthy root system.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

LIST OF SOFTSCAPE TO BE INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT: Plants Sizes

No .

Description

BQ

BQ

OH m

SPD m

Girth mm

quantity

unit

1 Hopea odorata

3.5

2.0

100

10

No.

2 Bucida buceras

3.5

3.0

150

8

No.

3 Dalbergia latifolia

3.5

2.0

100

4

No.

4 Roystenia oleracea

4.0

2.0

-

6

No.

1 Duranta variegated

0.3

0.3

-

380

No.

2 Baphia nitida

1.0

0.6

-

320

No.

3 Belamcanda chinensis

0.5

0.2

-

50

No.

4 Heliconia golden Torch

0.5

0.3

-

200

No.

1 Cow Grass (overall site planting area)

-

-

-

4000

Sqm.

MAINTENANCE Weekly 2 times watering, fortnightly back up - team for

-

-

-

12

Months

TREES AND PALMS - Supply and plant :

SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS - Supply and plant :

TURF - Supply and plant :

weeding, fertilizing and insectide

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR LOCKER SYSTEM 1.0

MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS 1.1

The locker system to be of dimensions 900mm (height) x 300mm (width) x 500mm (depth) with 6mm thick compact phenolic doors.

1.2

Doors and end panel to be made of 6mm thick solid “Trespa Athlon’ HPL phenolic panel (or similar approved material) based on 30% thermosetting resins, homogenously reinforced with 70% cellulose fibres and manufactured under high pressure and temperature.

1.3

The phenolic panel shall have an integrated, decorated surface made of melamine impregnated paper on both sides of the panel.

1.4

The phenolic panel shall have the following physical properties:

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Property

Property or attribute Wear resistance Plain colours Printed decors

Standard

Unit

EN 438-2:6

Property Code

Resistance to immersion in boiling water after 2 hrs.

Thickness Increase Mass increase

EN 438-2:7

Resistance to dry heat at 180 °C

Appearance Gloss /others

EN 438-2:8

Dimensional stability at elevated temperature

Cumulative Dimensional change

EN 438-2:9

%(L) %(T)

Dimensional stability at 20 °C

Cumulative Dimensional change

EN 438-2:10

%(L) %(T)

Resistance to impact by small diameter ball * Resistance to impact by large diameter ball

Spring force

EN 438-2:11

Drop height Diameter of indentation

EN 438-2:12

Property code Cm mm

250 ≤10

Resistance to scratching

Light colours Dark colours

EN 438-2:14

Property code

4 3

Resistance to staining

Appearance Groups 1 and 2 Groups 3 and 4

En 438-2:15

Grade

Wool standard Wool standard

EN 438-2:16 EN 438-2:17

Resistance to surface wear

Resistance to colour change In xenon arc light In enclosed carbon arc light

% % Grade Grade

Type CGS 3 2 ≤4 ≤1 5 5

0.10 0.20 0.05 0.10 4

5 5 Grade ≤6 ≤6

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Property

Standard

Unit

Resistance to cigarette burns

Property or attribute Appearance

EN 438-2:18

Grade

Type CGS 5

Resistance to steam

Appearance

EN 438-2:24

Grade

5

BS 476part 7

Class

2

Resistance to fire Resistance to crazing

Susceptibility

EN 438-2:26

Grade

5

Resistance to moisture

Appearance

EN 438-2:27

Grade

5

Flexural modulus

Stress

DIN 53457

N/mm2

≥10000

Flexural strength

Stress

DIN 53452

N/mm2

≥ 100

Tensile strength

Stress

DIN 53455

N/mm2

≥

70

The test method EN 438-2:11 is not applicable to compact CGS grade, however in practical applications the impact resistance of compact laminates is superior to that of other decorative laminates types. 1.5

2.0

3.0

Tops, shelves and bases shall be made of injection moulded plastic, with ventilation holes and drainage holes.

1.6

Full height aluminum locker bodies with radius back corners.

1.7

Full height extruded aluminum (door and latch) frame sections.

1.8

Gravoply silver colour number plates for each compartment.

1.9

Double unsprung/sprung hinges for each compartment.

PERFORMANCE 2.1

All materials to be unaffected by local humidity conditions.

2.2

All components and parts for the locker system shall be of non-corrosive quality.

WORKMANSHIP 3.1

All edges of the HPL phenolic panels and door shall be bull-nosed and chamfered.

3.2

Locker base unit to have built-in 3 degree slope.

3.3

Door to be bolted through, bonded and mechanically fixed to hinges with aluminium anodozide rosettes to the exterior.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.4 4.0

Locks to be mechanically fixed to hinges with aluminum anodized rosettes to the exterior. VERIFICATION 4.1

Contractor to submit shop-drawings indicating the size and perspective views of the proposed locker system with respect to the site conditions, to S.O’s approval, prior to mass production of all the locker systems.

4.2

Contractor to submit manufacturer’s declaration of performance for HPL phenolic panels.

4.3

Contractor to submit sample colours, mock-up and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR INTERLOCKING ROOF). 1.0

GENERALLY

1.1

Composition

METAL

ROOFING

(PROFILED

The proposed metal sheet roofing comprises the following: a)

b)

One layer of 1.00mm thick self-adhesive Bitumen Felt

c)

Galvanized steel Zed Subgirt at 600mm c/c spacing

d)

One layer of 50mm thick Rockwool insulation with density of 80kg/m 3

e)

One layer of glass fibre tissue (Black tissue)

f)

1.2

One layer of Decra® Milano Tile stone chip finish, total thickness of 2.0mm or approved equivalent.

One layer of Perforated LYSAGHT SPANDEK® OPTIMATM with cover width of 935mm in 0.48 mm thick (Total Coated Thickness) Clean COLORBOND® steel (standard colour) as substrate ceiling. COLORBOND ® colour shall be applied on the underside of profiled sheeting.

Metal Roof Profiled: a)

Decra® Milano Tiles roof panels shall be pressure formed from 0.48mm thick Zinc/aluminium alloy steel AZ150 into a seven-module panel. The panels together shall form an extremely strong interlocking and overlapping roofing system. Each panel size shall be 1335mm overall length, upstand of 22mm with coverage of 1215mm x 368mm comes with compatible roofing accessories inclusive flashings and capping made of the same material and finish.

b)

Decra® Milano Tile roof panels manufactured only from Zinc/ aluminium alloy steel 0.48mm thick shall offer superior protection and resistance to corrosion. The panels shall have proprietary protective metallic coating, zinc/aluminium alloycoated steel AZ150 (150gsm/ m2) and having coating thickness (total both side) of 50 m or 0.05mm. This protective coating conforms to Australian Standard AS1397-2001 and Malaysian Standard MS1196.

c)

Each tile is pressed, and then an acrylic base coat is applied into which natural stone chips are embedded. An acrylic over-glaze is then applied as a finishing seal, prior to oven curing. All Tile coatings are applied after pressing tile into shape, which eliminates micro cracking. The underside of each tile also has a protective coating of clear acrylic resin.

d)

Decra® Milano Tile has a lightweight (among lightest available) benefit from Zincalume steel. The weight is 2.9kg per panel. The roofing panels shall be piercefixed (horizontal fixing) together with its interlocking system to be able to withstand extreme weather conditions, resist fire, hurricanes and earthquakes. This

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

horizontal method means no leakage or loose edges and wind shear is virtually eliminated. No lifting in high winds. 1.3

Flashings & Cappings: All flashing, capping, trimming and similar accessories shall be made of the same material and finish, as the main roofing sheet and come with thickness of 0.6mm. Flashings shall conform to the testing standard that stipulates for the roof.

2.0

FINISHES

2.1

General COLORBOND steel with resistance to dirt staining coating shall be able to give a combined long-term durability and corrosion resistance. Its substrate/ metallic coating conforms to Australian Standard AS1397 and SS370:1994 whilst its paint coating conforms to AS/NZS 2728

2.2

Protective Metallic Coating/ corrosion resistant proprietary Protective metallic coating shall be zinc/aluminium alloy-coated steel AZ150 (150gsm/ m2) and having coating thickness (total both side) of 50mm or 0.05mm as stipulated in AS1397 – 2001.

2.3

Primer Custom formulated corrosion inhibitive chromate primer with nominal thickness of 5mm on each side.

2.4

Finish/ top coat The finish coat shall be custom formulated system and have dry film thickness 20mm on the top or weather side.

2.5

Backing coat Custom formulated polyester system in the standard Shadow Grey colour with nominal film thickness of 5mm.

2.6

Gloss Paint finish shall have a nominal gloss level of 25% (60°).

3.0

PROPERTIES

3.1

Tiles has been tested on: a) Weather Security High Speed Dynamic Rain Penetration and High Wind Loading Test – by Construction Research Laboratory Inc, Florida - USA. Low Speed Dynamic Rain Penetration Test – by the Experimental Building Station, Australia. b) Corrosion Resistance Salt/ fog Test to ASTM B117 100% Relative Humidity Test to ASTM D2247 c) Concentrated Loading

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Concentrated Force on Roofing Tiles to Australian Standard 1562. Rule 5.2, 1973 by Cyclone Testing Station, Australia. d) Fire Resistance Class A&B under UL790 (ASTM E-108) when applied in accordance with instructions. e) Hurricane/ Cyclone Wind Resistance Hurricane test by Construction Research Laboratory Inc, Miami, Florida – USA. Cyclone Loading Test to the Wind Loading Code, Australian Standard 1170, Part 2 1975 – by Cyclone Testing Station, Australia. f)

3.2

Resistance to the Impact of Hailstones Hailstone test by Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation, Division of Building, Construction and Engineering, Australia. Associated properties Property

Measured After 1000 hours

Test Method Salt Spray

Resistance to Chalking

2000 hours

Tapeoff Test, ISO 4628-6

Resistance to Humidity

1000 hours

Resistance to corrosion

4.0

5.0

Results Blister Density: ≤ 2 Blister Size: ≤ S2 Undercut from a score: ≤ 2mm No visible loss of adhesion Chalk Rating: ≤ 4

No more than (1) blister density, no loss of adhesion.

SELF ADHESIVE BITUMEN FELT MEMBRANE a)

The membrane fixed onto the insulation surfaces is composed of two waterproofing materials – an aggressive-rubberized asphalt adhesive backed by a layer of high density, cross-laminated polyethylene. The rubberized asphalt surface is backed with a release paper that protects the adhesive quality. The release paper shall be removed during application.

b)

The membrane resists attack by fungus and bacteria, it will not crack, dry out or rot and is designed to withstand the ambient temperatures under most types of metal roof covering in tropical regions.

c)

The membrane shall provide proper roof ventilation in moist climates to prevent interior condensation.

THERMAL AND SOUND INSULATION a) The thermal insulation material is mineral wool as indicated with 80kg/m 3 density, to a 50mm thickness. The thermal conductivity of insulation should be 0.034 w/mk

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

at 200 C (0.235 BTU in/ft2h 0F at 680F) and must comply with Australian standard 1530: Part 3 – 1976. b)

6.0

Sound insulation is by spray-on acoustic insulation material to manufacturer’s specification

HEAT / VAPOUR RADIANT BARRIER The heat/vapour radiant barrier shall be heavy-duty double-sided aluminium reflective foil bonded with flame retardant adhesive and reinforced with fiberglass yarn laid over the rockwool insulation.

7.0

GLASS FIBER TISSUE (BLACK TISSUE) The glass fibre tissue shall be classified as class ‘O’ glass fiber mat which meets BS 476 part 6 & 7. It will be used as facing for all types of insulation materials such as mineral wool, glass wool, polyurethane slabs, phenolic slabs and extruded polystyrene slabs.

8.0

STEEL SUBSTRATE

8.1 a)

8.2

Characteristic of substrate The substrate shall be constructed with Lysaght galvanized Bondek II 0.75mm thick steel structural decking roll-formed from hot-dipped, zinc coated, chromatepassivated, high strength grade BHP ZINC Hi-Ten steel and strip in bare metal thickness of 1.0 mm. The steel strip has a specified tensile strength of 550Mpa which conforms to both BS EN 10147 and AS 1397. The minimum coating class is Z 200 for mild exposure conditions.

b)

The substrate shall have effective cover width of 600mm and rib height of 54 mm and each rib is spaced at 200mm centres with total 4 ribs all together. The profile comprises two intermediate dovetail ribs for every interlocking side lap joint. The assembled ribs are all boldly embossed along their exposed top faces and the nominal height of embossment is 2 mm

c)

The roof substrate shall be fixed to purlins/ supports spaced at an interval recommended by structural engineer.

Characteristic of Fascia / Sofit a) The Fascia / Sofit shall be minimum 0.60mm thick with a cover width of 300mm and depth of the panel 25mm. Depending on the desired design, a gap between each panel can range from 0mm up to 25mm with appropriate dimensions of the concealed internal flange. b)

The Fascia / Sofit panel shall be made of the same material and finish as the main roofing sheet and shall conform to the testing standard that stipulates for the roof.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

9.0 9.1

ACCESSORIES Fasteners Fasteners to have the following characteristics: a) Base materials of fastener: AISI 1022 b) Coating on fastener: acrylic based polymer – Climaseal c) Corrosion resistance requirement: AS 3566 Class 3 d) All fastener must complies to Australian Standard 3566 Class 3 e) Conform to the following tests and results: f)

Salt spray test, AS 2331.3.1, 1000 hours

g) Kesternich test, DID 50018, 15 cycles h) Humidity test, ASTM D 2247, 1000 hours

9.2

i)

UV test, ASTM G53, 2000 hours

j)

Rivets for the concealed clips shall be Aluminium Alloy 5056. Stem material: carbon Steel - Zinc plated. It must have a 320N shear and 90N tension per rivet.

Sealant a) Sealant shall be an approved adhesive material, suitable for application on all respects, of a consistency suitable for application providing a seal between a unit or structure. The colour of the sealant be selected by the roofing specialist. b) The sealant should have the following properties: Medium modulus – with extension/ compression capability of to +50% of original joint width; Adhesion to joint surfaces; Waterproof; Durable to UV light; Ability to act as an anti-corrosion barrier between dissimilar material; When cured, stays rubbery from 60 to 200 degrees Celsius without tearing, cracking, drying out or becoming brittle.

10.0

WORK INCLUDED

The work of this section includes all workmanship, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the metal roofing, and flashing as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to the following: a) Decra Milano tiles for roofing and related flashings. b) Drilling and tapping of structure as required for fastening of all work included in this section. c) Cutting and flashing required for roof penetration.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

11.0

QUALITY ASSURANCE a)

The roof applicator shall be certified and approved by the manufacturer of the roofing material. For actual installation of roofing, use only competent and skilled roofer completely familiar with and experienced in the application of materials specified herein. The specialist shall be an ISO accredited company and in its Quality Assurance Procedure No QP/4.19/001 - SERVICING, the specialist objective is to ensure that the servicing requirement meets its obligations to its customers.

b)

The roof applicator shall be certified and approved by the manufacturer of the roofing material. For actual installation of roofing, use only competent and skilled roofer completely familiar with and experienced in the application of materials specified herein

c)

The specialist shall be an ISO accredited company and in its Quality Assurance Procedure No QP/4.19/001 - SERVICING, the specialist objective is to ensure that the servicing requirement meets its obligations to its customers. To deliver the above objective a computerised system under; “The Corrective Action and Response Enhancement Programme System (CARE)” shall be implemented to monitor claims/complaints and its responses within seven working days upon written

12.0

INSTALLATION

12.1

Generally a) Decra® Milano tile can be installed on any pitch from 120 to vertical mansard. b)

Examine the areas and conditions where the metal roof, and flashing to be installed and notify the SO of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work.

c)

Cutting and drilling and similar operations required to accommodate the work of other trades shall be performed. Where roof panel abuts or adjacent material, the juncture shall be executed in a manner to assure waterproof construction.

d)

Accessories and other items essential to complete the roof installation must be provided.

e)

The roof panel shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the details indicated and as specified. Flashing shall be formed on brake press machine; shaping trimming shall be done on bench, where practicable. Bends and folds shall be made in such a manner to avoid buckling or fullness in the metal after installation.

f) 12.2

The minimum end lap between adjacent sheets is to be 50mm.

Rafters/ Roof Trusses Rafters or roof trusses shall be set at various centres depending on the type of construction and regulation. In most situations the following timber batten sizes are

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

recommended. Recommended Rafter or Truss Centres Up to 900mm 1200mm 1500mm 1800mm

Batten Size 50 x 40mm 50 x 50mm 50 x 65mm on edge 50 x 75mm on edge

In the case that steel battens/ top hat are used, steel battens are produced in galvanised or zinc/ aluminium coated steel with 200mm to 400mm girth. The steel battens/ top hat must be selected so that the tiles panel are supported along the front edge and can be securely fastened back to the batten. 12.3

Batten/ top hat a) Decra® Milano tile batten spacing is 370mm measured from the front of the batten. This is the surface where the tiles will be fixed to the batten. b)

12.4

12.5

All batten installation shall be carried out in the manner prescribed in the manufacturer’s Installation Guide. The tiles will not fit/ interlock correctly if the batten installed incorrectly. Insulations are to be installed before the battens are fixed.

Tiles a) Decra® Milano tiles can overlap both from left to right or from right to left, but must be arranged with the overlaps opposed to the prevailing winds b)

On low-pitched roofs an entire area can be laid without fastening immediately. However, all tiles should be fastened in place before leaving the job site for any reason.

c)

On higher pitched roof – over 30 degrees – tile should be fastened two courses above the tiles that are being laid.

Fastening a) The tiles are nailed down the lower front (nose) of the tile to the Nailer. The nails should be placed approximately 10 mm from the bottom corner of the tile. This will ensure wide allowing the tile correctly nail penetration while limiting the penetration to a maximum of two thicknesses. b)

Decra Milano Tile need to be nailed to the front (nose) and overlap (rear) of each tile where overlap. Place foot (weight) before nailing to ensure that the overlap is closed. The following nails every two modules must be placed over the tile nose.

c)

NOTE: In areas prone to cyclones and hurricanes, the facility must comply with local regulations established by law and must be nailed on each module (7 nails per panel).

12.6

Flashing/ Accessories Flashing/ accessories shall be installed as indicate in the shop drawing issued by the roofing specialist to ensure the roof flatness water-tightness.

12.7

Fasteners/ Nails Head

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Touch up Kit shall be used to touch up all fasteners/ nails head if required by SO. 13.0

CLEANING All metal work when finished shall be thoroughly cleaned of scraps and dirt. On large areas this shall be done as each section of the work is finished. Remove and replace panels and components parts of the above work that have been damaged (including finish) beyond successful repair, as directed by the SO.

14.0

WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide warranty for metal roofing for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality of material, prevention of ingress of water through material, integrity of joints and fixing elements, and any damage not due to fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR METALWORK 1.0

GENERALLY All metalworks shall be fabricated by an approved experienced manufacturer and installed by approved experienced workmen. Where practicable, fabrication shall be carried out in a shop. Work that cannot be permanently shop assembled shall be preassembled marked and disassembled prior to transporting, to ensure proper assembly on site. Work shall be fabricated in the largest practicable sizes to minimise site work. Where required for large spans of metal works, the Contractor shall engage his own Professional Engineer (PE) for the design, supervision, assembly and installation of the works. The cost for such engagement of PE is deemed to be included in his tender sum.

2.0

SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide fabrication/installation drawings showing elevations, plans, full size sections, proposed methods of fixing and forming joints, and any proposals for fabrication of large components in more than one piece. The Contractor must submit for the approval of the S.O complete, fully dimensioned and detailed Shop Drawings (drawn to suitable scales) and Hardware Sc hedules for the fabrication and installation of all steel and aluminium works under this Contract. These drawings must show: -

a) b) c) d)

Dimensions, types of materials and fixing details; Reinforcement, stiffeners, anchorage and structural supports; Glazing details, and all other construction details; Drainage system of the windows and doors.

The Contractor shall supply the S.O with four (4) copies each of the approved Shop Drawings and Hardware Schedules. Inspection of shop drawings is not to be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are inspected, the said inspection does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility nor from the necessity of furnishing material or performing work required by the Sub-Contract Drawings and Documents 3.0

AS BUILT-DRAWING Within one (1) month before the issue of Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall submit to the S.O metric size tracings or prints and CAD file diskettes of the as-built drawings.

4.0

MATERIALS All materials for metalwork and associated fasteners shall comply with the relevant B.S. or S.S. codes.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

5.0

FINISHES Galvanising and anodising shall comply with the relevant B.S. or S.S. codes, including all hot-dip galvanising or pre-anodic treatment, cleaning and etching surfaces and sealing of anodic film. Cutting, holing and other preparation of extrusions and sheets shall be executed prior to galvanising or anodising. Finished colour shall be permanent and free from "banding" and "streaking". Visible surfaces of stainless steel work shall be either mirror finish, non-directional finish or hairline finish, as indicated in the drawings.

6.0

WELDING Welding of steel shall be by metal arc welding or other method subject to approval of the S.O and shall comply with the relevant B.S. or S.S. codes. Welding of aluminium or steel shall comply with the relevant B.S. or S.S. codes or other method subject to approval of the S.O. Surfaces to be welded shall be thoroughly cleaned. To ensure accurate fit, clamps and jigs shall be used. Tack welds shall only be used for temporary attachment. Joints shall be made with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or cracks. All traces of flux residue and slag shall be removed. Weld spatter shall be prevented from falling on surfaces which will be visible in the completed work. Butt welds shall be finished smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

7.0

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Metalwork shall be properly handled during transit, storage and fixing to prevent distortion. Arises, projecting features, and exposed surfaces shall be protected. Aluminium and stainless steel sections shall be protected with wax or adhesive tapes and wrapping which shall not be removed until the units are fixed in position and when directed by the S.O.

8.0

FIXING The Contractor shall provide anchorage devices and fasteners, temporary braces and any necessary templates as required for building into concrete and masonry. Threaded connections shall be made tight, using lock nuts if required, with threads concealed. Projecting ends of bolts etc. shall be cut off flush with nuts or adjacent metal. Fixing devices generally shall be of the same metal as the item being fixed, with matching coating or finish. Ends of items to be built into concrete or brickwork are to be ragged, fishtailed or split and turned.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

9.0

FABRICATION Metal shall be cut by sawing or shearing. If flame cutting is employed, edges shall be ground back to smooth, clear edges. Corners shall have mitred junctions of identical sections, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Holes shall be drilled or clearly punched. Burning of holes will not be allowed. Any moving parts shall move freely when assembled. Any burrs and sharp arises which would be visible after fixing shall be removed. Mechanical joints shall be tight, without gaps, capable of developing the full strength of the member, flush (unless otherwise indicated) and formed to exclude water in exposed locations. Where screw heads will be visible after the component is fixed, countersunk machine screws shall be used, unless otherwise shown.

10.0

SHOP PRIMING

Shop prime all metal components, except work which is otherwise finished or to be site welded. Surfaces shall be cleaned with solvent and wire brushed or sandblasted to remove oil, grease, rust, mill scale and other deleterious materials. Approved metal priming painting shall be applied, in dry conditions, to uniformly cover all surfaces, edges, joints and holes. Surfaces, which will be concealed after fabrication, shall be painted prior to assembly. 11.0

INSTALLATION Fabricated metalwork shall be positioned accurately, plumb, level and true to line. Fix securely to prevent deflection, or other movement during use. Do not distort sections when tightening fastenings. No on-site adjustment to shop fabricated items shall be carried out without the prior approval of the S.O.

12.0

RAGGED ENDS End of rails, balusters, standards, brackets, lugs and similar items to be let in or built into concrete or brickwork are to be ragged, fishtailed or split and turned as appropriate.

13.0

RAILINGS, BALUSTRADES ETC. Railings and similar framed work are to be constructed exactly as s hown on the drawings, with all bends, ramps, curves etc. perfectly true. All joints are to be securely welded, riveted or screwed as approved by the S.O. Joints in rails etc. as required for assembly or fixing are to be halved and countersunk screwed.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

All welds shall be filed smooth. Tubular balustrades and railings shall be joined with fittings to give a continuous smooth finish. The work shall be protected with plastic wrapping or other means till handing over of the building to the owner. The Contractor shall arrange for all lateral load test and pay all cost incurred therein. The uprights of rails and balustrades, shall be formed with ragged ends set in cavities of concrete or brickwork and run with molten lead and firmly caulked. 14.0

STAINLESS STEEL RAILINGS AND BALUSTRADES All stainless steel shall be American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) standard 304 18/8 type not exceeding 0.012% maximum carbon content, unless otherwise specified. Where bend for stainless steel tube is less than 135 0, it shall be cast bend. Unless otherwise specified, all stainless steel materials used shall comply with the following : a)

Stainless steel tubular section used for fabrication of handrails and balustrades shall be 1.5mm thick. b) Stainless steel support shall be 1.5mm thick welded to the handrails and fixed to wall as shown on the drawings. c) All stainless steel railing shall be in non-directional finish and exposed surfaces shall be free from scratches and other surface blemishes. Sample of railing shall be submitted free of cost for the S.O’s approval. All materials subsequently delivered to site shall equal to the approved sample. Where welding are used for jointing/fixing purposes, all weld joints shall be neat and square and finished in the same finish as adjacent areas. No weld joints shall be seen externally of the works. Alternatively, the Contractor shall propose other methods of fixing (so as to eliminate any visible weld joints) to the S.O’s approval. All screws, nuts, bolts, washers and other fastening used for the assembly of the stainless steel railings and balustrades shall be of stainless steel unless otherwise directed by the S.O. The Contractor is required to submit shop drawings showing details of fixing and for the approval of the S.O. The stainless steel railings and balustrades shall be securely installed, set plumb, level and in proper alignment and capable of withstanding any operating forces. The whole of the stainless steel railing works shall be carried out by qualified workmen and strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved detailed drawings and relevant local Authorities’ requirements. The stainless steel works shall be adequately protected to prevent damage during the construction period. Upon completion of the works, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean (and polished if necessary) all surfaces, remove all stains and replace any damaged or defective works as required, at no extra cost.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

The protective railing / balustrade on any side over looking an air well, courtyard, void or external open space should be capable of resisting the lateral loading as specified in Table 4 of the Fourth schedule. 15.0

GRATINGS, DRAIN COVERS, SUMP & MAN-HOLE COVERS ETC All gratings and similar framework shall be made of hot-dipped galvanised steel constructed in accordance with the drawings and to the satisfaction and approval of the S.O. and relevant local Authorities’ requirements. All joints shall be securely welded and all frames secured to supporting walls, etc. by built-in lugs or other approved means.

All exposed surface of gratings shall be coated with two coats of bituminous paint. 16.0

MAINTENANCE METAL LOUVRES Unless otherwise stated, all maintenance metal louvers shall be powder coated aluminium profiled louvers finished with minimum 1 mil. thick full strength powder coating of approved colour, complete with all necessary same finished coupling mullions, pressed steel head and cill weathering pieces and fixing with stainless steel screws.

The Contractor shall engage his own Professional Engineer (PE) for the design, supervision, assembly and installation of the works. The cost for such engagement of PE is deemed to be included in his tender sum.

17.0

ALUMINIUM WINDOWS, DOORS AND SCREEN ELEMENTS 17.1

Scope of Work Unless otherwise shown or specified in the drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for the design, fabrication, testing, supply and installation of aluminium windows, doors, grills, louvres, screens, posts, and glazing to comply with the performance requirements as stipulated in this Contract. Notwithstanding, the detail requirements hereafter specified, the works shall in addition be designed and installed to meet the minimum standards as approved by the local Authority and shall also comply in all aspects with S.S. 212:1988 and S.S. 268:1988 for aluminium windows and doors respectively. The Contractor shall be solely responsible with regards to obtaining the necessary approvals from the relevant authorities. All dimensions are overall for panels, doors and windows, etc. The description of each of the glazed panels, doors, windows, etc., shall be deemed to include for glazing, fixing, screw, nuts, bolts, rivets and other attachment and accessories. All cutting, notching, boring, fitting, trimming, mitring, dovetailing, etc., and all ends, short lengths, temporary supports, rebates for plaster and other items of a like nature where required are deemed to be included in the description of the items.

17.2

Design Requirement a) Specifications and Contract drawings

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

The drawings and specification shall be the framework for the Contractor's designs solutions. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to propose his own design solutions that satisfy all the performance requirements and pass the tests stipulated to the satisfaction of the S.O. b)

Performance Requirement The aluminium windows and doors provided for the works shall comply in all aspects with S.S. 212:1988 and S.S. 268:1988 respectively, and in particular the followings:-

i)

All aluminium structural members shall be made in aluminium alloy complying with BS 1474 or the relevant S.S. codes.

ii) c)

17.3

Performance Tests shall be carried out by SISIR or SISIR accredited laboratories. The manufacturer/supplier of the aluminium windows and doors shall be under SISIR/PSB Licence Marking Scheme.

d)

Notwithstanding the acceptance of the design recommendations by the S.O, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of all the Works and shall make good all damages arising from inadequate design.

e)

The Contractor shall bring to the S.O's attention, during the Tender submission, if his design for the aluminium windows and doors, or other components of the works, does not meet the requirements stated in the Tender Document.

Design Submission The Contractor is required to submit design recommendations and calculations with preliminary shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of the works including relevant information and physical properties of aluminium extrusions selec ted in compliance with S.S. 212:1988. The Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer for the design, endorsement of drawings to relevant Authorities, and cursory site supervision of the works.

17.4

Shop Drawings and Method Statements The Contractor shall submit two sets of shop drawings which shall fully illustrate the works and shall include full size fully-dimensioned details. Particulars of the followings must be given: a) Thickness, weights and profile of the various sections to be used b) Joints, welds, intersections and assembly c) Finishes d) Waterproofing details and materials e) Hardcore including hardware schedules f) Anchorages, structured supports and reinforcement g) Glass and glazing methods The S.O shall have the right to request more details or modification to details if he is of the opinion that these are necessary to ensure compliance with S.S. 212:1988 and S.S. 268:1988, this Specifications and the Contractor's design recommendation.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

In addition, the Contractor shall submit detailed method statements, which shall describe the followings: a) Drainage system of the windows and doors b) Ways of ensuring water tightness and air-tightness c) Ways of ensuring verticality of window and door frames d) Ways of accommodating thermal movement due to weather conditions e) The protection of aluminium surface finish and operating mechanism from damage after installation. 17.5

Approval by S.O Approval of the shop drawings, design recommendations, calculations, etc. by the S.O will not exonerate the Contractor from any responsibility under the terms and conditions of Contract. The Contractor will be solely responsible for the design of the Works under this Contract and he shall make good any defects arising from inadequate provisions. No changes whatsoever shall be made to specified materials, approved details and design without prior approval of the S.O in writing.

17.6

Obvious Work The Contractor shall provide all materials and fittings and perform any work, which is obviously necessary for the complete installation of each unit of the aluminium works, even though such materials, fittings or works may not be explicitly mentioned in this Specification or shown on the drawings

17.7

Material a) Metal doors and windows Extruded aluminium members for the construction of doors, windows and other framework or panel units shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy 6063TF, 6063TE and 6063TB complying with BS1474, or S.S. 212:1988. Aluminium extrusions used in fabrication of windows frames and window panels shall have a minimum wall thickness of 1.8mm and 1.2mm respectively or such other minimum thickness as specified. Aluminium extrusions used in aluminium door frames and panels shall have a minimum thickness of 2mm or such other minimum thickness as specified. b)

Fasteners All fixing anchors, screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and other miscellaneous fastening devices incorporated shall be made from aluminium, non-magnetic stainless steel, mild steel treated to give corrosion resistant properties complying with S.S. 212:1988. Screws, bolts and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour.

c)

Rollers, Guides & Stoppers Rollers used shall be made of hardened synthetic resin with ball bearing at their cores. Guides and stoppers shall also be of synthetic resin material and exposed parts shall be in black colour or bronze

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

colour or other approved matching colour. d)

Joints and Gaskets All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber and all inner frames shall have insertion of PVC gasket or other air-tightening materials.

e) Safety Devices Safety devices shall be incorporated into all the glazed sliding window panels to prevent them from jumping track and shall be in black colour or bronze or other approved matching colour. f) Weather Strip All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene, polypropylene pile or plasticized PVC. g)

17.8

Sealant Sealing compounds shall be in silicone and/or compriband sealant or other equal and approved, which are compatible with the aluminium and adjoining works.

Surface Finishes The surface finishes, as specified in the drawings shall be one of the followings: a)

Anodised Finished (Natural/Black) Where described as anodised extruded aluminium, the anodic coating shall be minimum 15 microns, or such other minimum thickness as shown in S.O’s drawing. Where described as anodised aluminium, the aluminium shall be finished by either be: (i) anodic coating to 15 microns minimum complying with BS 3987. (ii)

combined coating to comply with BS 4842 with minimum 9 microns anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.

All surface treatments shall be applied by an approved specialist factory and shall conform to the requirements of BS 1615:1972 or as amended or the relevant S.S. code. The Contractor shall submit samples of the finished aluminium and submit details of the anodising process in the schedule of Technical information. b)

Polyester Powder Coat Finished Unless otherwise specified, the surface finishing for all the aluminium works shall comply with the requirements of BS 4842 or the relevant S.S. codes. The polyester powder coating shall be applied by an approved specialist factory to a minimum thickness of 70 microns or such other minimum thickness as shown in the S.O's drawings and shall be in a colour approved by the S.O. The Contractor shall submit samples of the finished aluminium and submit details of this powder coating process in the Schedule of Technical information.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

17.9

Installation

a)

Generally Doors, windows, etc., shall be set in their correct location, as shown in the Drawings, and shall be level, plumb and square, at their proper elevation and in alignment with all works and fixed within the tolerance permissible for aluminium works, all to the satisfaction of the S.O. Joints at heads, cills and jambs between metal and masonry or concrete shall be grouted with cement and sand filling of thickness not greater than 20mm and shall be fully caulked all round and pointed with an approved waterproof mastic. The waterproof admixture when installation work is completed to be used shall be of a brand approved by the S.O. Frames shall be set and fixed to walls with lugs. No screw fixing through the aluminium frame will be allowed.

b)

Doors and Windows All doors and windows shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturer's instruction and must be fully watertight. All joints shall be sealed with an approved waterproof mastic and finished to a neat flush joint with the window door frame. The operating devices, mechanisms and ironmongery shall be installed so that they will operate smoothly and freely, without excessive friction, noiselessly and shall be adequate for the purpose of which they are intended. Doors, casement and top hung window sashes shall be hung on aluminium butt hinges. Lockset shall be approved by the Architect and shall be supplied with push/pull handles. In sliding units, adjacent aluminium members shall not slide upon each other but shall be separated by a material that does not react with aluminium and does not interfere unduly with the sliding. All sliding sashes shall be supported on bearing devices that facilitate the movement and prevent direct contact between the sashes and the aluminium tracks. The design of louvered panels shall prevent any back flow of rainwater into the interior of the buildings under any conditions. Swing doors shall be hung on approved single or double action floor springs. Locksets shall be approved by the S.O and shall be supplied with push/pull handles. In two leaf doors, one leaf shall be in addition fitted with two concealed bolts. Glazing to doors shall be from the inside, secured by aluminium beads fitted into the extruded frames, having PVC glazing gaskets and/or approved sealant.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

c)

Fixed Panels Glazing to fixed panels shall be from outside, secured by aluminium beads fitted into the extruded frame having PVC glazing gaskets and/or approved sealant.

d) Dissimilar Materials Where treated aluminium surfaces, may come in contact with concrete, plaster, steel or other dissimilar metal or material, with other metals, water absorbent or porous materials, or incompatible materials, the aluminium surfaces shall be kept from direct contact with these materials with one coat of approved anti-corrosive and anti-bimetal chemical reaction paint applied before fixing. e)

Protection before and after installation All aluminium sections shall not be stored in a manner where they rub or slide against each other or against other metallic surfaces. All components where possible shall be delivered to the Site in individual plastic wrapping, stout papers, cardboard or other protective covering which shall not be allowed to get damp. The Contractor shall provide cover on all exposed aluminium surfaces, etc., during transportation and installation against damage by contaminated moisture, staining, abrasion, wet cement, wet plaster and other injuries, including provision of proper storage sheds for materials delivered to site. Any aluminium unit which is damaged in any way during transportation, before or after installation shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

f)

Application All finishing treatment of aluminium surfaces shall be carried out by an approved licensed applicator in strict conformity with the specifications for cleaning, priming and finish coat applications and quality control. The Contractor shall submit the specification for the proposed anodising and/or coating to the aluminium works. All aluminium surfaces shall be free from scratches, blemishes and/or any defects that will affect the appearance and/or performance and shall be thoroughly cleaned and etched before pre-treatment. The Contractor shall keep proper records of the entire anodising and/or coating production. The records shall be submitted by the Contractor to the S.O upon request.

g)

Colour Match Tonality and Texture All surface finish of the same stipulated colour must have the same tonality throughout.

The completed work shall present an uniform appearance in regard to colour and texture and shall be a satisfactory match with identical samples of colour patches held by the S.O.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

h)

Workmanship (i)

Fabrication The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the dimensions of all opening sizes on site prior to fabrication of the aluminium sections. Aluminium members shall be fabricated to the best standard of workmanship under experienced factory supervision and control. Joints in frames, at corners, junctions or intersections, are to be welded and so assembled to be as strong and rigid as adjoining sections. Welded joints shall be permanently watertight. Permissible tolerance shall be provided for expansion and contraction in members exposed to weather. Any distortion in the aluminium members or any glass cracked or broken due to inadequate provision for tolerance must be replaced and made good by the Contractor at his expense. Components shall be delivered, stored and handled to prevent damage of whatever nature, factory-finished metals shall be protected in an approved manner (e.g. removable PVC sheeting/lining) during transportation and installation and such protection shall be removed when directed.

(ii)

Modifications The Contractor may make minor changes in construction details of the units in order to facilitate erection on site, such changes shall not be made without prior approval by the S.O in writing. No extra cost shall be payable to the Contractor in respect of these changes.

(iii)

Tolerances

The limits of sizes for the overall length and overall height shall be stated by the Contractor taking into account permissible deviations in size and squareness. The tolerance for windows on overall dimensions shall not be greater than +/-1.5mm. The tolerances for the location of centre lines of mullions and transoms etc. shall be +/-1.5mm except where transoms or mullions form part of a continuous strip where the tolerance shall not be greater than +/-0.4mm.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

18.0

ROLLER SHUTTERS Supply and fix electrically operated roller shutters (with manual over-ride) to be constructed of colourbond zincalume, in 0.6mm thick steel curtain material permanently lock-seamed to form a continuous curtain with the edges treated with heavy duty self-lubricating seamless braided nylon polyglide to prevent metal to metal contact. The drum assembly shall consist of suitably graded oil-tempered torsion springs secured to drumwheels moulded from engineering plastics. The curtain top shall be fully secured and wrapped around the drum assembly to form a cylindrical tongue tube, which is to be bored up. The bottom rail shall be an extruded aluminium section locked-seamed onto the bottom of the curtain with the base of the rail containing two slots to retain a seamless finned PVC weatherseal. Approved keypads switches shall be provided. The installation shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Electrically operated roller shutter shall have a proprietary motor operator with most components in Nylin-B engineering plastics. The drive power is provided by twin 24V D.C. motor with synchronised gear reduction. The whole unit shall be compact enough to fit neatly inside the door roll and drives the door directly. Conversion to manual mode can be conveniently effected at ground level by means of a lever activator. There shall be a compact sized control box with electronic PCB and built-in transformer. It shall be linked to the drive unit via a pre-wired link cord with snap-on connector. An automatic overload device shall ensure durability of motors. Safety device shall be incorporated and when a closing door is obstructed, it will stop and immediately reverse back. The roller shutter shall be controlled by external push button control.

19.0

WARRANTY

The Contractor shall provide warranty for aluminium and glazing works for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality of material, prevention of ingress of water through aluminium or glass materials, integrity of joints and fixing elements, and any damage not due to fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR OFFICE SYSTEM FURNITURE & CHAIRS 1.0

OFFICE SYSTEM FURNITURE

1.1

General a)

This specification is for the supply, delivery and installation of system furniture, partitions and chairs for Admin / General Office, Head of Programme, Staffroom, Meeting Room, and Specialist Training and Professional Development Unit.

b)

The system furniture proposed shall create a pleasant and flexible environment which facilitates and accommodates change, accepts growth and allows the Employer to effectively use their space. It shall be responsive to changing needs and future requirements.

c)

The furniture shall be of the sizes, materials and finishes as specified and as shown in the architectural drawings.

d)

All furniture shall be rigid and free from vibration and able to be configured in a variety of layouts. They shall be of sturdy construction with fine engineering details and be inherently stable against tipping. All fitments and furniture shall be of construction for easy storage, assembly and re-erection without any decrease in performance. They shall be durable and easy to clean and maintain with replaceable parts.

e)

All components shall be designed for easy removal and repositioning. It is therefore necessary for all components to be designed for inter-changeability and reversibility without the need to consider lefts and rights, ups and downs , so as to reduce down time during alterations and minimise the cost of inventory. The components shall be able to be repositioned or reconfigured without leaving marks or holes exposed.

f)

All furniture shall be of good quality and finish to S.O's approval and be designed with rounded corners, edges etc. with no projections likely to catch on clothing etc. and for safer softer feel.

g)

All metal brackets and hardware items shall be finished with an electro-deposited layer of zinc or nickel to protect against corrosion and wear.

h)

All suspended components are to come complete with all necessary brackets. Mounting brackets are to be easily latched and unlatched to reposition the suspended units up and down the panel. Each suspended unit is to have a safety catch or other approved means to prevent them from being accidentally dislodged.

i)

All cupboards, storage units and drawers are to have recessed pulls of superior quality finish, and are to be provided with locks with key-alike locking system per workstation (with minimum 1,000 combinations) 3 keys shall be provided for every lock. All keys shall be properly labelled and systematically handed to the Employer on completion of the Works. All movable parts of drawers are to have resilient plastic bumpers to prevent metal to metal contact and ensure quiet operation.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

j)

Product components and spare parts shall be of modular concept and must be readily available.

k)

All metal surfaces shall be treated against rust and have epoxy coated finish or other approved finish and shall be scratch resistant.

l)

Plastic laminate shall be high pressure factory applied and shall be resistant to scratch, impact, moisture damp, chemical and cigarette scorching, matt finished, and of colour selected by S.O. Minimum thickness shall be 0.8mm unless otherwise specified. The veneer finish shall be as specified with approved grain solid trimming, stained to S.O's approval and finished with copolymer liquid plastic dressings.

1.2

Mock-up Samples The Contractor shall construct a mock-up of the system furniture as specified prior to the commencement of the system furniture installation for the purpose of preassessing by the S.O of its quality. The aforesaid mock-up approved by the S.O shall be the minimum reference standard of workmanship that the Contractor would have to provide for the installation of the system furniture for the whole of the project.

1.3

Panels a)

All panels shall have acoustical properties, be light in design but rigid. All panels shall be finished in fire retardant fabric. All panels must not support combustion or contain toxic materials.

b)

Panels shall be based on modular concept, i.e. constructed of a frame with components that allow for a wide degree of flexibility of configuration of surfaces. The surfaces, referred as the panel pads (or tiles) shall be able to achieve wide choice of finishes, easy replacement of finishes and meet the functional needs required of systems furniture, e.g. wire management and the ability to accommodate other modules e.g. storage units. The panel pad system proposed by the Contractor shall have the following capabilities:i) ii)

White board pad to provide an erasable writing surface. Pass through pad to provide an opening between both sides of panels.

c)

The panels structure/framework shall be of steel/aluminium and the panel pads shall be constructed of steel/aluminium of minimum 0.8mm thick to ensure system rigidity and durability. Panels shall have steel supporting framework (minimum 16 gauge) with epoxy coated metal top cap and edge trims. All edges shall be rounded and the panel system is to be provided complete with all fixing accessories, cover strips, stabilizing feet etc. Stabilising feet to be stable and strong and epoxy coated.

d)

Panels shall be minimum 65mm thick and maximum 95mm thick. They shall be available in various heights. The Contractor shall comply with the minimum height specified.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

e)

A logical progression in panel width to permit maximum flexibility shall be incorporated in the design. The minimum and maximum panel width shall be 500mm to 2150mm.

f)

Panels shall be structurally designed to support a variety of mounted storage, work surfaces and supplementary components without specific attachment points for flexibility in the repositioning of such units and when fully loaded shall not affect the integrity of stability of the panels. Such hanging slots shall be concealed and provided with safety catches to prevent unintended pull/fall out.

g)

The connections of panel modules shall be flexible, allowing a variety of angular as well as perpendicular configurations. The panels shall also be designed to take work components and storage on either or both faces of the modules.

h)

All panels must not support combustion or contain toxic materials. Minimum overall rating must comply with the following or equivalent: i) ii) iii) iv) v)

i)

NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient) of 0.85 for the absorptive surface area and NRC of 0.7 for the entire panel surface including trims and edges respectively. STC (Sound Transmission Class) of 20. NIC (Noise Isolation Class) of 18 for the Flanking and NIC of 20 for the barrier respectively. Fire rating of Class A/Class 1 for the entire panel. The fabric shall pass colour fastness test to BS 1006:1971 and BS 2681.

Test reports from a recognised laboratory, satisfying the above requirements shall be submitted by the Contractor.

j)

Unless otherwise specified, panels shall be finished in fabric and timber veneer. The Contractor shall allow for 30% of the fabric to be in special patterned and jagged designs. Panels finished with fabric shall be tackable. It shall be readily upholstered on site. The fire rating of fabric shall be based on NF PA-101. 1982. Fabric shall be cleanable by spot remover and shall be minimum density of 335 g/m 2. Fabric shall be available in a wide range of colours for S.O’s selection. k) Panel systems which include concealed wire management capabilities must meet relevant local authorities requirements and the components shall be engineered for responsive and fail-safe operations. Full power and telecommunication capabilities shall be included and approved by the S.O prior to the design of such power panel. l)

Panels shall have compartmentalised concealed wire management system and shall have: i) ii) iii) iv) v)

at least 3 compartments for electrical, data and telephone cables. fibre optic pass-through capability. plug-in (power, data and telephone outlet) capability at work surface height. storage for excess wiring in the panels. access to future maintenance and additional of power/data/phone point to the panels without the need to dismantle the work surface.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

m)

n)

1.4

The panel system proposed shall allow easy cleaning and maintenance. All tops/panel trimmings shall be scratch resistant and easily cleaned by spot remover. Panel surface shall be resistant to chemicals. e.g. hair grease. The panels shall be provided with adjustable levelling glides.

o)

Panels system shall include integrated concealed wire management capabilities by means of raceway located at the worksurface height. The system shall enable wide degree of flexibility for the running wires i.e. base, table height and top for maximum flexibility of use. Raceway covers shall be easily removable and replaceable.

p)

Cable ducts shall be free from sharp edges and have neatly designed removable cover to allow easy installation of wiring. Cover shall be easily snapped into place. All cable ducts shall have releasable cable ties.

q)

The Contractor's tender sum shall be deemed to include the panels' hardwares, connectors, end pieces and all other associated and necessary accessories.

Work Surfaces/Tables a)

All tables shall be free standing with the capability of having a panel hung system. They shall be sturdy and rigid against vibration and capable of supporting heavy electronic equipment.

b)

The material used for work surfaces shall be resistant to scratch, impact, moisture, damp, chemical, etc. It shall also enable easy cleaning of stains, etc. Plastic laminate or approved equivalent finish shall be used on all work surfaces unless otherwise specified. Rounded corners and radiused edges shall be provided for safety.

c)

The work surface cantilever support brackets shall be possible for cantilever works surfaces to be flush jointed with each other. They shall be capable of being assembled on either side of a panel without the need for extra components.

d)

As far as possible, the dimensions of all work surfaces shall be standardized for inter-changeability. The working height shall be adjustable either continuously or in steps to suit individual requirements. Secondary work surfaces shall be capable of being mounted at varying levels to the main work surface. Where free standing desk is specified, it shall be designed for housing concealed wires both vertically and horizontally.

e) f)

The work surface shall have rounded edges and shall be finished with minimum 0.8mm thick high pressure textured laminate post-formed at the exposed edges. The desk shall be minimum 25mm thick heavy density chipboard or steel reinforced construction, properly supported to ensure no deflection under a loading of 180 kg. Work surface more than 1200mm shall have steel reinforcement.

g)

All free-standing desks and desk without a panel in front, shall have a modesty

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

panel down to the floor recessed at 150mm from the edge of the work surface. The panel sides and modesty panels shall be finished in plastic laminates.

1.5

1.6

h)

All free-standing desks shall be capable of being mounted on either side of the panel without differentiating between left and right.

i)

The side-table shall be rigidly fixed to the main work-surface with properly designed brackets and built-in stainless steel threads for screws or other approved means of fixing. The side-table shall be designed to be completely reversible (right hand - left hand) and it shall be possible to re-fix the side table several times without affecting the integrity of the supports.

j)

All work surfaces (desk top and side tables) shall be provided with 2 wire access openings. The opening shall be sealed with removable cover. The cover shall match with the surfaces of the desk top. Wire management clips or other approved means shall be provided below each work surface to manage/conceal wires.

k)

Tables shall be designed and shall accommodate retractable, adjustable keyboard tray with tilting and height adjustment features. Keyboard tray shall be provided by Contractor.

Overhead Storage Units a)

The overhead storage units (or Hanging Bins) of 300mm (D) mounted to panel shall be designed for easy support off panel and shall be readily repositioned. They shall come complete with all necessary brackets and fixings, and shall be capable of being mounted on either or both sides of the panel without causing any tilting or affecting the stability of the panel when fully loaded.

b)

The storage units shall have epoxy coated finish or other approved finish for steel units, and for timber units shall be plastic laminated finish for the exterior and polykem or other approved finish for the interior unless otherwise specified.

c)

Two sliding shelf dividers shall be provided for every level of storage. Shelves within storage units are to be easily adjustable at various heights to allow for storage of different materials.

d)

The storage units shall have tip-up door fitted with anti-slamming devices such as “soft-closing” with heavy duty good quality hinge and track.

e)

Task light shall be incorporated in the design of the storage unit. It shall be fixed at the underside of the storage unit.

f)

Storage units shall be capable of being fully loaded without visible deflection.

Pedestals/Drawers a)

All pedestals/drawers shall be fully stable under loading and shall pass load test of 30 pounds per drawer, fully extended. An anti-tilt shall be incorporated.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

b)

For general usage, combination of pedestal are: i) 2-box and 1-file floor standing pedestal, or ii) 1-box and 1-file suspended pedestal. iii) with a utility drawer accommodating stationery tray.

1.7

c)

Mobile pedestals shall have counterweight base to prevent topping over when all drawers are fully extended. Castors shall be equipped with locking devise to keep mobile pedestal stationary.

d)

Wood or steel drawers may be used. All drawer pulls shall be rounded and of full length and good quality finish and design.

e)

Independent convenience drawers, lateral drawers, file drawers, etc., where provided, shall slide one below the other and shall be designed for instant installation and repositioning. Ball bearing or other approved glides shall be provided for quiet sliding operations.

f)

The drawers shall be provided with safety catches to safeguard against unintended pull-out.

g)

Drawers shall be fitted with anti-slamming devices.

h)

The interior of lateral tile drawers shall be provided with adjustable dividers or supports for hanging file folders.

i)

All pedestal/drawers shall be equipped with locks and key-alike system.

j)

Each drawer of lateral filing unit shall have 2 sets of hang file bars, for filing side to side. 30 numbers of suspended file pockets shall be provided for each drawer.

In / Out / KIV Tray

In / Out / KIV trays shall be robust tinted perspex stackable trays with rounded edges. Trays shall come in a set of 3 complete with risers and signage for "IN", "OUT" and "KIV". Each tray size shall be 250 x 350 x 55mm. 1.8

Signage

Staff name and designation signage attached to panel or doors shall be provided. Each wall sign shall come with a base, grooved insert, clear protective tamper resistant lens cover, 3 sprues of 5/16" characters, 6 sprues of ½" characters, mounting hardware (screws and velcro) and double sided tape. The wall sign shall have radiused design. The Contractor shall provide a range of minimum 6 colours for S.O's selection. 1.9

Waste Paper Bin

Waste paper bins shall be 285mm wide x 210mm deep x 310mm high plastic waste paper bins of approved colour with rounded edges. Interior and exterior surfaces of bin shall

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

be smooth and easily cleaned, and shall be of a supple yet firm material which will not dent or crack, and the colour shall be fade-resistant. 1.10

1.11

1.12

Metal Cupboard a)

Cupboard overall size 700mm (W) x 400mm (D) x 1350mm (H) shall be of welded construction, using cold rolled steel with surface and flatness of furniture manufacturing quality cupboard tops, drawer fronts and lift-up doors, and reinforcing members shall be of 20 gauge. Cupboard backs and sides shall be of 22 gauge. Cupboard bottom and front strip shall be of 18 gauge. Cage bottom shall be reinforced with two 16 gauge channel.

b)

It shall consists of five (5) nos of open shelves which are to be easily adjustable at various heights to allow for storage of different materials with two (2) nos of dividers on each shelf.

c)

Overall cupboard height is inclusive of metal glide. Actual height with glide fully recessed is 3mm less. Heights may increase up to 16mm by extending standard glides. Glides are accessible from the inside when the bottom drawer or shelf is fully extended or removed.

d)

The full-height hinged door of the cupboard shall be self-closing with Europeanstyle hinge and open 110%.

e)

The cupboard shall be equipped with full width finger pull with enamel finish and supplied with clear plastic label holder and label.

f)

The cupboard shall be slotted on 38mm centre to accept dividers.

Task Lights (TL) a)

Task lights shall be provided for workstations complete with cables and individual on/off switch controls to the workstations. All cables to the task lights shall be pre-wired into the systems furniture from the floor pedestal or raised floor power box or service outlets in the workstation vicinity.

b)

The task lighting for each workstation shall be a fluorescent luminaire complete with high-frequency ballast and approved reflector/diffuser for glare limitation.

c)

The housing for the luminaire shall be sheet steel and finished with epoxy powder coating. The Contractor shall ensure that the luminaire is integrated with the workstation. The fluorescent tube shall have a colour rendition of above 80 and colour temperature of 4000K.

Electrical Wiring & Fixtures a) b)

All electrical works (where specified for eg. switched socket and task lighting) shall be carried out, supervised and tested by the Contractor’s qualified licensed electrical worker (LEW) to SO’s satisfaction. Each workstation and each computer table shall be provided and installed with two twin 13A switched socket outlets with neon indicators on a panel. Each

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

twin 13A socket outlets shall be cabled/wired to a female connector at the panel. The Contractor shall provide a 3-core flexible PVC insulated PVC shielded 2.5mm 2 cable terminating in a 3-pin plug to be plugged onto one (1) of the socket outlet in the service outlet box (by others) at one end, and a male connector at the other end to be plugged into the female connector at the panel. The length of the flexible cables to be provided from each twin 13A socket outlets at the panel to the switched socket outlet at the floor box shall be minimum five (5) metres. c)

All twin 13A switched socket outlets, connectors and 3-pin plugs supplied by the Contractor shall be of Public Utilities Board (PUB) and SISIR/PSB approved type. All flexible cables shall comply with relevant Singapore Standards.

d)

Polarity tests shall be conducted by the LEW engaged by the Contractor in the presence of the S.O and the LEW to ensure the correct terminations of the flexible cables.

e)

The task lighting for each workstation (where specified) shall be 18 watt compact fluorescent luminaire complete with high-frequency ballast and mirror reflector complying to CIBSE LG3 Category 2 for glare limitation. The housing for the luminaire shall be sheet steel, finished with epoxy powder coating to S.O requirements. The Contractor shall ensure that the luminaire be integrated with the workstation. The 18watt fluorescent tube shall have a colour rendition of above 80 and colour temperature of 4000K.

f)

The HF Ballast shall be designed to regulate the fluorescent tube as specified. The Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) of the electronic ballast shall be at least 100,000 hours and suppliers must give guaranteed period of ten (10) years, exchange malfunctioned ballasts at no cost to the Employer.

g)

There shall be a logical organisation of wiring for computers, calculators, printers, telephone systems, typewriters, lighting etc. They shall be concealed unless otherwise specified by S.O.

h)

The raceway integrated with the panel shall include a channel with separate compartments for accommodating power and extra low voltage cables. The cables must be separated by metal dividers to prevent interference. The channel complete with metal dividers forming the compartments shall be an integral part of the furniture system and the raceway design.

i)

The raceway wire management system shall provide the basis for ease of reconfiguration. The raceway shall be of the "lay-in" type which allows wires to be removed easily without the need for threading through the partition.

j)

Electrical and communication wiring coming from the service outlet box shall be capable of being fed through the base of the components of the systems furniture. The design of this wire management system shall allow the wires or cables to be branched off in various directions as may be required. In this respect, provision shall be made for future requirements.

k)

Each workstation shall have one (1) No. twin RJ45 socket outlet prewired with category 5FTP cable in flexible pvc conduit being fed through the base of the system furniture, the flexible conduit shall be terminated at the service outlet

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

box of the floor trunking system with appropriate rubber bush. l)

The length of the communication cables (100 ohm FTP) to be provided from the RJ45 outlets to the corresponding outlets from raised/flush floor services boxes shall be minimum four (4) metres.

m)

Receptacles and communication outlets shall be provided in raceways at suitable levels and locations in the various system furniture components to ensure flexibility in subsequent relocation.

n)

Each twin 13A socket outlets shall be cabled/wired to a female connector at the panel (single or double 13A switched socket-outlet). A three core 2.5mm2 flexible cable of 4 metres length is to be provided from the female connector. The flexible cable will be used for the interconnecting power points between panels.

o)

All twin 13A switched socket outlets, connectors and 3-pin plugs (including plugs for tasklighting) shall be supplied and connected to the service outlet box provided by others within a distance of 5m.

p)

The cable-way integrated with the panel shall include a channel with compartments for accommodating power, data and telephone cables individually. The cables must be separated by metal dividers to prevent interference. The channel complete with metal dividers forming the compartments shall be an integral part of the furniture system and the raceway design.

q)

Long design layouts of electrical wiring shall be avoided to prevent the electrical voltage dropping below a safe or efficient level. Voltage drop calculations shall be submitted upon request by the S.O.

r)

All electrical works (where specified for e.g. switched socket and tasklighting) shall be carried out by the Contractor's qualified licensed electrical contractor and tested by licensed electrical workers to S.O’s satisfaction.

2.0

CHAIRS FOR THE SYSTEM FURNITURE

2.1

General a)

The chairs are to be used for the Admin General Office. Head of Programme office, Staffroom workstations, and the Staff Meeting Room.

b)

The chair shall be ergonomically designed to be comfortable and provide proper support to prevent shoulder and back fatigue and to be adjustable to fit the user in various working positions. Contractor shall supply PSB Test Report or equivalent for chair supplied.

c)

The foam shall be top quality high resilient polyurethane foam providing adequate support while giving soft overall cushioning. Foam shall be with stabilisers against breakdown of foam structure.

d)

The chair shall, unless otherwise specified, have impact resistant (ABS) backshell and seat base.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

e)

Arms shall be fully moulded polyurethane armrests set back so as not to damage desk and shall be comfortable, hard wearing and replaceable.

f)

The base of the chair shall, unless otherwise specified, have 5 prongs dispersed at equal angles around a central supporting core. The material shall be heavy duty die cast aluminium with epoxy coating with no welded parts. The chairs shall be stable so as not to topple over even when heavily loaded on one side.

g)

Each chair shall, unless otherwise specified, be on 5 numbers heavy duty castors to be moved with the minimum effort. They shall be double wheeled counter turning type with swivelling joints of hard composition suitable for carpeted floors.

h)

The chair shall, unless otherwise specified, be fabric upholstered and the fabric shall be heavy-duty superior quality flame-resistant and faderesistant fabric which shall be mildly water-resistant to allow ease of dispersion of perspiration.

i)

The fabric shall be comfortable and shall be textured, multi-coloured and with tight yarn so as not to be easily pulled, torn or fluff.

j)

The fabric shall be of colours approved by the SO and there shall be no differentiation in colour of fabric and other parts for chairs of different batches. Different colours will be used for chairs within each chair type.

k)

The fabric shall satisfy the following requirements:i) ii) iii)

Weight : minimum 480 gm/m 2 Abrasion : in excess of 60,000 cycles, 800g/12kpg The chair shall be designed so as to be easily re-upholstered.

l)

All metal parts shall be treated against rust, and exposed metal parts shall be epoxy coated.

m)

Pneumatic adjustment for chairs shall be with heavy duty pneumatic cylinder adjustment, by lever or other approved means.

n)

The chair shall be compatible in design for use within the whole School.

o)

The chair shall be delivered fully protected with polythene covers.

p)

The Contractor shall supply the chair as specified to the satisfaction of the S.O, and warrants that the chair using good materials and further warrants against any defects whatsoever and howsoever arising for a period of five (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover: i) ii) iii)

Faulty components/parts, Poor workmanship, and Fabric durability and colour fastness

The Contractor shall make good all such defects appearing within the said five

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

(5) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the S.O. If the Contractor shall refuse, neglect or fail to do so for any reason whatsoever, within such time as may be specified at the complete discretion of the S.O in a notice in writing from the S.O to make good any such defect, the Employer shall be entitled to engage others to make good the same and charge the costs thereof to the Contractor.

2.2

Chair Type a)

The chair shall be low back swivel chair on castors, with armrests and pneumatic height adjustment.

b)

The height of the backrest shall be easily adjustable. The forward and backward position shall also be easily adjustable to give proper support for the back.

c)

The overall height of the chair shall be minimum 350mm when the chair is at the lowest position. The seat shall be minimum 450mm wide and minimum 400mm deep.

d)

The seat height shall be adjustable from 350mm - 510mm.

3.0

Warranty

3.1

System Furniture a)

The Contractor shall install the whole of the system furniture to the satisfaction of the S.O, and warrants that the system furniture has been installed using good materials and with all due care and professional skill. The warranty shall cover any defects whatsoever and howsoever arising for a period of five (5) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The defects shall include, but not limited to, the following: i) faulty components/parts, ii) paint cracking and peeling, etc., iii) plastic laminate or veneer delamination, iv) fabric durability and colour fastness, v) rust, and vi) structural failure of panel

b)

The Contractor shall make good all such defects appearing within the said five (5) years from the date of substantial completion of the Works at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the S.O. If the Contractor shall refuse, neglect or fail to do so for any reason whatsoever, within such time as may be specified at the complete discretion of the S.O in a notice in writing from the S.O to make good any such defect, the Employer shall be entitled to engage others to make good the same and charge the costs thereof to the Contractor.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

c)

The Contractor shall, in addition, furnish to the Employer a written guarantee in respect of the system furniture installed, valid for a period of five (5) years from the date of substantial completion of the Works, by a third party acceptable to the Employer.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR OPERABLE WALLS 1.0

GENERAL

1.1

This specification covers the supply, delivery to site, installation, commissioning and warranty of the Operable Walls (also called Movable Acoustic Partition Systems).

1.2

The Movable Acoustic Partition Systems is to be supplied and installed by reputable and experienced specialist supplier / installer for the project.

1.3

The requirements specify herein shall be deemed minimum requirements and the Contractor shall exercise addition precautions as necessary to achieve the specified objectives.

2.0

SCOPE

2.1

The Contractor is to install Semi-Automatic Movable Acoustic Partition Systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

2.2

Semi-Automatic Movable Acoustic Partition Systems specified in this section shall be top supported, on all steel or aluminium track system.

2.3

Extend of Semi-Automatic Movable Acoustic Partition Systems shall be as shown in the drawings.

2.4

Butt ends of partitions to solid structure to effect sound isolation of the partitions. The bulkheads shall be provided as part of the Contract by the Movable Wall Contractor. The Contractor shall highlight any of the abutting construction that in his opinion will nullify the acoustic or any performance of the movable walls.

3.0

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION

3.1

This specification provides for Semi-Automatic Movable Acoustic Partition Systems at all positions shown in the accompanying drawings, to achieve a long term field sound insulation between adjacent spaces (as assessed in accordance with DIN EN ISO 717-1:1997), known as Noise Isolation Class (NIC).

3.2

But for room wider than twice the wall height, NIC levels should be reported for each third section of the walls. In all cases, measurement points should be taken between 1m distance and one-third height distance from the movable walls.

3.3

Each single Semi-Automatic Movable Acoustic Partition System shall show laboratory tested sound transmission losses conducted by accredited testing authorities in accordance with DIN EN 20 140-3:1995.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.4

All partitions when installed singly shall be tested upon commissioning based on the guidelines set our in the above standards, to achieve the following standard of performance : ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Room

Laboratory

Commissioning

Result

Test Result, minimum

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Between

STC 55db

NIC 46 - 49

Conference Room

(Single Run)

(Subject To Site Condition)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.0

SUBMITTALS

4.1

The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s detailed materials and fabrication specifications and installation instructions. Include catalogues, cuts of hardware, fastenings, and other data as required.

4.2

Written test report shall be furnished to the S. as measured by an independent accredited testing authority on a similar project.

4.3

The Contractor shall submit at least five (5) local projects using the same brand of SemiAutomatic Acoustic Movable Wall System for submission to S.. Visitation to completed project references shall be available upon request.

4.4

Upon award, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of operable wall assemblies not fully described by Manufacturer’s product data.

4.5

The Contractor shall submit, for assessment, independent field test report on their completed Semi-Automatic Movable Acoustic Partition Systems.

5.0 5.1

COMPOSITION OF ACCOUSTIC PANELS The panels shall be factory assembled, generally in accordance with manufacturer’s design drawings.

5.2

The panels shall comprise the following:

a)

Minimum 100mm thick with a minimum average surface weight of 51kg/m3.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

b)

The panels shall be of sound transmission in class (STC) of 55db

c)

Panels shall consist of individual panels constructed with 16mm free-oscillating chipboard or gypsum board or MDF board on both sides and incorporating mechanical operated top and bottom retractable sound seals of contact pressure at 1500 N each element, suspended at two points by multi-directional steel ball-rollers.

d)

All aluminium sides trims shall be of natural anodize incorporating interpolating magnetic strips of vertical strength at 70 N/run and vinyl finish seals.

5.3

The overhead track shall be of steel or aluminium construction supported from the structural system as schematically shown in the drawings. The track design should facilitate with 3 mm air gap to minimize structure bond noise. The track shall incorporate anti-twisting lateral tolerance feature.

5.4

Transfer track shall be provided. The Contractor must check on the site conditions for the allowable location of this track so that the wall transfer movement will be clear of all wall finishes and on-wall interior installations. Only T-track is allowed.

5.5

Carrier shall be of heavy duty multidirectional-steel roller (R-roller) carrier

equipped

with minimum 4 stainless steel ball bearing wheels to suit panel weight.

5.6

For panel height more than 5m, carrier shall be of heavy duty multidirectional-steel roller (MRroller) carrier equipped with minimum 2 heavy-duty stainless steel ball bearing wheels to suit panel weight.

5.7

Top and floor seals shall be electrically activated with manual override to seal the panel sound-tight with respect to the track and floor.

5.8

The 4 corner blocks at each corner of the panel shall also be activated to close

gap

between joining stile at top and bottom of each panel.

5.9

The floor seal shall incorporate a compensating system to accommodate panel clearance of 35mm with respect to the floor and any changes in clearance due to structural deflection. The compensating system shall have a contact pressure of 1500N between the panel and the structure floor. All top and floor seals shall be out of contact with the respective surface during

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

movements of the panels. Vertical Magnetic Seals must be included and perform acoustically matching and sound tight between panels.

5.10

The vertical seal shall be based on a tongued and grooved principle to ensure optimum sealing with vertical magnetic strip to provide a force of up to 70 N/RM with acoustical labyrinth minimum 40mm.

5.11

Expandable panels may be provided as final closure for each partition and of the same construction as panels. Expandable panels shall have similar and effective top and bottom seals.

5.12

Additional elements such as movable fixed jamb, 90 degree angled elements shall be provided with mechanical seal to meet the acoustic requirements if it is indicated in the tender drawing provided as per drawing requirements.

5.13

Horizontal top and bottom retractable seals shall work as a “Car Jack Principal” flexible springloaded mechanism to accommodate the unevenness flooring, if any, in the designated area. Half-turn cranking mechanism with drop seals is not acceptable.

6.0

SUPPORTS AND BULKHEADS

6.1

The Contractor is to provide structural members designed to accept the weight of the wall system, and configured to receive top track supports in accordance with movable wall manufacturer details. The structure, however, shall be designed to accommodate the particular requirements of the Movable Acoustic Partition Systems proposed by the Contractor. All necessary requirements for designing, constructing the support system to the proposed systems shall be worked out by the Contractor and submitted to S. for approval.

6.3

The construction of ceiling bulkheads to prevent flanking is within this Contract. The Contractor must ensure all gaps are covered to prevent sound transmission through the supporting structure. The bulkheads shall be constructed with 2 layers 12.5mm gypsum boards on each side incorporating a 3 mm air gap between each layer of gypsum board in order to avoid structure bond noise leakage. and it shall be insulated with 40mm layer of rockwool insulation of 60kg/m3 density. The Contractor is to provide all barrier/penetration seals for all building services penetrating the bulkheads to prevent acoustical flanking transmission.

7.0

MAINTENANCE

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

7.1

In case of damage of the surface panels, replacement must be possible at job site without having to roll any panels out of the tracks to prevent any discontinuation of function of the center. The replacement shall include field adjustment carried out at job-site.

7.2

Product shall be of clipped-on system that allows maintenance and servicing to be done on site without having to dismantle or dislodge the panels from the overhead track system and therefore monoblock system, whereby, the panels are fixed directly onto the frame are not acceptable.

8.0

DETAILS

8.1

Shop-drawings to show all panel layout in open and close position. Single or Double pass door to be provided with locks and automatic drop seal to meet the acoustic requirement if it is indicated in the tender drawing.

8.2

The movable wall supplier/contractor should provide their own details based on similar requirements but to suit site requirements to achieve the required sound insulation.

9.0

9.1

WARRANTY

The Contractor shall warrant the Semi-Automatic Movable Acoustic Partition System against all defects of manufacture and installation for five (5) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR OUTDOOR FITNESS EQUIPMENT

1.0

GENERAL This specification relates to the proposed fitness equipment at external space of the School premises, as indicated in the Tender Drawings. This specification also covers the rubber safety matting material used in conjunction with the exercise fitness equipment.

2.0

SOURCES OF EQUIPMENT

2.1

The Contractor may source for suitable outdoor fitness equipment that complies to guidelines by Ministry of Education (MOE). The Contractor to submit names of preferred supplier and their track records, types of equipment proposed, for S.O’s selection and approval, before confirmation of orders, supply, delivery and installation.

2.2

A letter of country of origin from the manufacturer is to be submitted.

2.3

The play equipment shown on the drawings are only indicative. The Contractor may propose similar play activities from approved specialists and these are to be submitted to the S.O for approval during the tender or quotation.

3.0

SAFETY COMPLIANCE AND TESTS

3.1

Tests and Documentation The Contractor shall ensure that the Fitness Equipment installed is in compliance with either one of the following standards of its latest publication: a)

F1487-01 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Playground Equipment for Public Use. b) SS457: 1999 - Playground Equipment for Public Use. c) EN1176 (1-9): 1998 to 1999 - Playground Equipment. General Safety Requirements and Test Methods. 3.2

Laboratory Tests Laboratory Test shall be based on the items below: a) Components and Parts b) Structural Integrity. c) Installation. d) Accessibility. e) Maintenance. f) Labeling.

3.3

On-site Tests Contractor to arrange for a post installation audit on conformance of the installation of equipment to the above standards. The audit shall be conducted by Playground

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Inspectors that are certified under the National Playground Safety Institute (NPSI-USA) or other similar and approved certification bodies. The name of the Inspector and his/her valid certification number must be indicated on the report. The audit report shall include all relevant photographs. The Employer may engage an independent Playground Inspector to verify the Contractor’s Inspection and Test Reports. Should the Independent Inspection reports otherwise because the playground is unable to comply fully with the standards, the Employer shall recover from the Contractor the cost incurred for the independent inspection. The Contractor shall be required to carry out all rectifications to the playground to comply with the standards. 3.4

Wheelchair Accessibility The playground shall allow for Playground Wheelchair accessibility. The layout and equipment shall comply with the local BCA Codes and American with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.

3.5

Product Liability The Playground Manufacturer must provide a Product Liability Insurance of not less than US$1 Million. A copy of the Product Liability Insurance Certificate must be produced to the Employer for verification.

3.6

Safety Signage A safety and age appropriateness signage is to be provided in this contract by the Contractor. The signage shop-drawing to be submitted to S.O for approval, before fabrication and installation on site. The font sizes, lettering colour and background colour of sign is to be clear and contrasting for clarity of viewing by equipment users. The fonts are to be durable and lasting under external weather conditions.

4.0

PATENTS, TRADEMARKS, COPYRIGHT, ETC The design is protected by International Patent and Copyright Laws. Anyone or any company found to have made copies of this equipment or to have purchased infringing copies of this equipment may be subject to legal suit under the International Patent and Copyright Laws.

5.0

INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

5.1

Installation and maintenance drawings

Explicit installation instructions shall be provided which will include a detailed top view and footing drawings plus written instructions to assure proper installation of the equipment.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

5.2

Maintenance checklists

Maintenance guidelines and inspection checklists shall also be provided.

The provided

installation instructions and maintenance instructions shall be "project" specific containing component information that is part of the playground design.

A “generic” package of

installation instruction and maintenance instructions is not acceptable.

6.0

COMPONENTS AND PARTS

6.1

Material All materials shall be structurally sound and suitable for safe play. Durability shall be ensured on all steel parts by the use of time-tested coatings such as zinc plating, zinc nickel plating, powder coating, “plastisol” vinyl, etc. Colour choices shall be to S.O’s selection and approval.

6.2

Hardware All temper-proof bolts, tee nuts and washers shall be stainless steel. All other hardware shall be a yellow dichromate finish over zinc plated steel. Tamper-proof bolts shall be supplied for all clamp assemblies. Capped locknuts that cover both ends of bolts shall also be supplied.

6.3

Eco-Armour Coating & Decks All decks, stairs, and site products shall be coated with an environmentally- sensitive polyethylene coating that is PVC and phthalate-free. This textured, UV stabilized thermoplastic coating shall be slip-resistant, tough and durable. It must not contain toxic materials or volatile organic compounds, and be recyclable.

6.4

Polyester Powder Coating Powder coating is electrostatically applied at a thickness of 2 to 5 mils (.002 - .005). Powder coating produces a highly decorative finish having a hard, smooth surface, which is resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and mechanical damage. All galvanized tubing has a factory-applied clear acrylic polymer coating. All components shall be free of excess weld and weld spalls. After fabrication all weld joints are to be thoroughly cleaned using a chipping hammer and wire brush to remove all weld slag from weld joint. Prior to finishing, components shall be cleaned with a three-stage preparation process. Components are coated with TGIC polyester powder and are cured at temperatures between 375° and 400° F. Epoxy or hybrid paints are not acceptable. ASTM Specifications: B-117 (Salt Spray Resistance Test), D-2794 (Impact Resistance Test), D-1734 (Mandrel Flexibility Test), D-2247 (Humidity Resistance Test), D-822 (Weatherability Test), D-3363 (Pencil Hardness Test), D-3359-B (Crosshatch Adhesion Test), and D-2454 (Overbake Resistance Test)

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

6.5

Rotationally Moulded Polyethylene Parts The parts shall be rotationally molded from color-compounded, first quality, linear low density polyethylene. Dry-blended or molded-in resins are not acceptable. Colorcompounded polyethylene are 23 times stronger than dry blended resins providing better bonded strength with greater surface contact. Compounded color provides superior colorfastness, UV resistance, and impact resistance with solid color molecules. Polyethylene shall be ultraviolet (UV) stabilized to UV-8 and have anti-static additives. Cross-sectional design shall be .25 in. (6 mm) nominal thickness, double wall construction. ASTM Specifications: D-1238 (Melt Index), D-1505 (Material Density), D638 (Tensile Strength), D-648 (Heat Distortion Temperature), D-790 (Flexural Modulus), D-1693 (Environmental Stress Crack Resistance), D-2565 (Ultraviolet). Meets UL94HB Horizontal Burn Test. Shall meet Arm Test for impact strength (@ minus 40°C) (.25 in. thickness). Shall meet color change criteria (QUV 500 hours per SAE 1960-89). All Slides and Roofs shall be linear low-density polyethylene, which contains UV inhibitors to resist fading. Plastic Panels shall be rotationally molded linear low-density polyethylene, which contains UV inhibitors to resist fading.

6.6

Support Posts The support posts shall be fabricated from 3-1/2” OD 12 Gauge galvanised steel tubing. Tubing has an average tensile strength of 555,000 psi, and an average yield strength point of 50,000 psi. They shall be finished with baked-on powder coating paint.

6.7

Steel Tubing Tie Rods, Climbing Rungs, Chinning / Turning Bars, Activity Barriers, Slide Barriers, and Pipe Wall barriers shall be fabricated of 1-1/16”OD, 14 gauge galvanised steel tubing. Sliding Poles, handrails for swing bridge, side rails for wood arch climber, and chain net anchor rods shall be fabricated of 2-3/8” OD, 12 gauge galvanised steel tubing.

6.8

Attachment Fittings Pipe Clamps, tee fittings, swing hangers and deck hangers shall be cast of a high tensile strength alloy aluminium. Deck clamps shall be hinged on one side to facilitate installation. Swing hangers shall be fitted with an oil-impregnated bronze bearing.

6.9

Stairs Enclosed Stairs shall be fabricated of one-piece perforated metal step plate, with 11gauge hot-rolled steel plate side rails.

6.10

Exterior Finish

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

All metal and aluminium components shall be put through a 3-stage wash process including a phosphoric acid / flouridic acid wash, then a fresh rinse and a nonchromated rinse with sealer. All components shall be oven dried prior to electrostatically applied polyester dry powder coating. Components shall be oven cured at temperatures in excess of 400 degree Fahrenheit and tested in accordance with ASTM B-117. 6.11

Rubber Safety Matting The Contractor shall prepare ground for installing rubber safety matting. This matting shall comprise a substrate layer (minimum 75mm thick) heavy-duty black rubber chip amalgamated layer, with a top finish layer (approximately 25mm thick) of contrasting colour. The rubber matting shall be laid in uniform layering, without joints. Such joints, if necessary, shall only be located at the point of change in colour of the top surface.

7.0

WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide warranty for the Outdoor Fitness Equipment for a period of three (5) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The Contractor shall also provide warranty for the rubber safety matting for a period of three (3) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality of fitness equipment, associated parts, rubber material, occurrence of rust, and any damage not due to fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR PAINTING 1.0

GENERALLY The Contractor shall follow strictly to the performance standards for the painting based on approved standard or equivalent. Unless otherwise agreed by the S.O, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the S.O, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted. The specifications of paint cover the following types: a) Emulsion b) Enamel c) Epoxy d) Polyurethane e) Acrylic

2.0

STANDARDS

2.1.

The following standards are to be complied with where applicable SS ISO 1248 ;SS ISO 3262; SS CP 22; SS 5; SS 7; SS 34; SS 37; SS 38; SS 82 SS 88; SS 90; SS 91; SS 150; SS 269; SS 341;SS 345; SS 494 Singapore

2.2

The Contractor may propose any similar or equivalent material provided that it complies with the performance standards.

2.4

The painting works shall be properly applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and requirements.

3.0

PREPARATION BEFORE ACTUAL WORKS

3.1

Prior to proceeding with the works, the Contractor shall prepare and obtain the S.O’s approval for all relevant details and method statement showing the painting works.

3.2

The Contractor shall protect the treated wall against damage and abuse by other trades either by covering with polythene sheets, plywood, gunny sacks or other means deem suitable.

3.3

Acceptance tests, if required, shall be conducted to all areas in accordance with approved performance standards. Ensure that the completed works comply with fire regulations

3.4

Mock-up samples for selected location shall be done for approval prior to commencement of works.

3.5

Ensure the paintworks achieve uniform color and texture as that accepted in a mockup panel, with no defects which would impair appearance.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.6

The Contractor shall only apply paint to firm and dry surfaces, prepared in accordance with good trade practice. All materials to be applied by skilled trades people. Paint to be evenly and thoroughly applied, using clean brushes, rollers or spraying equipment. Make edges of completed paintwork adjoining other materials, building elements and different coloured paintwork clean and sharp without overlapping.

3.7

The Contractor shall clean all surfaces to be painted of all oil, grease, dirt, mould, mildew, loose or flaking paint and all other material deleterious to achieving a good paint finish prior to filling, sanding or painting, smoothen surface irregularities, fill and patch up all joints, cracks, holes and other depressions with appropriate non-shrink, ultra violet resistant fillers suitable for the substrate. Finish off flush with surface and abrade to a smooth, even finish.

4.0

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

4.1

Deliver materials to site ready-mixed (except for two pack paint products) in original sealed containers with labels intact showing brand name, product name and manufacturers batch number.

4.2

Store materials in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Use in order of delivery and before service life expiry date. After stoppage of work and when containers are not in use, close the containers (empty or otherwise) and remove to the designated storage area. Stir liquid paint so that solids are fully and evenly incorporated Shake clear varnishes, do not stir.

4.3

Make good defects to the satisfaction of the S.O prior to any coating work being carried out. The types of materials used in preparation must be as recommended by the material manufacturers and the coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.

5.0

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Ensure that paint thinners, tints, turpentine and fillers, are manufactured by the same manufacturer as the coatings, or are approved by the coating manufacturer for use with their paint products.

6.0

PAINT COATING SYSTEMS

6.1

Refer to the chart below for possible permutations for painting internal surfaces and standards to comply with where applicable.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SUBSTRATE

SYSTEM

PRIMER

MASONRY AND CONCRETE

Conventional

Solvent borne acrylic sealer

STANDARD

FIRST COAT

Water borne acrylic sealer

FERROUS METAL

Conventional

High performance

NON

Conventional

FERROUS METAL

Conventional

BS 4652

Alkyd micaceous iron oxide Epoxy zinc phosphate primer

AS 2855

Epoxy micaceous iron oxide Etch primer

AS 2855

(compulsory for galvanised metals) Alkyd zinc phosphate

High performance

WOOD

Polyurethane varnish Alkyd zinc phosphate primer

primer Alkyd micaceous iron oxide Etch primer

Epoxy zinc phosphate primer Epoxy micaceous iron oxide Aluminium wood primer

Polyurethane varnish Transparent wood stain

BS 4652

Alkyd undercoat

Epoxy amine

FINISHING COAT(S) Acrylic emulsion

STANDARD

Acrylic textured topcoat Polyurethane paint Alkyd enamel topcoat

AS/NZS 4548.3

Alkyd micaceous iron oxide Acrylic aliphatic urethane

AS 2855

SS 150

SS 7

Solvent borne acrylic topcoat Alkyd

Alkyd enamel

undercoat

topcoat

BS 4652

Alkyd micaceous

SS 7

AS 2855

iron oxide AS 2855

Acrylic aliphatic urethane Solvent borne acrylic topcoat

BS 4652

AS 2855

SS 38

N PQS A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating

Alkyd undercoat

Alkyd enamel SS 7 topcoat Water borne acrylic topcoat Modified alkyd transparent wood finish Polyurethane varnish Transparent wood stain

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

6.2

The products listed have been selected for the types of surfaces or substrates, and the standard of quality particularly applicable to the specific surfaces to be painted or coated.

6.3

Supply all primer and first coats, intermediate coats and finishing or top coat from one manufacturer for use on the same surface. The various appropriate coats must be recommended by the manufacturer for the particular substrate and take into consideration the condition of the substrate and usage of the premises. The various coats must be compatible. Where surfaces have been treated or applied with preservative or fire retardant, check with the paint manufacturer for the types of paint products suitable for use on such surfaces.

6.4

The paint products selected must be compatible with the treatment or paint product.

7.0

PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SURFACES

7.1

Remove form oil, mould release oil, laitance, grease, dirt and debris from concrete surfaces using a suitable solvent and then neutralize. Remove grit, dirt, loose materials, mortar drippings and the like; remove all nibs, projections and protuberances. Patch concrete surfaces with a non shrink cementitious grout, or filler compound, suitable for such use filling all cracks, depressions, and voids to provide smooth surfaces. Refer any defects other than surface imperfections to the S.O before patching. Prior to application, allow the concrete to cure for a minimum of 30 days.

7.2

Test the concrete surfaces for moisture content and ensure that the moisture content is below 15% if a Protimeter scale is used and below 6% if a Kett meter is used.

8.0

PREPARATION OF WOOD SURFACES

8.1

Sand down the wood surfaces to remove all roughness, loose edges, slivers, splinters, and brush to remove dust.

8.2

Remove all grease and dirt using a solvent recommended by the paint manufacturer.

8.3

Fill all cracks, splits, nail holes, screw holes, and surface defects with wood putty or non shrink compound after the priming coat has been applied. Apply putty flush with the surface, sand smooth and touch-up with primer when dry.

8.4

For varnishing work, ensure the putty matches the finished colour. Cover knots and sappy areas with two coats of appropriate wood sealer before priming. Prior to installation, prime fire-retardant treated wood or preservative treated wood, required to be painted or stained, with shellac or other selected sealer, as recommended by the manufacturer.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

9.0

PREPARATION OF RENDERED SURFACES

9.1

Allow surfaces to dry prior to applying primer coat. Remove any efflorescence and brush down. Scrape off all plaster nibs and other projections and sand smooth. Do not apply any primer coat until efflorescence ceases. Cut out all scratches, cracks, holes depressions and voids and fill with non-shrink grout, patching plaster or other selected patching material. Allow to dry, refill if necessary sand smooth to provide a flush, smooth surface.

9.2

Test the rendered surfaces for moisture content and ensure that the moisture content is below 15% if a Protimeter scale is used and below 6% if a Kett meter is used or this application.

10.0

PREPARATION OF MASONRY SURFACES

10.1

The Co

10.2

Fill cracks, holes and voids, with appropriate cementitious grout, or filler compound, and wipe surface so that it has the same texture as the adjacent masonry surface.

11.0

PREPARATION OF FERROUS METAL SURFACES

11.1

The Contractor shall abrade rusted, and marred surfaces back to bare metal and grind smooth all rough surfaces before priming. Clean galvanised surfaces with a galvanized cleaner of an approved proprietary brand, then wash with clear water.

11.2

Prime galvanised surfaces with etching primer or epoxy primer (suitable for galvanised metal) prior to coating. Shot blast clean mild steel surfaces to receive high performance coatings in accordance with SA 2.5 from SIS 055900 Mechanically clean mild steel surfaces to receive conventional coatings in accordance with ST3 from SIS 055900 Seal rusty spots that are difficult to remove to bare metal using chelated polymeric oxirane 100% solid epoxy primer.

12.0

EXPOSED UPVC PRODUCTS Unless otherwise specified, apply one coat of polyamide epoxy primer followed by two coats of enamel paint.

13.00 GALVANISED STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS Unless otherwise specified, apply: a) b) c) d) e) f) 14.0

One coat etching primer One coat lead and chromate free primer One coat alkyd based paint undercoat Two coats coat alkyd based enamel paint One coat of Polyamide Epoxy primer Two coats Enamel paint WARRANTY

The Contractor shall provide warranty for painting works (either enamel paint,

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

emulsion paint, architectural coating / polyurethane paint, epoxy paint or acrylic paint) for a period of five (5) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality of material, prevention of fungal and mildew growth, peeling of paint, occurrence of rust, and any damage not due to fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR SAFETY SURFACE MATERIAL (FOR OUTDOOR FITNESS AREA) 1.0

GENERAL

The material to be installed on the playground shall be cast-in-situ EPDM or its equivalent subject to the approval of the S.O. The area shall cover the designated ‘Outdoor Fitness Area’ as indicated in the drawings. 2.0

DESCRIPTION OF SAFETY RUBBER SURFACE Safety rubber surface shall be poured in place, trowelled to provide for a resilient, seamless, rubber surface installed over the specified base. The Contractor shall be responsible for all labour, materials, tools, equipment and applicable taxes to perform all work and services for the installation of the surface.

3.0

MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 3.1

Polyurethane Primer and Binder

100% Polyurethane Binding Agent - Methylene Dephenyl Isocyanate (MDI) based binder with not more than 2% Tobulene Diphenyl Isocyanate (TDI) added.

3.2

Poured Cap

Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) pigmented synthetic rubber granules (size 1-4mm) with a minimum EPDM content of 20%. Coloured EPDM must be UV resistance. Recycled Black granules are not allowed to be used for mixing with coloured EPDM granules.

3.3

Poured Mat

The impact layer is to be precise combination of recycled black, shredded rubber or rubber granules and polyurethane binder.

4.0

SAMPLE AND SHOP-DRAWINGS

Contractor to submit samples, technical brochure and shop-drawings to indicate the material proposed to be installed, corner / edge treatment, substrate and surface m aterial, rubber quality and sizings for S.O’s approvals

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

5.0

BASE REQUIREMENTS

The base shall have a specific minimum slope (2%). Asphalt base shall be allowed to cure to a minimum of fourteen (14) days and new concrete shall be allowed to cure to a minimum of seven (7) days prior to commencement of surfacing. A compacted stone base will not require curing time but will be subject to slope and tolerance specifications. 6.0

METHOD STATEMENT

Before installation of Safety Rubber Surface, the Contractor / Specialist shall provide a detailed method statement for S.O’s approval prior to commencement of installation. 7.0

INSTALLATION 7.1

Thickness

Total depth of the surface will vary according to fall height. The equipment supplier is to provide the exact fall height requirements. The specialist shall determine the thickness of the installation and to meet the standards as specified in the various standards, refer to Quality Assurances.

7.2

Poured Mat (Impact Course)

The impact course must be composed or recycled rubber SBR (Styrene Butadiene Rubber) and be free of foreign matter. The impact course will be poured in placed by means of screeding and hand-trowelled to maintain a seamless application. All rubber in the impact course will be of a selected quality and consistent blend of recycled rubber sizings to achieve maximum porosity and minimise residue.

7.3

Poured Cap

The poured cap material shall be composed of EPDM granular rubber only. The cap will be poured in place by means of a screeding and hand trowelled to maintain a

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

seamless application.. All rubber shall remain consistent in gradation and size. COLOURED TINTED BINDER WILL NOT BE ALLOWED.

7.4

Edges

Surface edges shall be flushed with edge of adjacent area or tapered to provide safe transition. 8.0

QUALITY ASSURANCE 8.1

The Contractor and Specialist shall ensure that the Safety Rubber Surfacing installed have FULL compliance with either of the following standards of its latest publication: a)

F1292-96 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment b) EN 1177 is the new European standard for playground safety flooring. c) SS 495: 2001 Impact Attenuation of surface systems under and around playground equipment.

9.0

WARRANTY Contractor / Specialist is to provide written warranty for a period of three (3) years from date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the works. The warranty is to cover against material delamination and discoloration, not arising from fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR SANITARYWARE FITTINGS, PLUMBING, DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE WORKS 1.0

2.0

GENERALLY 1.1

This specification is for the supply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning of sanitaryware fittings, plumbing, drainage and sewerage works for all toilets, wet areas and pantry areas in the School premises.

1.2

The Sanitary Plumbing, Sewerage and Drainage Works shall be executed by the Contractor if he is a licensed plumber, otherwise the works shall be executed by a fully licensed firm and shall be in full compliance with the ENV, Public Utilities Board's Bye-Laws and any other Statutory requirements and if the works are not satisfactory in all respects, the Contractor shall rectify the defects at his own cost.

1.3

The Contractor shall allow for all builder's work in connection with sanitary plumbing such as cutting, chasing, coring, fixing brackets, block up and protection, touching up or making good walls and floors, etc.

1.4

All expenses incurred for stamping fees required by the Public Utilities Board shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.5

The Contractor shall obtain a list of samples for sanitary plumbing work from the S.O. and submit all samples as required for approval before any sanitary plumbing work commences on site.

1.6

Water and hosereel supply, soil water discharge shall be read in conjunction with M&E Specification of the Tender Document. The installation and testing of the water service pipes shall be in accordance with SS CP 48.

1.7

Test the entire Sanitary Plumbing, Sewerage and Drainage Works on completion to the satisfaction of the S.O or his designated Representative.

1.8

The Contractor shall, on completion of the works, submit one (1) set negative and 2 sets printed as-built drawings showing the layout of the works to the S.O.

1.9

This specification is to be read in conjunction with Sanitaryware schedules, Civil, Structural, and Mechanical and Electrical portions of Tender Document.

Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes and Cowls 2.1

Unless otherwise indicated, soil, waste and vent pipes and cowls shall be approved socketless enamel paint coated cast iron, internally coated with epoxy-tar with hubless joints including fittings, anti-rust paint and fixed to walls, slabs and columns with fixing accessories all in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

2.2

Unless otherwise indicated, all soil and waste pipes shall be of 150mm diameter and

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

vent pipes of 100mm diameter, fitting to walls, slabs and columns with approved clips all in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 2.3

Pipes below ground floor shall be cast iron pipes laid on concrete bed and surround as specified. For sites with poor soil conditions, ductile pipes shall be used.

3.0

4.0

FLOOR WASTE, TRAPS, GULLEYS, ETC. 3.1

Unless otherwise indicated, floor waste, traps and gulley shall be approved enameled paint coated cast iron with 100mm diameter no-hub bottom outlet, combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable 150mm diameter nickel bronze strainer with square openings and anti-vandal screw fixing complete with 150 x 150mm heavy duty stainless steel hinged gratings and frames to locations indicated on the drawings including setting into concrete floor, jointing to pipes and making good surrounding.

3.2

The inlet and outgo of the floor waste and trap shall not be less than 75mm in diameter.

3.3

The grating for a floor waste and trap shall be fixed at least 5mm below the lowest point of a graded floor. The grating for the common toilets shall be stainless steel grating of grade 304.

Sanitary Fittings Generally 4.1

Sanitary fittings shall be ENV approved types and obtained from an approved supplier on the ENV's list to the approval of the S.O.

4.2

The Supplier should also be ISO-certified whose sanitarywares are PSBapproved.

4.3

The Contractor shall supply and install sanitary fittings according to one of the product names specified herein or other equal and approved by the S.O or as indicated in the sanitary fitting schedules if no product name is specified, sanitary fittings complying with specification and relevant authority's requirements to S.O's approval.

4.4

All sanitary fittings shall include for assembling, providing all jointing materials, making all connections to services, waste or soil pipes, overflow and vents and cutting and pinning or plugging and screwing to walls, floors or setting in vanity counter or fitments and making good to provide waterproof joints.

4.5

Notwithstanding the above, samples of all sanitary fittings complete with accessories together with brochures, catalogues and details to be used in the works shall be submitted to the S.O for approval and no sanitary fitting shall be installed until it has been so approved.

4.6

Deliver and store goods in the manufacturer's original protective packaging to prevent soiling or physical damage and secure under lock and key, with access only by authorized personnel. Handle goods in a manner to prevent damage to finished surfaces and operating mechanisms.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

4.7 4.8

5.0

All parts/integral components not specifically described but which are necessary for the complete and satisfactory functional performance shall be included by the Contractor in his tender. All accessories shall preferably be obtained from the same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by the S.O.

4.9

All sanitary fittings and accessories shall be delivered to site properly labeled with the place of installation clearly indicated for checking. The accessories should be delivered complete for each installation.

4.10

All sanitary fittings complete with accessories shall be fixed by the Contractor strictly in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions.

SANITARYWARE FITTINGS 5.1

Contractor to note and source for supply, delivery and installation of sanitaryware fittings as per Schedule List (see Tender Drawings).

5.2

Contractor may propose similar and approved equivalent for each item of fitting. But must take into consideration that they comply to relevant Authorities requirements on water saving, handicapped friendly, tested with proper test certificates.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR SIGNAGES 1.0

SCOPE OF CONTRACT

1.1.

The works in this Contract shall include the design, supply, fabrication, delivery, installation of all signages (inclusive of brackets and structural supports, necessary electrical works and reinstatement or making good of completed building finishes) as shown or described in or inferred from the Drawings and Specifications.

1.2.

The identification, general layout, locations of signs, sign lettering and other pertinent information regarding the signages are as detailed in the Signage Drawings.

1.3.

The scope of works shall also include related works where applicable in connection with the installation of such signages at the locations indicated on the Drawings.

1.4.

The Contract Works shall include the following: 1.4.1.

Signages - Design, supply, fabrication, delivery and installation of various types of signages including accessories and its associated electrical works as shown in the Signage Drawings.

1.4.2. Electrical Works - Design, supply, delivery, installation and testing of equipment, materials, wiring, cables and all other items of works deemed necessary to fulfill the requirements of all electrical works. The Contractor shall refer to the Particular Specifications for electrical works. Generally, power points for all illuminated signs will be provided by others. The Contractor shall however allow for an extension wiring of up to 2 metres from the provided points in his scope of electrical works for the final positioning of these signs. 1.4.3. Reinstatement Works - Supply labour, materials and equipment to reinstate all areas of works disturbed in accordance with the Specifications. 1.4.4. The general description of the Works mentioned above is only for the guidance of the Contractor and any error or omission shall not constitute a ground for claim by the Contractor. The onus for investigating and ensuring the actual extent and nature of the works comprised in this Contract prior to the submission of the tender is solely with the Contractor. Any doubts should be clarified with the SO before the tender is submitted. No claim arising out of lack of clarity or availability of information will be entertained. Allowance for any or all these provisions shall be made in the tender.

2.0

LOCATION OF SITE

2.1

The site for the Works is located at St Stephen’s School, 20 Siglap View, Singapore 455789.

2.2

The Contractor is advised to acquaint himself with the actual site conditions and allow for any contingency with regards to the means of access and any special site restrictions. The access shall be approved by the S.O and the Contractor shall

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

comply with any conditions required by the relevant Authority. 3.0

DRAWINGS

3.1

The Drawings referred to in this Contract are as listed in the Document and shall include all drawings related to or in amplification thereof as may be issued by the S.O from time to time during the progress of the Works.

3.2

All shop-drawings submitted by the Contractor and approved by the S.O are deemed to be part of the As-built Drawings.

3.3

All drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be supplied free of charge in four sets and on paper.

4.0

PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF CONTRACT WORKS

4.1

The Contractor is required to complete the Works within the Overall Programme submitted by the Contractor and approved by the S.O, or such extensions thereof. Contractor to take note of inspection dates to be advised by the S.O pertaining to the proposed inspections by Registered Inspectors and other authorities to be carried out to obtain Temporary Fire Permit (TFP) and Temporary Occupation Permit (TOP).

4.2

The Contractor's compliance with the period for completion shall be inclusive of design and submission of shop-drawings for approval by the S.O, fabrication, shipment (if any), delivery and installation of the whole of the Works included in this Contract.

4.3

The Contractor is cautioned that the period for completion shall be strictly adhered to. Failure to complete the Works within the stipulated time will render the Contractor liable to pay liquidated and ascertained damages as specified.

4.4

The Defects Liability Period shall be 12 months from the date of Practical Completion of the Project or handing over of Contract Works, whichever is later.

5.0

PRELIMINARIES FOR THE CONTRACT Each individual item in the Preliminaries must be priced and written in ink. The Contractor may, however, insert INC. (included) in the money column where it is the accepted practice to include with other items the value of (a) items of a minor nature and/or (b) general clauses (the value of which can be included in the cost of several individual items).

6.0

BREAKDOWN OF PRICES The Contractor shall price the items contained in the Breakdown of Prices and submit these with his tender. The rates inserted by the Contractor shall be subject to the agreement of the S.O before the contract is signed. The rates contained therein shall be used as the basis for the pricing of variations.

7.0

DECLARATION

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

The Contractor shall duly complete and sign the declarations in respect of the following: a) Projects currently undertaken by Tenderer b) Persons empowered to act c) GST status of the firm. 8.0

PROGRAMME OF WORKS

8.1

The Contractor's program of works shall be in sufficient details to enable the S.O to properly evaluate its various activities, procedures, timings, etc during tender evaluation.

8.2

Concurrent installation of signages for various storeys are expected and the Contractor shall allow for this.

9.0

DISCREPANCIES

9.1

Should discrepancy be discovered in any of the documents contained in this Contract, the Contractor shall immediately refer the matter to the S.O before the works are commenced. The S.O will decide as to which document will take precedence and his decision will be final. Any cost for remedial action shall be borne by the Contractor.

9.2

The whole of the Contract Works especially figured dimensions, etc must be checked on site to ensure correctness before fabrication and any serious discrepancy immediately reported to the S.O prior to works being installed.

9.3

In case of any difference in cost as a result of any discrepancy, the Contract sum shall be deemed to have included for any discrepancy, which bears the highest cost. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim for extra cost or time due to any discrepancy.

10.0

SITE CONDITIONS

10.1

Before commencement of the Contract Works, the Contractor shall visit the site to ascertain and satisfy for himself that all dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings are correct. No claim whatsoever shall be entertained for inaccuracy of dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and for compliance of this condition.

10.2

The Contractor shall assess for himself the site conditions in conjunction with access to site, signages, locations, unloading facility, storage, sanitation, canteen facilities, electrical power, lighting, watching, security arrangement, site office, restricted site conditions, co-ordination of works with that of other Contractors and in any other related matters, and to accommodate these information in his tender price and in the programme for the Contract Works.

11.0

TYPES OF SIGNAGES The types of signages are indicated in the Tender document. These are for illustrations only, and the awarded Contractor may propose own design for the

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

signages, subject to S.O’s approval. 12.0

LETTERINGS, PICTOGRAMS & FINAL ARTWORKS

12.1

The Contractor shall provide two sets of final type of art of all copies except for die cut vinyl lettering where applicable as follows: a)

Provide film positives from originals produced.

b)

Provide full size pictogram photographically enlarged to the dimensions shown in the drawings unless noted for approval of letter and pictogram spacing, typography and general review.

c)

Mount all film positives in the correct position on a transparent thin plastic sheet or film on which the outline of the signage panel had been indicated and submit to the S.O where appropriate, for his approval.

12.2

The Contractor shall submit complete artwork for each individual sign.

13.0

SYMBOLS AND ARROWS The Contractor shall enlarge these to the full size dimensions shown on the drawings and submit for approval full size patterns in the form specified above.

14.0

SHOP- DRAWINGS

14.1

Before the commencement of any fabrication or ordering of any materials, goods or works, the Contractor shall be required to submit for the S.O’s approval, shopdrawings, final artworks, copy layout, test certificates, samples, mock-ups, samples of each type of signages and of all relevant details as to materials, sizes, construction and all other details and information as requested by the S.O.

14.2

Any delay to the completion of the Contract Works as a result of late submission of shop-drawings, samples, etc for the S.O's approval shall not entitle the Contractor to any claim for any time extension.

14.3

The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of paper prints of complete shop- drawings of all signages to the S.O for approval. Full size details of all exposed edges, joints between materials and details which affect the appearance shall be included. Prints of copy layouts with white lettering on black background shall also be provided.

14.4

Shop-drawings shall be submitted well in advance and no works whatsoever shall commence without prior approval on the shop-drawings by the S.O.

14.5

The detailed shop-drawings shall be based on the outline sign units as shown on the tender drawings or such other drawings as may be duly amended following the award of the Contract. The shop-drawings to be submitted by the Contractor shall contain sufficient information as to enable the S.O to check the Contractor's submission for compliance with the Specifications or other tender requirements and to assess the soundness and suitability of the proposed construction with regards to the purpose for which it is intended. The details shall include but not necessarily be limited to the

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

following items: a)

Various sectional views of components, fully dimensioned, and accompanied with detailed descriptions of parts of each component.

b)

Type of each material used and thickness or gauge of each members.

c)

Type of finish.

d)

Jointing details showing how composite units are to be connected together.

e)

Mounting details of signage units to the door, floor, ceiling or wall where appropriate.

f)

The joints for each and every item of metalwork’s shall be accurately set, cut and neatly executed and finished with no protrusion, gaps or misalignment. They shall be of stout and sturdy construction to match the purpose for which the metalwork’s are intended.

14.6

Approval of the Contractor's submissions does not in any way constitute a complete and thorough check but merely indicates that the design, general method of proposed construction and detailing of the drawings are generally satisfactory. Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in writing by the S.O on particular terms or provisions in the Contract document, approval does not imply that the Contractor may deviate from the remaining Contract requirements and the said approval does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for accuracy in dimensions, details, size of components, etc or for phasing his construction/ installation works with the actual conditions at site.

14.6

All structural and electrical installations shall be endorsed by Professional Engineers engaged by the Contractor. The costs of engaging such professionals shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor's tender price.

15.0

SAMPLES

15.1

The Contractor shall submit mock-up samples of layout and choice of colors for each signage for approval before commencement of fabrication.

15.2

If the Contractor fails to comply with the above, the S.O reserves the right to either reject the whole or part of the works and the Contractor shall not be granted any extension of time and compensation whatsoever to that respect.

15.3 The Contractor shall make available adequate quantities for approving matching samples for the S.O, if required. 15.4 All samples shall be labeled, tagged or otherwise clearly identified and each label shall have sufficient clear space to permit the application of any approval stamp by the S.O. 15.6 All technical information, catalogue and other manufacturers' products related to the works shall be submitted.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

15.7 Acceptance of any sample shall not in any way absolve the Contractor of his responsibility under the Contract. 15.8 Samples shall be supplied entirely at the Contractor's risks and costs. 15.9 Only materials, components and accessories that have been approved in writing by the S.O shall be used and installed in the works. 15.10 Before mass production of the signs, samples of each sign shall be put up on site for actual viewing and inspection by the S.O. These samples if approved, may be accepted as part of the Contract Works to be installed. 15.11

The Contractor shall allow for modifications and adjustments of sample and in adverse cases rejection of the sample in his tender price.

15.12 No mass production is allowed until the sample is approved. Any delay in approval due to the sample not being to the satisfaction of the S.O will be the responsibility of the Contractor. 15.13

All materials, components, fixing, etc must be approved in writing before they can be used for the Works. Their use shall be restricted in accordance to the stipulations of the approval.

15.14 Where samples have been provided at the tender submission tender stage, the Contractor shall supply the type of materials for the Works. 16.0

MOCK-UPS

16.1

Unless otherwise stated, all signage types require the fabrication of a full-scale mockup as directed by the S.O for the purpose of approval of artworks and details.

16.2

These mock-ups shall be carried out following tentative approval of shop drawings and shall serve to confirm the approval prior to mass production.

16.3

Where specifically indicated, some signages shall have only part mock-ups serving to simulate typical and significant text, lighting and material/finishing details. Such part mock-ups shall not be smaller than 1m x 1m in size.

16.4

All mock-ups shall be constructed at the site and at no additional cost to the Contract.

16.5

After review of the completed mock-ups by the S.O, the Contractor shall make modifications if so directed by the S.O at no additional cost to the Contract.

16.6

When directed by the S.O, the Contractor shall demolish and remove the mock-ups and supporting structures as well as dispose off the debris off site. Mock-up materials shall not be installed on any parts of the building.

17.0

MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

17.1

The Contractor shall construct the works in accordance with the drawings, the General Specifications and Particular Specifications.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

17.2

Workmanship shall be in accordance with recognized methods and standards of trade practice to S.O's satisfaction.

17.3

The Contractor shall ensure meticulous and close control and monitoring of workmanship and quality. Any defective, unsightly or improperly fabricated or installed components which cannot be satisfactorily corrected shall be replaced with new components at the Contractor's own expense. Any physical damage including scratches, dents, abrasions, pitting, etc. shall be made good to S.O’s satisfaction.

17.4

The Contractor shall arrange the setting out, erection, juxtaposition of components and application of finishes to ensure a satisfactory fit at junctions and that the finished work has a well aligned, true and regular appearance.

17.5

All work shall be of the highest quality, in accordance with the best trade practices, and performed by skilled workmen.

17.6

Materials, components and systems incorporated in the work shall be in compliance with the relevant standards and codes, and suitable for their purposes.

17.7

All materials and finishes shall be new and free from any defects which may impair the strength, functioning, durability or appearance of the signage.

17.8

No materials, equipment or practices shall be used that may adversely affect the functioning, appearance and durability of the signage.

17.9

The materials used must be capable of withstanding the effects of in-situ installation and allow sufficient tolerance to prevent damage to the finished surface.

17.10 Materials, finishes, shapes, sizes, thickness and joint locations shall conform strictly to those required by the drawings and specifications. 17.11 Unless, otherwise specified, the Contractor shall ensure that all products of similar material shall be of a consistent kind, size, quality and overall appearance. 17.12 Details shown on the drawings shall be followed for exterior appearance. The Contractor may change exterior appearance subject to S.O’s approval. The Contractor may change interior construction shown on these details to confirm with his shop practices but at all times must take into consideration of the site. The S.O shall be notified of any changes required in the construction details. 18.0

STORAGE, HANDLING, PROTECTION AND DELIVERY

18.1

The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to adequately store, handle, ship, safeguard and protect all Contract Works at all stage from theft, scratches, vandalism, defects, dirt, falling objects, water and any damage until handed over to S.O or his designated representative.

18.2

The Contractor shall provide suitably protected storage facilities prior to delivery to site.

18.3

All signages shall have protective covers over them at all times. All materials and completed works shall be adequately protected from agents that impair or disfigure

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

them. 19.0

ENDORSEMENT BY PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER

19.1

The Contractor shall be responsible for the structural adequacy of all signage types.

19.2

Structural adequacy shall be taken to include the internal sub-structure, footings (in the case of free-standing signs) and respective mountings.

19.3

Where ceiling and wall mountings are concerned, the limitations of the building structures and substructures shall be taken into account in the design of the mountings.

19.4

The Contractor shall arrange for the necessary certification by a Profes sional Engineer for the signages at his own expense.

20.0

INSTALLATION AND ERECTION

20.1

All installation and erection works for the various signage types shall include but not limited to the following items: a) b)

c)

The Contractor shall provide labour, materials, hoists, erection equipment, accessories and supervision necessary to complete the Contract Works to highest standards. The Contractor shall be responsible for the structural adequacy of signs mounted and to submit structural calculations for framing, fastening and fixing details with Professional Engineer's certifications for the S.O's approval at his own expenses. The Contractor shall use fixing and jointing methods, types and spacings of fastening which are suitable for the particular signage. The Contractor shall consider the following in selecting appropriate fixing / jointing methods: i) ii) iii) iv) v)

Nature of and compatibility with product/material being fixed. Recommendations of manufacturers of fastenings Materials and loads to be supported. Conditions expected in use. Aesthetics and appearance.

d)

No short fired fixing shall be allowed. Power actuated fasteners shall not be used unless approved by the S.O or his designated representative.

e)

Where signages are specified or scheduled to be fixed to floors, walls and ceilings, due allowance shall be made for fixing to the different surfaces encountered. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the full extent of all materials and fixings. The cost of all fixing provisions shall be included in the Contract.

f)

Where necessary, scaffolding, staging, tools and appliances and everything else required for the installation of the signages shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own cost.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

20.2

20.3

20.4

All co-ordination of works for the various sign types shall include but not limited to the following items: a)

The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the installation and co-ordination of the sequence of erection of the works all in accordance with the programme.

b)

Site installation and erection of the signages shall be subject to the availability of the site at the time of installation.

c)

The Contractor shall co-ordinate the installation in accordance with the restriction which may be imposed by the Contractor on the use of the material and passenger hoists.

d)

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ensuring total co-ordination of all works and shall take site measurements prior to preparation of any shopdrawings and before commencing fabrication.

All works related to the final locations of signs shall include but not limited to the following items: a)

The Contractor shall check site conditions and work out precisely the location of all signages to be installed and allow ample time for verification and confirmation of locations, positions and methods of display before commencement of installation of signages on site.

b)

If the Contractor proceeds with installation of signages on site without verification and confirmation, the S.O reserves the right to relocate and reposition the signages without additional cost. The Contractor shall make good damaged existing works arising out of relocations and repositions, at his own cost.

c)

The S.O reserves the right to change the positions of signages whenever necessary.

d)

All work shall be installed square, level plumb, straight, true to line or radius, accurately fitted and located, watertight, secure, rigidly installed, with flush type hairline joints (except as indicted otherwise or to allow for thermal movement), with provisions for other trades and thermal movement, all in accordance with the approved shop drawings.

Electrical Installation The Contractor shall engage his own Professional Engineer to design and certify the electrical installation. The cost of this is deemed to be included in the tender price.

20.5

Fastening a)

Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the S.O or otherwise shown in the drawings, all signage units which are to be floor, ceiling mounted or wall projected shall be mounted with fixing screws of corrosion resistant material, in sufficient numbers as to render the structure firmly held in place, stable and free from being toppled. All exposed or visible screws and other fasteners shall be stainless steel or heavily chromed brass or galvanized steel. Ordinary

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

mild steel screws, bolts and nuts and such like fasteners that are not corrosion resistant shall not be permitted. b)

c) 20.6

Unless otherwise specified, fastening shall be as follows: i) Signages built into concrete or masonry shall be anchored with galvanized steel strap anchors, shop welded on. ii)

Signages attached to concrete or masonry shall be fixed with welds or bolts.

iii)

Signages attached to metals (other than structural steel) shall be anchored by bolts or screws.

Additional frame support shall be provided by the Contractor if necessary at no extra cost to the owner to ensure stability and durability of the signages.

Joints and Edges a)

Unless otherwise directed by S.O, all joints and edges shall be pointed with an approved colored silicone sealant. Sealant shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions with backer rods where necessary. All surfaces to receive sealant shall be thoroughly cleaned; excess material and spillage shall be cleaned and removed.

b)

The joints for each and every material shall be accurately set, cut and neatly executed and finished with no protrusion, gaps or misalignment. The joints shall be of stout and sturdy construction to match the purpose for which it is intended.

21.0

ANCILLARY BUILDING WORKS

21.1

Concrete plinth, masonry bases, structural opening through walls or floors, embedment in structural concrete and other ancillary building work shall be carried out by the Contractor in connection with the mounting of the signs (including provision of mounting fixtures and accessories.

21.2

The Contractor shall also carry out, all setting out, hacking and coring works to walls and floors necessary for the installation and subsequently functioning of the sign units at locations to be approved by the S.O. The Contractor shall engage his PE to check structural drawings to ensure integrity of structure is preserved.

22.0

WORK UPON COMPLETION

22.1

The Contractor shall remove all temporary markings, coverings and protective wrappings unless otherwise instructed upon completion of the Contract Works.

22.2

The protective sheeting shall only be removed permanently when no further wet works or services works are required in the immediate vicinity of the signage units.

23.0

CLEANING UP

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

23.1

The Contractor shall clean all signs to normal clean condition expected of a first class sign. Prior to the handing over, the Contractor shall carry out a final cleaning of the signs.

23.2 The Contractor shall clean both internal and external surfaces to remove corrosive substances, dust and cement/mortar droppings during and after installation. 23.3

The Contractor shall provide written verification that cleaning agents are compatible with aluminum, stainless steel, surface coatings, glazing materials and sealant. In no case shall alkaline or abrasive agent be used to clean the surface. Care shall be taken during cleaning to avoid scratching of the surface by grit particles.

23.4

All gloss-finished and all wooden parts shall be polished. All bright metal and all plastic parts shall be wiped clean. All surfaces shall be free from dust and any trace of adhesive used to secure protective wrappings.

23.5

All signages shall be left clean, tidy and ready for use.

23.6

The Contractor shall only use cleaning materials and methods as recommended by the manufacturers. In the absence of such recommendations, cleaning materials and methods shall be approved by the S.O.

24.0

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

24.1

During construction, the Contractor shall maintain accurate records of the actual fabrication and installation of the signages. This information shall essentially update any previously approved shop-drawings.

24.2

Upon Practical Completion of the Works and within three months, the Contractor shall submit two (2) sets of the as-built drawings for verification. Upon verification by the S.O, the Contractor shall submit to the SO four (4) sets of paper prints of the as -built drawings (in colour where appropriate) and documents depicting all aspects of the Contract Works including location of each of the main signages and directories as well as the electrical aspects.

24.3

The as-built drawings shall be dated, bear the signature of the Contractor or that of a responsible person in his employment (including the Professional Engineer where appropriate) together with the names and address of his firm, date, scale, drawings number and title.

25.0

PATENT RIGHTS

25.1

The Contractor shall ensure that no patent is infringed upon and that unless otherwise specified, amounts payable on conditions, imposed in respect of the manufacture, use or exercise of patented invention are paid and complied with.

25.2

The Contractor shall indemnify the Client, its officials and the final users of the building against all claims, costs, charges, expenses or damages arising out of any claim at any time on account of patent rights or royalties which may be held to have been infringed by the Client's acceptance, use, distribution, manufacture or processing of any article supplied under the Contract.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

25.3

Upon receipt of any such claim, the Contractor shall be notified and shall at his own expenses conduct any litigation or negotiate any settlement that may arise therefrom.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SINGLE BANK WEATHERPROOF LOUVRE SPECIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01

Summary

1. This specification is for louvers relating to the common corridor and external wall façade of the new teaching block. 2. Supply louvers, bird screens and/or blank-off panels and attachment brackets, all as shown on the project drawings and as specified, necessary for a complete and proper installation. 3. The louvers to be furnished include fixed extruded storm resistant louvers. 4. Related sections include Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints between louver frames and adjoining structure. 1.02

References

1. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA) a) AMCA Standard 500-L-99 Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating b) AMCA Publication 501 Application Manual for Louvers 2. Heating, Ventilating & Air Conditioning Manufacturers Association (HEVAC) - 5th Edition of HEVAC technical Specification ‘Laboratory testing and rating of weather louvers when subjected to simulated rain.’ 3. The Aluminum Association Incorporated a) Aluminum Standards and Data b) Specifications and Guidelines for Aluminum Structures 4. American Society of Civil Engineers - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 5. American Society for Testing and Materials a) ASTM B209 b) ASTM B211 c) ASTM B221 d) ASTM E90-90 6. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association a) AAMA 800 Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants b) AAMA 605.2 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum 1.03

Submittals

1. Product Data a) Air flow and water entrainment performance test results. b) Verification that testing has been carried out at an accredited test facility. c) Material grades and thickness. d) Blade and mullion support spacing

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

2. Shop Drawings a) Include elevations, sections and specific details for each louver. b) Show anchorage details and connections for all component parts. c) Include endorsed structural calculations 3. Samples - Submit color chips for approval. 1.04

Quality Assurance

1. Single subcontract responsibility: Subcontract the work to a single firm that has a minimum six years experience in the design and manufacturing of work similar to that detailed in this specification. 2. Performance Requirements: Provide AMCA and/or BSRIA test data as required, to confirm that the louvers have the specified air and water performance characteristics. 3. Structural Requirements: Design all materials to withstand wind (and snow) loads as required by the applicable building code. Maximum allowable deflection for the louver structural members to be l/180 or 19.0 mm, whichever is less. Maximum allowable deflection for the louver blades to be l/120 or 12.5 mm across the weak axis, whichever is less. 4. Professional Engineer Requirements: Drawings and structural calculations to be endorsed by a professional engineer, to be engaged by the Main Contractor. 5. Warranty: Provide written warranty to the owner that all products will be free of defective materials or workmanship for a period of one year from date of supply. 6. The supplier of the louver system shall be a registered company capable to perform work in accordance with recognized International Quality Assurance Standard: ISO 9001:2000 1.05

Delivery, Storage and Handling

2. Delivery: At the time of delivery all materials shall be visually inspected for damage. Any damaged boxes, crates, louver sections, etc. shall be noted on the receiving documents and immediately reported to the delivery company and the material manufacturer. 2

Storage: a) Material may be stored on end or on its side b) Material may be stored either indoors or outdoors. c) If stored outdoors the material must be raised sufficiently off the ground to prevent it being exposed to standing water. d) If stored outdoors, material must be covered with weatherproof flame resistant sheeting or tarpaulin at all times.

3.

Handling:

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

a) Material shall be handled in accordance with sound material handling practices and in such a way as to minimize racking. b) Louver sections may be hoisted by attaching straps to the jambs and lifting the section while in a vertical orientation. c) Louver sections should only be lifted and carried by the jambs. Heads, sills and blades are not to be used for lifting or hoisting louver sections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01

Manufacturers

1. The louvers and related materials herein specified and indicated on the drawings shall be as manufactured by a reputable firm with relevant experience for such louvers. 2.02

Materials

1. All louver blades, heads, sills, jambs, mullions, fixing cleats, clips and braces to conform to Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063-T5, 6063-T6 or 6061-T6. Note: the use of sheet materials for louver panel components shall not be acceptable. 2. Blank off panel to be of Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B3209, Alloy 1100, 3003 or 5005. 2.03

Fabrication, General

1. Provide C/S louver models, bird screens, blank-off panels and accessories as specified and/or shown on the drawings and detailed in this specification. Materials, sizes, depths, arrangements and material thickness to be as indicated or as required for optimal performance with respect to strength; durability; and uniform appearance. 2. Louvers to be mechanically assembled using stainless steel grade 300 fasteners only. The use of aluminium or steel fasteners of any type shall not be permitted. 2.04

Horizontal Louvers

1. Material: Heads, sills, jambs and mullions (where required) to be one-piece structural aluminum members with integral sealing gasket slots. Architectural Line (no visible mullions) Fixed single piece blade profile. Louvers to be spaced at 75 mm. Total system depth not to exceed 76 mm. Louver panels supplied in breakdown form with louver clip affixed to mullions at 75 mm spacing. Front louver blades, cut to length at works, to be installed on site in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Minimum blade extrusion thickness 1.5mm. Minimum framing extrusion thickness 2.0mm. 2. Performance: a) Rain Defense – Fair; Airflow – Excellent b) Type: Fixed, Single Blade, Horizontal Architectural line (no visible mullion) Louver System

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

c) d)

Blade Spacing: 75 mm System Depth: 76 mm

A test panel of core dimension 1.0 m x 1.0 m shall conform to the following: Airflow - Free Area 0.563 m2 Co-efficient of discharge: 0.434 (HEVAC Class 1) Co-efficient of entry: 0.434 (HEVAC Class 1) Wind Driven Rain Performance: BSRIA certified and licensed to bear the BSRIA seal. The louver test to be performed on a 1.0 m x 1.0 m) core area panel. Unit test conditions shall be at a rainfall rate of 75 mm/hr and with a wind directed to the face of the louver at a velocity of 13 m/s. The corresponding test data shall show the water penetration effectiveness rating at each corresponding ventilation rate and shall be equal or better than: Ventilation Rate (m3/s)

0.0

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.5

HEVAC Rating Achieved

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

D

Where: HEVAC Rating Achieved A B C D

2.05

Effectiveness at Eliminating Rainwater Entry % 99 to 100% 95 to 98.9% 80 to 94.9% < 80%

Accessories

1. Bird Screens a) Unless otherwise indicated, all louvers to be furnished with mill finish bird screens. b) Screens to be 12.5 mm aluminium expanded mesh, assembled complete with extruded aluminum frames. c) Frames to have mitered corners and corner locks. 2.06

Finishes

1. General: Comply with AAMA 605.2 ‘Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels’. Apply finishes in factory. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces prior to shipment. Remove scratches and blemishes from exposed surfaces that will be visible after completing finishing process. Provide color as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by architect. 2. Polyester Powder Finish a) Louvers to be finished with a single coat to a minimum dry film thickness average of 40 microns. b) All aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned, degreased and etched pretreatment prior to application of coating. The coating shall receive a bake cycle in

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

accordance with the paint manufactures specification. All finishing procedures shall be one continuous operation in the approved plant of the manufacturer’s applicator. c) Manufacturer to furnish limited warranty for a period of five (5) years for the Polyester Powder coating. This limited warranty shall begin on the date of material shipment. 3. Clear Anodize Finish a) Louvers to be given an Architectural Class I anodic coating of no less than 25 microns (NA25) thickness (Aluminum Association designation AA-C22A41) b) The thickness of the coating shall be tested in accordance with ASTM B244-68. c) The coating shall be sealed to pass the ASTM B136-77 Modified Dye Stain Test. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01

Examination: Examine openings to receive the work. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02

Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

3.03

Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the work. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements so that the louver panels will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure. Anchor louvers to the building substructure as indicated on architectural drawings. Correction: Do not cut or trim louver system on site. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints.

Protection Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains.

3.04

Adjusting and cleaning 1. Immediately clean exposed surfaces of the louvers to remove fingerprints and dirt accumulation during the installation process. Do not let soiling remain until the final cleaning. 2. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to the material finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. 3. Restore louvers and accessory components damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by the SO, remove damaged materials and replace with new materials. 4. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with a compatible air-dried coating that matches the color and gloss of the factory applied coating.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR TIMBER STRIP FLOOR 1.0

GENERAL

1.1

The timber floor is to be installed at floor of Performing Arts Studio, Music Room, Dance Studio, Multi-Purpose Hall, Conference Room and any other area, as specified on drawings or schedule of finishes.

1.2

The timber floating sports floor system is to provide shock absorption, and comprise a vapour barrier, resilient pads, insulation material, certified plywood sub-floor, maple flooring, sanding, sealers, finishes, game lines, wall base and fire compartmentation barriers.

1.3

The Contractor shall construct the concrete structural floor complete with selflevelling screed, depressing the floor slab sufficiently to accommodate the floating sports timber strip flooring system. The concrete slab shall be steel troweled and finished smooth to a tolerance of 3mm in any 3m radius. High and low spots shall be filled and adjusted with approved self-levelling compound by the S.O.

1.4 to full shall (MFMA). 1.5

The floating sports timber strip flooring system shall be constructed and tested compliance of performance standard DIN 18032, Part 2. All maple wood used be approved and certified by Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association

The Contractor shall engage a specialist manufacturer specializing in manufacturing floating sports timber strip flooring system. This specialist manufacturer shall be ISO 9001:2000 certified to assure quality control of materials provided. The Contractor shall engage an experienced installer (flooring sub-contractor) to construct the complete installation of the floating sports timber strip flooring system according to manufacturers’ installation instructions. A method statement detailing the actual installation procedures shall be submitted to the S.O for approval prior to commencement of works.

1.6 provided the S.O.

The specifications provided herein formed the minimum standards to the under this Contract, no deviations are allowed without the prior approval from

1.7

The floating sports timber strip flooring system shall be independently tested and evaluated for Athletic Performance according to the International Standard DIN 18032, Part 2. Independent DIN testing laboratory shall have Scientific Body Membership in the International Association of Sports Surface Sciences (ISSS). Test equipment shall have been calibrated and certified through the ISSS. DIN testing engineer shall be an ISO 17025 System member rated for each performed test conducted.

2.0

SUBMITTALS

2.1

The Contractor shall submit the catalogue, technical specification, name of manufacturer, name of installer and all necessary test reports/certification for the floating sports timber strip flooring system for S.O’s approval before procurement and commencement of works.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

2.2

A full size sample measuring (600x600) mm showing the following shall be submitted for S.O’s approval: a) b) c) d) e)

Type of Maple wood used and its finishing layers Type of certified Plywood used Type of resilient pads used Type of vapour barrier used Type of Rockwool insulation used

2.3

Upon completion of installation works, Contractor shall submit a test report and certificate verifying and certifying that the timber sports flooring system has been constructed to DIN 18032, Part 2 certified standards.

3.0

MATERIALS

3.1

Construct floating sports timber strip flooring system consisting of the following to Performing Arts Studio: a)

20mm thick tongue and grooved Grade 2, northern hard Maple wood strip floor boarding in 57mm widths, secret nailed to sawn pressure impregnated min nominal 25mm x 75mm x 2440mm engineered and certified plywood sub-floor at 230mm spacing resting on proprietary anti-shock rubber pads (air) or resilient pads. The proprietary anti-shock pads or resilient pads shall be separated from the concrete floor by a polyethylene vapour barrier.

b)

Each Maple strip shall be 20mm x 57mm tongue and grooved Grade 2 Maple, Northern hard Maple Flooring marked and stamped as manufactured by the approved manufacturer.

c)

Flooring fasteners shall be 50mm barbed cleats or coated staples.

d)

The certified plywood sub-floor shall be min. nominal 25mm x 75mm x 2440mm engineered and certified plywood at 230mm spacing. Space ends 6mm and offset joints 1220mm in adjacent rows. Provide 50mm expansion voids at perimeter and at all vertical obstructions. Inspect plywood sub-floor to ensure that all resilient pads bear on concrete floor. Install solid blocks at doorways.

e)

A minimum 6mm thick clear continuous polythene vapour proof barrier shall be laid on the floor screed, with all joints carefully lapped and tapped.

f)

Spaces between anti-shock rubber pads or resilient pads and plywood subfloor to be sufficiently infilled with 50 mm thick of 80 kg/m3 Rockwool insulation. No gaps between Rockwool insulation and the anti-shock rubber pads or resilient pads or the plywood subs-floor will be allowed.

g)

Minimum 12mm thick, 50mm x 50mm fully formed air cell proprietary resilient pads should be used, forming a continuous air cushion beneath the sports flooring system. In addition, 2 layers of 10mm thick Neoprene Pad, hardness 35-40 to be sufficiently secured below each 12mm thick, 50 x 50mm fully formed air cell propriety resilient pads.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.2

Construct steps to stage with 20mm thick x 57mm wide crossed-tongued, grooved and rebated Grade 2, northern hard Maple wood threads and risers with rounded nosing, screwed together including (25 x 75 x 2440)mm engineered and certified plywood sub-floor.

3.3

At the abutment of all walls and floorings, construct minimum 18mm thick x 100mm high continuously vented Maple wood skirting with chamfered top edges, plugged and screwed to wall.

3.4

The flooring shall be finished with 1 coat of high viscosity solid content wear resistant prime; followed by 2 coats of oil modified polyurethane solid content wear fire retardant and slip resistant traffic seal and 2 coats of approved finish to manufacturers’ specification, conforming to Din 18032 standards. All Maple floor shall be properly machine sand to an even, smooth and uniform surface, all sanding dust removed before application of finishing coats.

4.0

INSTALLATION

4.1

The Contractor is to allow for phased works in relation of the final floor finishes to the Performing Arts Studio. The first phase is to have basic cement screed floor finish, in order to allow for Temporary Classrooms to be installed within the 3 rd storey of the Performing Arts Studio. The second phase is to supply and install timber floor finishes, after removal of the Temporary Classrooms.

4.2

The specialist installer shall inspect all concrete slabs for proper tolerance and dryness before commencement of installation work for floating sports timber strip flooring system.

4.3

All installation instructions shall be properly detailed and submitted to the S.O. for approval before commencement of installation work.

5.0

APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

5.1

The approved manufacturers are as follows:a) b) c) d)

Connor Hardwood Courts Junckers Sports Floor Solutions Action Floor Systems Any other approved equivalent manufacturers

5.2

All installers shall be named & approved by the respective approved manufacturers.

6.0

WARRANTY The Contractor is to provide warranty for a period of five (5) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works, for the timber flooring supplied and installed. The warranty is to cover defects in material against warping, unevenness, delamination and cracks not due to fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR TOILET PARTITIONS 1.0

GENERALLY

1.1

This specification relates to the supply, delivery and installation of toilet cubicle partitions for all new toilets in the School premises.

1.2

This specification to be read in conjunction with the Tender Drawings, Schedule of Rates, Tender Lump Sum Pricing, and other documentation issued to the Contractor. The materials and finishes proposed is subject to selection and approval of the S.O. All finishes and fixing including assembly is subject to approval of shop drawings and Contractor's PE endorsement where necessary and to be as per standards and codes applicable in Singapore.

1.3

Where trade names or catalogue numbers are mentioned in this Specification or the Bills, the reference is intended only as a guide to the type of article quoted or material required. Subject to the approval of the S.O, the Contractor may substitute any article or material similar and equal to those described by reference to trade names or catalogue numbers. All proprietary materials or processes specified in this Specification are to be used or carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

1.4

Contractor to highlight any discrepancy deviation in the document or Contractor's proposal and seek clarification and approval from the relevant consultant prior to fabrication of the works.

2.0

ABBREVIATIONS

2.1

Throughout the Specification and other Documents, the following abbreviations have been used: m m2 m3 mm mm 2 No oz lb Cwt kg Ton o C N W BS

-

Linear metre Square metre Cubic metre Millimetre Square millimetre Number Ounce (avoirdupois) Pound (avoirdupois) Hundredweight Kilogramme Metric Tonne Degree Celcius Newton Watt The 'British Standard' (including any amendment or reenactment) issued by the British Standards Institution current as of the date of submission of tender.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.0 3.1 3.2

3.3

CP

-

AS ASTM DIN

-

SS

-

BCA PSB FSB ISO

-

The 'British Standard Code of Practice' (including any amendment or re-enactment) issued by the Council for Codes of Practice of the British Standards Institution current as of the date of submission of tender. Australian Standards American Society of Testing Materials Deutschae Industrie Norm (German Industrial Standards) The 'Singapore Standard' (including any amendment or re-enactment) issued by the Singapore Productivity and Standards Board current as of the date of submission of tender Building Construction Authority of Singapore The Singapore Productivity and Standards Board Fire Safety Bureau International Standardisation Organisation

SCOPE OF WORKS The Contractor to also read this document in conjunction with architectural, structural and M&E drawings provided and to include all necessary works that are required to be done to complete this contract. The Contractor to install a full-size mock-up of the Toilet Partition as directed by the S.O prior to proceeding with the works at other areas. Contractor to allow for necessary pull-out tests (minimum four) as may be required. Contractor to include preparation of shop-drawings for approval of the S.O for all of the works included in the scope of works. All samples for all of the scope of work including name of manufacturer, country of origin to be submitted by the Contractor to S.O for approval. The Contractor to to submit test reports for materials and method statement for the installation works for the aforesaid scope of works for SO’s approval as may be appropriate.

3.4

Contractor shall ensure partitions to be used shall be approved by the SO, and be of first quality, true to shape, size, even in colour tone distribution and texture and free from any blemishes.

4.0

SITE PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1

Contractor shall allow for all necessary cutting and chamfering to accommodate for corner joint, including all necessary stainless steel fixing accessories to SO’s approval.

4.2

Contractor shall ensure specified fabrication tolerances must be observed at all times and fabricate in accordance with approved shop drawings. He shall provide all information necessary to secure work in place if necessary.

4.3

Contractor shall co-ordinate the partition works with all interfacing work packages and trades to ensure correct setting out and positioning.

4.4

Contractor shall handle and hoist assemblies carefully, at all stages to ensure that

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

materials are not damaged, and accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 4.5

Contractor shall include everything necessary or incidental to the execution and completion of toilet cubicle partition installation, all as specified herein, shown on the drawings and as may be directed on site by the S.O.

4.6

Contractor is to ensure exposed edges of panels and doors shall be chamfered safety. Edge shall be in powder coated aluminium. All edges shall come with aluminium profile trimming. Contractor can propose the partitions to be from ‘Meta’, ‘Bobrick’, ‘Marathon’ or other equivalent licensee fabricator. Partition shall be floor anchored and be water resistant solid phenolic Core material with high pressure matte finish melamine surface fused to core. Colour of Toilet partition to be approved by S.O.

4.7

Contractor shall ensure doors, stiles, wall post shall have a finished thickness of 19mm thick and its edges shall be rebated and black. Division rear panel shall be 19mm thick if applicable.

4.8

Toilet compartments shall comply with the printed manufacturer’s technical data and performance characteristics of the abovementioned brands, unless otherwise approved by the S.O.

4.9

Contractor shall ensure all fully framed powder coated aluminium with perimeter head stabilizing section and continuous side fixing channels. Powder coated aluminium head 45mm x 86mm mechanically joined to 50mm diameter vertical posts with screw spline connections to form structural framework. Corners joined to head section and formed with solid aluminium castings. Framework to form the main support for the cubicles without reliance on panel media or path fittings.

4.10

Contractor shall ensure partition panels shall be concealed aluminium fixings with front pilaster panels silicon bonded into door frame and corner profile.

4.11

Contractor shall ensure legs of partition panels shall be floor attachments with adjustable ground clearance from 60mm to 150mm to allow for uneven or sloping floor.

4.12

All fixed handles and indication rosette with turn button and emergency release to the exterior, bolted and screwed through to contain the handle assembly with concealed nylon door latch and one number of coat hook per cubical (Male & Female) and three number of coat hook per shower. The Contractor to install coat hooks to centre of each door panel at 1.8m from floor finish. Solid coloured nylon door furniture with handle assembly shall be held in position by a 10mm rebated aluminium cover plate.

4.13

Contractor shall ensure partition panel shall be fixed with rubber buffer to act as a door stopper. Each door shall have 3 nylon covered heavy duty brass hinges, 1 spring loaded to be adjustable for inward and outward opening doors.

4.14

Contractor shall ensure installation of the toilet cubicle partitions shall be executed in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendation and shall c lean and protect the toilet partitions and compartments to the satisfaction of the S.O till hand over of project.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

5.0

MOCK-UP SAMPLES AND SHOP-DRAWINGS

5.1

Contractor shall ensure sample of toilet cubicle partitions shall be submitted free of cost and fixed at the location as directed by the S.O for approval. All materials subsequently delivered to site shall be equal to the approved samples.

5.2

Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing all details of construction, assembly, erection and anchorage for approval by the S.O.

6.0

WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide warranty for the toilet cubicle partitions for a period of five (5) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality and material integrity of the partitions, fixing elements, occurrence of rust, delamination, and any damage not due to fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR WATERPROOFING This specification covers the waterproofing of concrete works, wet areas, roof waterproofing.

A.

WATERPROOFING TO CONCRETE BASE Place

of

Ground slab

Installation: Finishing:

Protective screed

Substrate:

Lean concrete

Products:

0.6 mm thick polyethylene damp proof membrane.

Tape for bonding membrane at overlaps.

1.0

GENERAL

This specification is to be read in conjunction with the general specifications and all other specifications and drawings.

The damp-proofing membrane shall be a 0.6mm thick high-density polyethylene membrane. The damp proof membrane system shall incorporate the use of overlapping tape, ensuring a continuous seal to guard against migration of water vapour. The product shall possess the following properties: 1)

Characteristics Density

Test Method Din 53479:1976

Performance 0.93g/cm 3

2)

Mass per unit area

Din 53352:1932

605.7 g/m 3

3)

Tensile Strength Din 638:1991 a) Longitudinal Din 638:1991 16.0 N/mm 2 Direction b) Transverse Direction

4)

Din 638:1991

Elongation at Break a) Longitudinal Din 638:1991 Direction

15.9N/mm 2

620.2 %

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

2.0

b) Transverse Direction

Din 638:1991

726.9 %

5)

Water Vapour Transmission

ASTM E96;1995

1.49 g/day/m 2 0.062 g/h/m 2

6)

Water Migration Test able to withstand 3 bars for 1 hr without water leakage

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION 2.1

The intended area for the damp proof course installation shall be cordoned-off using safety tape.

2.2

Fill the area to receive damp proofing with hardcore and ensure that it is properly compacted with appropriate machineries. Treat the soil with approved anti-termite materials and cover with black sheets to seal the treatment.

2.3

Following soil treatment, ensure that the treated area is clean and free from oil and other foreign materials.

2.4

3.0

4.0

Cast 50mm thick lean concrete to receive the 0.6mm thick DPM.

INSTALLATION

3.1

Wipe off surface water with clean cloth. Surfaces to be joined must be clean and dry.

3.2

The dryness of the surface of the DPM can be checked by pressing a clean table napkin over the surface of the material. The damp proofing material would be ready for overlapping with overlapping tape if the table napkin remains relatively dry.

3.3

Unroll damp proof membrane over the substrate. The membrane shall be overlapped to the adjacent sheets by a minimum of 100 mm using Overlapping Tape.

3.4

Seal the overlapped area with Tape. Apply hand or roller pressure along the sealing tape. Excess material can be cut using ordinary scissors.

3.5

Cracked areas can be repaired by applying a patch of membrane with overlap of 100mm over the affected location and kept in place using Overlapping Tape.

PROTECTION Protect DPM with minimum 25mm thick protective screed prior to casting of the ground slab.

5.0

WARRANTY

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

The Contractor shall provide warranty for waterproofing for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality of material, prevention of ingress of water into substrate, integrity of joints, and any damage not due to fair wear and tear.

B.

WATERPROOFING TO WET AREAS Place of Installation: At 1st sty level: WC & handicapped toilet & toilet of ISH At 2nd sty level: WC & handicapped toilet & toilet, Corridor At 3rd sty level: WC & handicapped toilet & toilet, Corridor At 4th sty level: WC & handicapped toilet & toilet, Corridor At 5th sty level: WC & handicapped toilet & toilet,Corridor And any other area as specified in drawings and details. Finishing: Protective screed

Substrate:

Concrete

Products:

Liquid

applied

two-component

flexible

cementitious

waterproofing membrane.

1.0

GENERAL

1.1

This specification is to be read in conjunction with the general specifications and all other specifications and drawings.

1.2

Specification Compliance The liquid applied, elastomeric, waterproofing membrane where shown on the drawings shall be used in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1.3

2.0

Waterproofing membrane The liquid applied, elastomeric waterproofing membrane where shown on the drawings shall be made of a flexible cementitious waterproofing membrane. The membrane when cured shall be capable of an extension of not less than 230%. Its tensile strength shall exceed 1.7 N/mm 2 and the water vapour transmission shall be less than 0.5 g/m 2/hr. Its adhesion to substrate shall exceed 1.5N/mm 2 and shall bridge cracks of minimum 2mm width. It shall be used in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

WATERTIGHTNESS CHECK

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.0

4.0

2.1

Check for structural soundness by conducting structural ponding test. Honeycomb and cracks in the structure should be repaired with approved repair material prior to waterproofing application.

2.2

Plug up all outlets and flood the waterproofed area with minimum of 25mm depth of water for 24 hours. Provide temporary enclosures using cement mortar or by other means to contain water.

2.3

In areas where leaks are observed, ponding test shall be repeated upon completion of rectification work until retreated area passed the test.

2.4

Upon completion of the ponding test, carefully remove the temporary enclosure without damaging the structure / membrane or finishes.

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION 3.1

Ensure that all receiving substrates are sound, stable, and free from any substance that may reduce or inhibit the installed material from adhering to the receiving substrate.

3.2

Any cracked, damaged or degraded surface or substrate shall be repaired with repair mortar or approved equivalent before proceeding with subsequent stages of work.

3.3

A 25mm x 25mm fillet comprising of a mixture of sand cement shall be applied at all critical right angle bends to form a cant strip or coving detail.

3.4

Level small pockets of uneven surface with non-shrink grout or approved equivalent. Brick surface must be rendered prior to application of waterproofing membrane.

3.5

Dampen the substrate with water before coating. Do not allow excess water to pond on the surface. For horizontal & vertical surfaces, a squeegee, roller or broad brush may be used to apply the mix. Care must be taken to ensure that air is not trapped in the membrane.

APPLICATION OF WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

Surface Preparation 4.1

Ensure that all receiving substrates are sound, stable, even and free from sharp protrusions or any substance that may damage the waterproofing or prevent the waterproofing membrane from adhering to the receiving substrate.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

5.0

6.0

4.2

A 25mm x 25mm fillet comprising of a mixture of sand cement shall be applied at all critical right angle bends to form a cant strip or coving detail.

4.3

Using a wet roller, dampen the substrate with water before coating with membrane. Do not allow excess water to pond on the surface.

4.4

Using roller or brush, apply 2 coats membrane onto the prepared substrate with a minimum upturn 300mm along walls, 150mm on vertical pipes & downturn of 50-100mm into pipe outlet.

4.5

At shower areas, membrane shall be applied up to min. 1.8m.

4.6

Apply membrane with a brush or roller in one direction. Ensure that the first coat is dry to the touch (approximately 2 to 4 hours) then apply the second coat at right angles to the first coat. Apply the membrane evenly and without ponding at a spread rate of 1.0 kg /m 2/coat.

4.7

Allow the finished coat to dry for approximately 2 days before proceeding with any ponding test.

4.8

Barricade waterproofed area to prevent access prior to ponding test.

PONDING TEST

5.1

Plug up all outlets and flood the waterproofed area with minimum of 25mm depth of water for 24 hours.

5.2

In areas where leaks are observed, ponding test shall be repeated upon completion of rectification work until retreated area passed the test. Refer to item (2). WARRANTY

The Contractor shall provide warranty for waterproofing for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality of material, prevention of ingress of water into substrate, integrity of joints, and any damage not due to fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

C.

WATERPROOFING TO RC FLAT ROOF

Place of Installation:

RC Flat Roof – Lift Motor Room RC Flat Roof – New RC Roof

Substrate:

Concrete

Products:

A liquid applied, solvent-based PU waterproofing membrane with excellent elongation, tensile & adhesion strength. Polysulphide Sealant for sealing movement joints and panel Joints. A closed cell polyethylene joint filler. Extruded polystyrene foam for insulation.

1.0

GENERAL

1.1

This specification is to be read in conjunction with the general specifications and all other specifications and drawings.

1.2

It is recommended that the concrete structure be cast to structural fall.

1.3

Specification Compliance The liquid applied, elastomeric, waterproofing membrane where shown on the drawings shall be used in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Waterproofing membrane for RC Flat roof The liquid applied, elastomeric waterproofing membrane where shown on the drawings shall be a single component polyurethane waterproofing membrane. It shall be used in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1.4

Watertightness Check Check for structural soundness by conducting structural ponding test. Honeycomb and cracks in the structure should be repaired with approved repair material prior to waterproofing application.

a)

Plug up all outlets and flood the waterproofed area with minimum of 50mm depth of water for 24 hours. Provide temporary enclosures using cement mortar or by other means to contain water.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

b)

In areas where leaks are observed, ponding test shall be repeated upon completion of rectification work until retreated area passed the test.

c)

Upon completion of the ponding test, carefully remove the temporary enclosure without damaging the structure / membrane or finishes.

2.0

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

2.1

Ensure that all receiving substrates are sound, stable, and free from any substance that may reduce or inhibit the installed material from adhering to the receiving substrate.

2.2 The surface to receive the waterproofing membrane should be trowelled followed a fine hair broom or equivalent finish which is dry and free from dust, oil, projections and other contaminants that would interfere with the application of the coatings. Remove all high spots.

2.3

Any cracked, damaged or degraded surface or substrate shall be repaired/ levelled with non-shrink grout before proceeding with subsequent stages of work

2.4

Pre-treatment (Prior to Waterproofing Application) a) Existing shrinkage & non-moving structural cracks (greater than 1.6mm in width) and pipe penetrations shall be patched with Epoxy Putty or filled with PU Sealant and pre-treated with an application of the membrane While the material is tacky, embed a layer of fibre-reinforced mesh. Allow initial application to cure and apply two coats of membrane b) Pre-treat all angles, joints, protrusion and stress points with an application of membrane ending with 100 - 150mm either side of the detail. Provide a minimum upturn and downturn of 150mm overlap of membrane along walls and vertical pipes. c) Allow pre-treatment to cure overnight before general application of membrane.

3.0

APPLICATION OF WATERPROOFING SYSTEM

3.1

Ensure surface is clean and dry. Apply two coats membrane with a roller, trowel or squeeze directly to the surface to achieve spread rate of 1.3kg/m 2 in two coats. Apply

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

each coat at right angles to one another with a cure time of 12 to 24 hours inbetween coats. 3.2

The waterproofing membrane shall be cured for a minimum of 48 hours before placement of protection (for concealed roofing system) or prior to running a water test.

3.3

The layers of material to be installed: a) Extruded Polystyrene “HD” (thermal insulation board). b) Install 1 layer of Geotextile as separation layer. c) Install 1000x1000x 50mm cast-in-situ panels with BRC 3315 mesh with joints filled with two-part polysulphide sealant. d) Existing movement joints shall be followed through shall be filled with Closed Cell Backer Rod and sealed with two-part polysulphide sealant.

4.0 WATERPROOFING TO RC ROOF THAT SUPPORTS VEGETATION (Greenroof) 4.1

Components The green roof waterproofing system that supports the vegetation is placed on top of the roof construction shall comprise the following components in general: a) b) c) d) e) f)

4.2

Root barrier Moisture retention mat Drainage cum reservoir element Filter sheet Growth medium - System substrate Vegetation

Root Barrier This shall be on top of the screed that protects the underlying waterproofing layer and with the following physical properties. Delivery and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Material : Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE) Thickness : 0.4 mm Root resistance : > 4 yrs Weight : 380 g/sqm ± 3% Tensile strength : min 40 N/sq mm @ 20oC Elongation capacity : min 400% Reaction to bitumen : Bitumen resistant Water permeability : Impermeable

4.3

Moisture Retention Mat It shall function as water and nutrient retention as well as protection for the underlying layer, in accordance with DIN 18195, delivery and installation according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Material

:

Recycled Polypropylene fibres, non-

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Thickness Weight Moisture retention capacity CBR test strength 4.4

woven 5 mm 470 g/sqm ± 5% 5.0 l/sq m ± 5% min 2400 N (DIN 54307)

: : : :

Drainage cum Reservoir Element It shall be an integral element that conceives water-retaining troughs, openings on the top planar for ventilation, as well as bi-directional drainage channel system on the underside. At all times under stable conditions there shall be at least 5 mm of air gap between the surface level of the retained water in the troughs and the filter sheet. Delivery and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

4.5

4.6

Material

:

Depth Weight Drainage rate

: : :

Water storage capacity Compressive strength

: :

High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) 25 mm 1.5 kg/sqm ± 5% min 0.06 l/s.sqm @ 3.0 % slope (DIN 4095) (i.e. flow axis is perpendicular to the element) min 0.8 l/s.sqm @ 3.0 % slope (DIN 4095) (i.e. flow axis in-plane with the element) min 3.0 l/sqm at stable conditions min 250 kN/sqm at 10% compression, without infill

Filter sheet The product shall be the thermally consolidated or heat-treated, with the following physical properties. Delivery and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Material Type Weight Water discharge

: : : :

Puncture resistance Tensile strength

: :

Polypropylene (PP) fibres Non-woven, heat-treated 100 g/sqm ± 5% min 150 l/s.sqm under 100 mm water head min. 800 N (DIN/EN/ISO 12236) min. 4.0 kN/m (DIN/EN/ISO 10319)

Substrate or growth medium The product shall be a highly inorganic “soilless” growth media suitable for the green roof in the tropical climate and vegetation, with the following properties to be used in depths as recommended by the Specialist. Delivery and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Material

:

Density (saturated) Air-filled pore space

: :

Inorganic mineral materials and “soilless” comprising of recycled crushed clay bricks and/or tiles and/or volcanic rocks, including pumice 1200 ± 10% kg/cu m min 50 % by vol.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Grain size Fine particle distribution (i.e. 0.063 mm) Organic content pH value Soluble salts content Water storage capacity Water permeability modulus 5.0

: :

0.063 to 16 mm max 3 % by mass

: : : : :

max 4.0 % by mass 6.5 to 8.5 max 1.5 g/l min 30% by vol. min 0.1 cm/s

WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide warranty for waterproofing for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality of material, prevention of ingress of water into substrate, integrity of joints, and any damage not due to fair wear and tear.

D.

FLOOR HARDENERS FOR PAVEMENT AND CORRIDORS

Place of Installation:

Pavement, Corridor.

Finishing:

Monolithic floor hardener

Substrate:

Freshly cast concrete

Products

or

approved

Monolithic floor hardener

equivalent: Water based curing compound

1.0

GENERAL

1.1

2.0

This specification is to be read in conjunction with the general specifications and all other specifications and drawings.

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

2.1

The base concrete should be placed and compacted in accordance with good concrete practice.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.0

2.2

The application rate of floor hardener shall be determined based on project specification.

2.3

Lay out sufficient material to meet the specified spread rates.

APPLICATION (Recommended coverage : Medium Traffic i.e : Carpark – 5 kg/m 2, Heavy Traffic – Ramps : 7 kg/m 2)

4.0 E.

3.1

The first application is broadcast floor hardener (mixed) at an even rate of approximately 60% of the total coverage onto the concrete surface. When the material becomes uniformly dark by absorption of moisture from the base concrete, this first application can be floated. Wooden floats or on large areas, a power float, may be used. It is important, however, that the surface is not over-worked. Allow the first broadcast to stiffen over the next 2 to 3 hours before proceeding with the second broadcast.

3.2

The remaining 40% of floor hardener (mixed) is applied evenly over the surface at right angles to the first application. Allow moisture to absorb the hardener and re-float the surface.

3.3

Final finishing of the floor using the blades of power float can be carried out when the floor has stiffened sufficiently to prevent damage to the floor surface.

CURING For effective curing of the hardener, a curing compound or approved equivalent shall be roller applied or sprayed over the floor surface once the cast floor is floated. SCREEDING, RENDERING AND TILE INSTALLATIONS

Place of Installation:

Wet Areas, Toilets

Finishing:

Homogenous tiles, Ceramic tiles

Substrate:

Concrete

Products:

Latex admixture for splash and adhesive slurry coats to improve adhesion of screeds / renders. Thin-set adhesive for tiles and natural stones Latex admixture for splash and adhesive Coloured Grout for tile joints up to 3mm width.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

1.0

GENERAL

1.1

This specification is to be read in conjunction with the general specifications and all other specifications and drawings.

1.2

Specification Compliance The tile installation mortar where shown on the drawings shall be polymer latex additive mixed with thinset powder, comprising of two component prepacked adhesive which allows for jobsite quality control, convenience and provides for high bond strength excellent workability and performance. The adhesive shall possess tensile adhesion strength of not less than 0.25N/mm 2 after 28 days cure (DIN EN 1348: 1999- 300mmx300mm test area). The adhesive shall exhibit an adhesion bond strength exceeding 2N/mm 2 after an open time of 30 minutes – Din EN 1346: 1999. The adhesive shall be used in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.

2.0

3.0

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

2.1

The working area shall be kept dry during the installation.

2.2

Ensure that all receiving substrates are sound, stable, and free from any substance that may inhibit the installed material from adhering to the receiving substrate.

2.3

Any cracked, damaged or degraded surface or substrate shall be repaired with two-part repair mortar or approved equivalent before proceeding with subsequent stages of work.

ANCHORING COAT AND SCREEDING

3.1

Check and ensure that the concrete/waterproofing membrane is cured, solid and stable. Clean off all loose toppings or any substances that may reduce or inhibit the adhesion of the screed to the waterproofing.

3.2

An adhesive slurry coat shall be applied on the waterproofing membrane prior to screeding. The slurry coat shall be 1 part mortar admixture mixed with 1.5 parts cement.

3.3

At the same time, prepare the screed mix consisting of cement and sand ratio 1:3 and fortified with additive.

3.4

Cast the screed onto the substrate when the adhesive slurry coat is still fresh

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

(wet). Level the screed to fall with a trowel. 3.5

4.0

5.0

The recommended curing time for the screed is at least 7 days per 10mm thickness.

ANCHORING COAT AND RENDERING

4.1

Check and ensure that the concrete is cured, solid and stable. Clean off all loose toppings or any substances that may reduce or inhibit the adhesion of the render to the concrete.

4.2

A splash coat shall be applied on concrete substrates prior to rendering. The splash coat shall be 1 part mortar admixture mixed with 1.5 parts cement and 1.5 parts sand.

4.3

Apply the splash coat with a proper tool or equipment and allow it to harden for at least 72 hours.

4.4

Apply the render consisting of cement and sand ratio of 1:3 fortified with mortar admix diluted with 1 part water by weight ensuring not more than 15mm per coat and allow it to harden. Apply subsequent coats until the final thickness is achieved.

4.5

The recommended curing time for the screed is at least 7 days per 10mm thickness as stipulated by the Code of Practice CP 68:1997

FINISHES

The tiles shall be of first quality as approved by the S.O.

6.0

INSTALLING TILES

6.1

Set out properly so that cutting is kept to a minimum and tiles shall be neatly cut and grinded to fit around fixtures and obstructions.

6.2

The tiles shall be bonded with 1 part of mixed with 4 parts thin set mortar according to the manufacturer's instructions.

6.3

The laid tiles shall be allowed to set for 24 hours before grouting the joints.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

7.0

8.0

9.0

GROUTING

7.1

Check to ensure that the adhesive has set.

7.2

The joints shall be grouted with colour grout fine grain fortified with latex mortar admixture, according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

7..3

Protect the grout joints for at least 24 hours before allowing foot trafficking.

CLEANING & PROTECTION TO FLOOR FINISHES

8.1

Excess grout, adhesive and residual mortar shall be properly cleaned and removed from the tile surface.

8.2

Protect the finished surface with protection layer from damage by other trades.

WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide warranty for waterproofing for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Works. The warranty is to cover the quality of material, prevention of ingress of water into substrate, integrity of joints, and any damage not due to fair wear and tear.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

SPECIFICATION FOR WINDOWS 1.0

GENERAL This specification relates to windows and glazing members proposed for use at the School premises. It is to be read with the Tender Drawings and Schedules.

1.1

Scope This section covers the requirements for windows with Aluminium, Steel or Timber frames. It does not cover windows with PVC frame or panes, which are to proprietary manufacturer’s specification.

1.2

Standards Unless otherwise agreed by the S.O, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted. Other Standards BS 6262 Code of practice for glazing buildings. BS 6375 Performance of Windows BS 6213 Guide to the selection of constructional sealants BS 5889 Specification for one-part gun grade silicone-based sealants BS 8118 Structural use of aluminium BS6339-2 Loading for buildings. Code of practice for wind loads BS 5250 Code of practice for control of condensation in buildings BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articlesspecification and test methods BS EN ISO 14713 Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures - zinc and aluminium coatings – guidelines BS 6496 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and stoving to aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections or external architectural purposes BS 6497 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and stoving to hot-dip galvanized hot-rolled steel sections and preformed steel sheet for windows and associated external architectural purposes. BS 5713 Specification for hermetically sealed flat double glazing units BS EN 573-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - chemical composition and form of wrought products. Chemical composition. BS 1161 PD 6484 BS 8200 ASTM C1036 ASTM C1048 ASTM C1172

Specification for aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes Commentary on corrosion at bimetallic contacts and its alleviation Design of non-loadbearing vertical enclosures Standard specification for flat glass Standard specification for heat-treated flat glass kind HS, kind FT coated and uncoated glass Standard specification for laminated architectural flat glass

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

1.3

Trade Preamble 1.3 .1 Contractor’s Submissions The design intent including type and locations of windows for the project are indicated in the drawings and schedules. Contractor to engage suitably qualified personnel to carry out and submit the following items for the S.O’s acceptance: Develop all necessary details for the fabrication and installation of the windows, and to meet with the performance requirements as set out in clause 2.1 below; Details to develop may include shape and sizing of components, accessories and connections to the building. Design for the appropriate structural support for the window system including the panes, frame and connections. Where required, Contractor to engage a Professional Engineer (structural) to verify the design and endorse the submissions. Develop waterproof details for the junction between the windows and the walls. Propose names of manufacturers and products for components and accessories when called for. 1.3.2

Co-ordination with Other Works Co-ordinate the window installation works, particularly the interfaces with the following work packages and trades: a. External walls and finishes. b. Internal walls and finishes.

1.3.3

Provide Materials Deliver to site in strong protective packages marked for identification, and store where directed, components and materials for future replacement and repair.

1.3.4 Warranty Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions for the performance of the following items: a. b. 2.0 2.1

Five-Year warranty for the general window systems and other accessories components. Ten-Year indemnity for aluminum and glazing works.

PRFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Contractor’s Brief When carrying out the proposals as set out in clause 1.3.1, take account of the following requirements: 2.1.1 2.1.1.1

Resistance to Climatic and Environmental Conditions Weather Resistance

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

a. Limit airflow through the windows, from the exterior surface to the interior surface through any of its joints, to the air leakage rates below when subject to wind induced pressures or suctions of 600 Pa across the window. i) ii) iii)

Through openable windows: not more than 2.0 cu m/hr per metre length of the air seal around the perimeter of the opening frames. Through fixed windows and spandrels: not more than 1.5 cu m/hr per square metre. There must not be any concentrated airflow through the windows or at any interfaces.

b. Prevent leakage of water into the interior of the building from the outer face of the assembly, resulting from wind pressure, gravity, surface tension, or capillary action with wind and precipitation likely to be experienced, up to 600 Pa static pressure for any period of 5 minutes, and 600 Pa dynamic pressure for 3 second periods at random intervals. c. Prevent water entering into those parts of the windows that would be adversely affected by the presence of water. d. Where the system requires water to appear on the inside surfaces of the window, such as in a track of a sliding door or window, any water must drain unassisted within 10 minutes. e. Maintain such weather-tightness under reasonably anticipated imposed loads and thermal, structural or other movements. 2.1.1.2

Thermal Performance and Solar Gain Achieve at least the performance levels as required in Code of Practice

2.1.1.3

Condensation Resist the formation of condensation on visible surfaces, interstices of locations where it is unable to drain. Provide air and vapour barriers if necessary to eliminate dampness and condensation around the windows.

2.1.1.4

Thermal Stress The window materials and construction must be such that they resist cracking to glass caused by thermal stress. Expansion and contraction of the window frames must not cause unacceptable noise or induce significant stresses to any components.

2.1.2

Resistance to Structural Loading

2.1.2.1

Gravity Loading Support the self weight of the windows and transmit this weight safely back to the supporting structure without overstressing or permanently deforming any components Transmit all the design loads to the building structure via the anchors as designed with an adequate margin of safety appropriate to each material and product.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

2.1.2.2

Wind Loading Withstand loading from inside and outside the building determined in accordance with BS CP3 using a basic wind speed of 35m/s and terrain category suitable for the site. Transmit these loads safely back to the supporting structure without overstressing or permanently deforming any components. Take account of all applicable local pressure coefficients. Sustain no permanent damage to framing members, glazing or anchors when tested at both positive and negative applications of the design wind loads multiplied by a factor of 1.5. Framing members must not be buckled. Glazing, glazing beads and decorative capping pieces must remain securely held and gaskets must not be displaced. Permanent deformation to framing members is not to exceed 1/500 of the span measured between points of attachment to the structure after loading. The calculated stress of all combined forces is not to exceed 1.33 times the appropriate maximum permissible stress in the short term. Design stays, locks, operating mechanisms, actuator motors that: a. windows are not sucked or blown open when closed b. stays or hinges not torn off if window is partly opened c. window to be closeable under full design load

2.1.2.3

Impact Loading Framing must satisfy the requirements of Tables 3 and 4 of BS 8200.1985 "Design of non-load bearing vertical enclosures" for category B in table 2. The maximum visually acceptable dent in the metal surface is 10mm in diameter and 3mm in depth.

2.1.2.4

Maintenance Loading Sustain and safely transmit a static load of 500 N applied horizontally through a square of 100 mm side on any framing in vertical or near vertical windows.

2.1.2.5

Barrier Loading For windows acting as barrier, sustain and safely transmit static horizontal loads in accordance with schedule 4 of the Building Control regulations.

2.1.2.6

Loading from Temporary Conditions Sustain and safely transmit any temporary loading that may arise from lifting, storing, transporting, hoisting and installing the windows.

2.1.2.7

Window Framing Deflection Limits Achieve deflection limits, as follows under the design load for serviceability: a. Framing members - at both positive and negative applications, the maximum frontal deflection must not exceed 1/240 of the span of the member measured between points of attachment to the building, or 20 mm, whichever is the lesser. b. Framing members supporting single glazing - the maximum deflection must not exceed 1/125 of their length measured along the pane edge.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

c. Framing members supporting double glazing units - the maximum deflection must not exceed 1/175 of their length measured along the unit edge, or 15 mm, whichever is the lesser, or more restrictive limits if set by the unit manufacturer. d. The vertical deflection of framing members and transoms, which support the weight of glazed panels, must not exceed 1/250 of their length. e. Surfaces (metal panel, glass, etc.) that are horizontal or inclined at less than 150 must not deflect under self-weight by more than L/360. f. Water must not pond on any part of the window system. g. All framing members are to recover fully from the above deflections when the loads are removed. 2.1.2.8

Locked in Stresses Avoid the introduction of locked-in stresses that may be detrimental to the performance of the windows.

2.1.2.9

Vibration and Repetitive Loading Resist loosening of anchors and other components due to the effects of vibrations or cyclic effects of load, deflections and thermal expansion.

2.1.2.10

Anchors Take account of any reduction in safe working loads in fixings due to their spacing, location in areas of tension, near edges or proximity to cast in inserts/existing fixings, or thickness of shims.

2.1.2.11

Structural Design Carry out the design in accordance with the following codes: a. b. c. d. e.

SS 212 for Aluminium Alloy Windows BS 6262 for Glazing BS 8118 for Aluminium BS 5950 for Steelwork SS CP 7 for Timber

2.1.3

Movement and Structural Tolerances

2.1.3.1

Structural Movement and Movement between Works by Others Ensure that performance, appearance and proper functioning of the window system is not affected by any movements, settlement, deflection, expansion or contraction, which can be expected to occur in the building or the construction process. Junctions between the window systems and adjacent work by others are to be formed to accommodate possible structural deflections or movement in that adjacent element without distortion to the works, or disintegration of joints between the works.

2.1.3.2

Structural Tolerances

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Accommodate tolerances on structure and window openings. 2.1.4

Acoustic and Noise Performance

2.1.4.1

Acoustic Performance Ensure that the window, its seals, baffles and flashings that form part of acoustic separators achieve the adequate industry-standard insulation and acoustic performance against noise break-in. Install insulation / sealant to eliminate noise break in through air gaps around windows

2.1.4.2 2.1.5

Noise Minimise drumming, creaking, rattling, whistling and any other noises from the windows audible to occupants. Fire and Smoke Performance

2.1.5.1

Non-Combustible Materials Ensure materials in the windows do not readily support combustion or add significantly to the fire load or give off toxic fumes.

2.1.5.2

Surface Spread of Flame and Fire Propagation Achieve Class O classification when tested in accordance with BS 476: Parts 6 & 7 internally and externally.

2.1.5.3

Fire and Smoke Stopping Meet the requirements for BCA and FSB for separation of fire and smoke compartments. It is noted that where the window does not bridge the edge of a floor or the wall separating two compartments there are no requirements.

2.1.6

Functionality

2.1.6.1

Appearance a. Achieve the geometry presented in the drawings and schedules. b. Achieve colours and appearances as per samples approved by the S.O.

2.1.6.2

Operation a. Meet the recommendations of SS 212 and BS 8213-1 in respect of reach distances to ensure the safe operation of opening vents by users. b. Meet the requirements for force required to operate the sash of a window set out in SS 212 and BS 6375-2, for the type(s) of windows concerned.

2.1.6.3

Security Resist willful dismantling in order to gain unauthorised entry or Vandalism.

2.1.6.4

Infestation Resist attack or infestation by micro-organism, fungi, insects, reptiles, birds or bats and rodents. Have no openings in the windows that permit

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

entry of insects, reptiles, birds or bats and rodents. 2.1.7 2.1.7.1

Durability Design Life of Components Achieve the following minimum design life requirements: a. b. c. d. e.

IGU’s 10 years PVF2 coating 15 years All metal components 10 years All gaskets 10 years Hinges, stays, locks and other ironmongery – 50,000 cycles

2.1.7.2

Corrosion In locations subject to wetting or condensation, do not use material susceptible to corrosion; or cause rust staining, or bi-metallic action.

2.1.7.3

Maintenance and Replacement Identify materials and components which under normal service conditions cannot meet the specified design life and allow for their monitoring and replacement. Detail the components such as to permit removal and replacement of individual assemblies without affecting adjacent assemblies or supporting framework.

3.0

MATERIAL AND COMPONENTS

3.1

Types of Window System Refer to the Window Schedule and Window Location Plans for the types of window systems and component requirements for this project.

3.2

Glazing 3.2.1

General All glass must: a. Comply with the requirements of SS 341 clause 3.2. b. Be clean cut, without significant edge faults (including feathered edges, shells or other imperfections) and free from bubbles, inclusions, cracks, rippling, dimples, sleeks or other defects. c. Be cut to accurate sizes in the factory. d. Be assessed for optical and visual faults as described in BS EN 572-2. Spot faults to be no worse than category C. Ensure there are no linear/extended faults. Optical faults to be within the limits set in BS EN 572-2. e. Have no local defects producing irregular reflections.

3.2.2 Lamination Laminated panes must:

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

a. b. c. d.

Comply with SS 341. Have PVB interlayer complying with BS 6206 Class A. Have edge steps less than 0.5mm in toughened or heat-treated glass. Bear identification marks indicating its nature and processor.

Protect the interlayer material from the effects of moisture absorption in service including clouding, shrinking back, degassing and delamination. Ensure that the interlayer is compatible with glazing sealants. 3.2.3

Heat Strengthened Glass Heat strengthened glass must: a. Comply with the requirements of SS 341 clause 3.2. b. Be tempered on a roller hearth furnace eliminating tong marks c. Conform to the following requirements in the horizontal heat treatment process: I. Maximum bow 0.2% II. Roller wave: All thicknesses 0.15mm depth maximum between peaks and troughs III. Edge dip: 0.25mm maximum d. Have identification marks indicating its nature and processor.

3.2.4

Toughened Glass Toughened glass must: a. Comply with SS 341. b. Be tempered on a roller hearth furnace eliminating tong marks c. Conform to the following requirements in the horizontal toughening process: I. Maximum bow: 0.2% II. Roller wave: All thicknesses 0.15mm depth maximum between peaks and troughs. III. Edge dip: 0.25mm maximum d. Have identification marks indicating its nature and processor. Location to be agreed with the S.O. Heat soak test all toughened glass for a minimum of 8 hours at 290 C, in accordance with DIN 18516 Part 4, to convert all nickel sulphide inclusions greater than 40 µm in diameter from the to the ß phase so that the glass will fracture in the test. After the test the probability of failure in service should be less than one in 130 tonnes. The manufacturer must, upon request, show by statistical analysis of test data that the probability of failure is not greater than the value quoted above.

3.2.5

Heat Treatment Prior to heat treatment: a. Grind flat edges to a small arris. b. Dubb corners. c. Grind out small shells and/or chips. d. Maximum chip/shell diameter 2 mm. Not more than four randomly placed chip/shells in any single pane of glass.

3.2.6

Insulating Glazed Units Insulating glazing units must have:

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

a. Hermetically sealed complying with BS 5713. b. Mechanically applied primary polyisobutylene seal located between glass and spacer providing a continuous vapour proof barrier with a minimum width of 2mm and a secondary two part silicone sealant extending around the perimeter of the unit. c. Aluminium alloy spacers with a natural or black finish and sufficient rigidity for their purpose, which are formed to accommodate seals and contain desiccant. d. All breather tubes nipped closed prior to installation. e. All corners and joints fabricated to ensure a vapour tight construction 3.2.7

3.3

Low Emissivity Coating Low emissivity coating must have: a. Emissivity less than 0.2. b. Nominally neutral in colour and uniform in tone, hue, colour, texture, pattern and opacity c. Consistent appearance to the glazed units.

Aluminium Components 3.3.1

Extrusions Designation 6063, temper T6 of BS 1474 unless otherwise agreed with the SO Comply with BS EN 486, BS 8118, BS EN 573-3, BS 1161 and BS EN 755 Minimum wall thickness in structural parts to be 1.2mm. Platforms, webs, flanges, races and screw flutes of sufficient size to satisfy all structural requirements and eliminate distortion of elements in the works.

3.3.2

Sheet, Strip and Plate Alloy to comply with BS EN 485-3. Not less than 1.6mm thick for hidden flashings, not less than 2mm thick for components exposed to view or to impact Stainless Steel Components.

3.3.3 Finishes to Aluminium 3.3.3.1 General Shop finish all visible and all other surfaces of aluminium exposed to the external environment, including drained and ventilated cavities and pressure equalisation chambers. Finish after any fabrication processes likely to damage the finish i.e. folding of sheet, but prior to assembly into units. 3.3.3.2 PVF2 Coating Resin content 70%, to meet requirements of AAMA 2605. 3.3.3.3 Polyester Powder Coat Heavy duty external grade polyester powder coat that conforms to AS 3715. Finish to be applied to all internal surfaces. 3.3.3.4 Anodised Aluminium Anodic oxidation of wrought aluminium to comply with AS 1231 with thickness grade AA25. 3.4

Carbon Steel Components

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.4.1

General Comply with structural specifications for requirements relating to secondary steel framing. Where used, comply with one of the following: a. Hot rolled steel complying with the requirements of BS EN 10025. b. Hot rolled sections to BS 4: Part 1, BS EN 10210-2 and BS EN 10021-1, tubes to BS 6323: Parts 1, 2 & 3 and angles to BS 4848: Part 4. c. Cold formed pre-galvanised steel sections to BS EN 10142, BS EN 10143, BS EN 10147 d. Steel sheet to BS 1449: Part 1.

3.4.2

Hot Dip Galvanising All carbon steel components to be hot dip galvanised in accordance with BS ISO 1461. Isolate all galvanised steel components in direct contact with cementitious surfaces with thin dense PVC or EPDM isolation packs. Do not use bituminous paint.

3.4.3

Paint Finishes For general requirement of applying paint on galvanised surfaces refer to structural specifications. Colours and gloss levels of any exposed items to the S.O’s direction. Finished surfaces to be dense and consistent, free from flow lines, streaks, pin holes, blisters, tears, lumps and other coating defects or surface imperfections when viewed from a distance of 1 metre under normal diffused daylight.

3.5

Stainless Steel Components 3.5.1 General Stainless steel components to be austenitic, complying with BS EN 10088 grades: a. X2CrNi18-10 (formerly grade 304 S11) for concealed locations b. X8CrNi18-9 (formerly grade 304 S31) for concealed locations c. X2CrNiMo17-12-2 (formerly grade 316 S11) for exposed locations d. X2CrNiMo18-14-3 (formerly grade 316 S13) for exposed locations 3.5.2

Plate, Sheet, Strip Comply with BS EN ISO 3506-1 and BS EN ISO 3506-2. Unless otherwise noted, grade 1.44xx (formerly 316) to be used for all visible components, in all other circumstances grade 1.34xx (formerly 304) to be used. Unless otherwise noted, grade A4 to be used for visible fasteners, in all other circumstances grade A2 to be used. Select the fastener property class so as to meet the performance criteria specified.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

3.6

Timber Unless otherwise specified all timber to be Kapur, Chengal or Balau Moisture content when fitted to be between 10-15%, moisture content between adjacent timbers to be no more than 3%. Pressure impregnate all timber, impregnation system to approval of the S.O. Fire retardant treatment system to the approval of the S.O. Season and kiln dry timber after treatment.

3.7

Frame Material Compatibility Select, design and install different materials to prevent bimetallic corrosion.

3.8

Fixings and Fasteners Use stainless steel fixings and fasteners with stainless steel and aluminium, or with non-metallic components wherever wetting may occur. a. Grade A4 to BS 6105 where visible b. May be reduced to grade A2 to BS 6105 where not visible Stainless steel fasteners may have hardened tips of other composition for self-drill and self-tap screws only. Use carbon steel bolts with carbon steel components Ordinary bolts and nuts to BS EN 24032, BS EN 24033, BS EN 24034. All plain and tapered washers to BS 4320, Form E. Nuts to BS 4190 for grade 8.8. For anchors, use stainless steel, galvanised steel or aluminium anchors and stainless steel fixings wherever wetting may occur (including condensation).

3.9

Setting Blocks Setting blocks to be Silicone Rubber, Polychloroprene or EPDM of appropriate hardness and resistance to compression set. Compounds must not leach out over time and cause staining, or deterioration of the block.

3.10

Sealants Select and install in accordance with BS 6213. Silicone sealants to comply with BS 5889. Polyurethane sealants to comply with BS 5215 Design sealant geometry (and cross section) to accommodate the anticipated substrate movement. Do not use acid curing sealants. Non-structural sealants-approved low modulus silicone (exposed or concealed) or

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

approved polyurethane sealant (concealed) Use in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, particularly relating to the use of primers. Sealants are to have: a. Backing rods- Non-gassing polyethylene closed cell foam b. Primers and joint preparation materials- as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Refer colour selection of any visibly exposed sealants to the S.O. 3.11

Accessories - Hinges, Stays, Locks and Other Ironmongery To manufacturer’s recommendation to comply with performance requirement and subject to the SO ’s acceptance.

4.0

WORKMANSHIP

4.1

Fabrication 4.1.1 Methods a. Select methods used for fabrication that will achieve the specified performance. b. Use jigs and computer controlled tools wherever appropriate to achieve accuracy. c. d.

e.

Use the correct tools for each task and equipment that is well maintained. Do not use blunt and worn tools. Carry out grinding, cutting, shaping and finishing materials using tools, techniques and ancillary materials that will not contaminate windows components with particles or substances which could disfigure, stain or corrode them. Undertake the assembly of components under factory controlled conditions.

4.1.2 Marking a. Mark strong points on components and materials for lifting, or to permit assembly or installation in a particular sequence; b. Clearly mark upper and lower faces, left and right handed pieces, top and bottom, components and materials or lengths close but critically different from one another. c. Ensure marks are removable or concealed when installed. 4.1.3 Fabrication Tolerances 4.1.3.1

Windows Framework Achieve the following maximum allowable tolerances for all windows framework: a. ±1.5 mm on length b. ±1.5 mm on straightness c. ±2° accuracy on angles

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

d. ±1 mm on sides and ±2mm on diagonals of opening positions 4.1.3.2 Glazing Achieve the following maximum allowable tolerances for individual panes of glass: a. ±2.0 mm on height and width b. ±1.0 mm on straightness of edges c. Tolerances on insulating glazed units allowed by BS 5713. 4.1.4 Corner Joint Fabrication Stake and crimp corners of windows. 4.1.5 Factory Glazing Work a. Comply with the recommended guidelines set out in SS212 and BS 6262. b. Remove any protective tapes from the edges of insulating glazed units. c. All roller wave to be horizontal. d. Install glazing units with at least 5mm clearance at the sides and top from the framing, and 6mm at the bottom with allowance for water to drain freely. e. Install gaskets without incorrect distortion such as stretching or compression of length, or folding back of wiper seals. 4.1.6 Factory Sealant Work a. Apply and cure sealants in accordance with their manufacturer ’s directions on minimum and maximum temperature and RH conditions. b. Achieve the depth to width geometry. c. Prevent three-sided adhesion. d. Use appropriate backer rods, tapes, surface preparation and primers as manufacturer’s directions. e. Tool off sealants neatly. f. Use small joint sealant in crevices where extrusions mitre together. 4.2

Installation 4.2.1 Line and Level Survey Undertake a survey of line and level and condition of structure and openings to verify acceptability to receive windows. 4.2.2

Setting-out Marks Ensure marks are removable or concealed when windows are installed.

4.2.3

Handling of Materials and Components Handle window by designed strong points only

4.2.4

Erection Tolerances Install the sub-frames and the windows to the more onerous of the following permitted deviations:

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

Horizontal and vertical ± 10 mm. position on elevation from site datum Horizontal position relative ± 2 mm to adjoining wall finishes Level: Plumb: Plane:

± 2 mm in any one structural bay. ± 2 mm in any one-storey height. ± 2 mm in any one storey height or structural bay width.

Intersection:

± 2 mm in alignment in any direction between any two adjoining windows

4.2.5

Window Anchors Verify correct location and fixing onto the building structure

4.2.6

Head and Subsills Install head and subsills with end dams and complete seals internally and to substrates. Secure head and subsills into window opening to resist loading as specified herein Install window unit into sub head / sub sill system to resist loading and weather penetration and to allow for building movements. Incorporate any drains and ventilation holes from the sub-sill.

4.2.7

Installation of Fixings Install fixings in accordance with their manufacturer’s instructions and procedures. The strength grade combination of bolts, nuts and washers to be as prescribed or recommended in British Standards. Use a torque spanner to achieve correct tightening of fixings to achieve correct tension load and avoid under / overstressing, Use lock-nuts to prevent loosening. At least one clear thread to show above the nut. Where required seal the heads of bolts and fixings.

4.2.8

Site Glazing Work Comply with the recommended guidelines set out in BS 6262. Remove any protective tapes from the edges of insulating glazed units. All roller waves to be horizontal. Install glazing units with at least 5mm clearance at the sides and top from the framing, and 6mm at the bottom with allowance for water to drain freely. Install gaskets without incorrect distortion such as stretching or compression of length, or folding back of wiper seals.

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

4.2.9

Site Sealant Work Apply and cure sealants in accordance with their manufacturer ’s directions on minimum and maximum temperature and RH conditions. Achieve the depth to width geometry. Prevent three-sided adhesion. Use appropriate backer rods, tapes, surface preparation and primers as manufacturer’s directions. Tool off sealants neatly.

4.3

Prote ction and C l e aning Protect vulnerable coated surfaces; glass, metal edges, corners and features. Apply temporary removable protection against damage from following trades or operations and the anticipated hazards. Materials used for temporary protection to be compatible with and subsequently removed from the surface and finishes without detriment to the finish. The component suppliers and finishers must approve methods for removal. Unless agreed otherwise by the S.O protection should remain in place until all work potentially damaging to the components or their finish has been undertaken. Replace any damaged components in the windows. Concession to this requirement will only be given if the proposed repair procedure is authorised by the SO and complete and warranted repair of the damage is achieved.

5.0

VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSION

5.1

Work Submissions Submit the following for SO’s acceptance prior to commencing fabrication and installation works: a. Method statements including methods and sequence of construction. b. Detailed drawings At a scale of no less than 1:2 illustrating the head, sill and jamb conditions, and their relationship to adjacent surfaces including tolerances, sealant application, backing rods and bond release tapes, internal finishes. Where relevant include for all changes in window direction in horizontal or vertical plane.

5.2

Shop Drawings Elevation of all windows at scale 1:10 including location of fixings, hinges and handles. b. Section through the head, sill, jam including adjacent surfaces and any change in direction at a scale of 1:2. a.

Do not commence fabrication until shop drawings have been reviewed and permission to proceed has been obtained from the S.O. Allow 21 days for the S.O review

A&A TO ST STEPHEN’S SCHOOL

5.3

Certification of Materials Provide the S.O with certification from the manufacturer of the following materials/ components, certifying that the respective material is of the correct grade, strength, size, finish, etc, and is in accordance with the relevant codes and standards specified. a. b. c. a. b.

5.4

Glass Frame finish Sealant compatibility Glass Frame finish Sealant compatibility

Maintenance Submissions Include the following information in the maintenance manual and logbook. a. Cleaning methods for glazing and metal b. Maintenance of hinges and handles

5.5

Quality Control Plan Submission Prepare and submit the quality control plan for S.O’s acceptance prior to starting work.

5.6

Samples and Mock-ups Submit one sample of each window type including glazing and proposed hardware for the S.O’s acceptance prior to ordering material. All approved samples to be kept in site store for reference. Submit also sample of hinges and handles and other ironmongeries for acceptance prior to fabrication.

5.7

Tests Demonstrate by the prime manufacturers testing that the surface compressive stress in the glass meets the requirements of SS 341 clause 3.2.